Home

EM-MWD Manual

1. BEBRO SOLENOID COMPONET 1 Black Black 2 Coil Common 2 Brown Top White Pulling Coil Top Center 3 Red Red Holding Coil Bottom Side 4 Orange N A Not Used 5 Yellow N A Not Used 6 Green N A Not Used 7 Blue N A Not Used 2 After soldering and assembling the Bebro to the Solenoid it is important to check for the proper readings 3 Use the Ohm Meter set on ohms to check the Bebro contacts as shown below HOLDING COIL 500 600 OHMS 69 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 4 The readings may vary slightly 5 Complete the assemblies of the oil fill section 6 Prior to taking the time to do an oil fill it is recommended that the following test also be done This may save having to redo the oil fill if the pigtail and bulknead happened to be bad 7 Use the alligator jumpers along with a little tie wire to test the connections on the MDM 8 Readings should be as below COIL COMMON 500 600 14 16 OHMS OHMS HOLDING COIL PULLING COIL Electronic Flow Switch EFS Once a tool has been built up prior to doing the oil fill our using an EFS Pulser driver the activation of the switch needs to be checked The procedure for checking the EFS is as follows 1 Plug the Pulser Test Box into the top of the assembled Pulser Note on the photo below we are connecting to the driver by itself but this is accomplishing exactly the same thing 2 Turn the main power supply switch on the Pulser T
2. Pipe Length PIsC Pulse Controls Parameter Block PIsW Pulse Width in effect PmpD Pump Data Block Pmps Pumps Status On Off PmpP Pump Pressure PmpT Pumps On Threshold PTO Pressure Transducer Offset correction PW1 Pulse Width for Telemetry Mode 1 PW2 Pulse Width for Telemetry Mode 2 PW3 Pulse Width for Telemetry Mode 3 PW4 Pulse Width for Telemetry Mode 4 Q qDCR qMIXTM Device Control Register qDFR qMIXTM Device Fault Register qDSR gMIXTM Device Status Register qDWR qMIXTM Device Warning Register qLNM qBus Host Mode Log Name XXXXXXXX QBM qLPA qBus Host Mode Log Path QBM qMem qMIXTM Memory I O Function diagnostic qMIX Go To Normal qMIXTM Mode Command qSCR qMIXTM System Control Register qSFR gMIXTM System Fault Register qSSR qMIXTM System Status Register qSW Software Version String refer to Ver R ROPd Constant Distance ROP Averaging Number ROPn Constant Time ROP Averaging Number RTOC Receiver Toolface Offset Computation Control RTTF Receiver Toolface Offset Computation Control 52 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software SFlw Simulated Flow control test amp diagnostic Site Job Site Information Data Block SN Processor Hardware Serial Number SSN1 Survey Sequence Number for Telemetry Mode 1 SSN2 Survey Sequence Number for Telemetry Mode 2 SSN3 Survey Sequence Number for Telemetry Mode 3 SSN4 Survey Sequence Number for Telemetry Mode 4 5541 Survey Sequence D
3. savor ww 310004 1YN01123810 ONI SSVdWOD 1 1 NOI123S T 31 25 9 11 130 9 9 NOIIO3S 011935 9 9 011935 5 5 162 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual CENTRALIZERS 1 ASSEMBLY DRAWING BOW SPRING 99 105 SMINMYH 304 4 37908 GO 2229 36 208 1962 30 i2434UM4 17124902 ZI NDUI CINITI DWG 289 19300 TDU LL 123802831NI 71395 O3UIM i 38WnN OM we 163 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual F 2 BOM BOW SPRING BOM Interconnect Assembly Bow Spring Non Serialized Part Part Number Size Product Line Description 201504 1 7 8 MWD Threaded Rings 201517 1 7 8 MWD Thread Protector Female 201503 Common MWD Split Shear Rings 201748 Common MWD Wired Shaft Interconnect 201751 Common MWD Blade Bow Spring 201753 Common MWD Bumper 201755 Common MWD Interconnect Bow Spring Assembly 201759 Common MWD Spring Compression 201760 Common MWD Washer Interconnect 301785 Common MWD Collar 2 Piece Bow Spring 4 Blade AS 027 Common MWD AS 027 O Ring Viton AS 213 Common MWD AS 213 O
4. 6 10 98 COMMON POWER TERMINATE SHIELD FUNCTIO REMO RMINAL SUPPLY BOX DOWNHOLE DH TOOL INTERF ACE ELECTRONIC 205 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Extension Cable Save Area Power Supply to Cable Part Number 384023 TERMINATE SHIELD TERMINATE SHIELD OWARDS REMOTE TERMINAL NUMBER FUNCTION Transducer Cable DRT to Pressure Transmitter 4 20 mA Part Number 384024 TERMINATE SHELO TERMINATE SHIELD COR COMME PI 11 n 5771 PIN NUMBE FUNCTION RE TURN FROM TRANSMH TER SUPPLY TO TRANSMITTER v SUPPLY TO TRANSMIT TER RETURN FROM 1 C Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual DATE CABLE REMOTE TERN NAL TO REMOTE NAL SUPPLY 803 NTALIXAZE 40020 CABLE REMOTE TERM NAL TO REMOTE TERM NAL C 1994 QUANTUM EOLUTDNS NC ALL REHTS RESERVED 207 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual ALL RIGHTS RESERVED IUNALENT CONDUCTOR 10 W BEADED CABLE REMOTE TERN NAL SUPPLY BOX TOW ARDS RENOTE Gal PRODUCTS SANTA CLARA ERMINAL 208 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual XPTD63L4 19P CABLE REMOTE TERN NAL TO PRESSURE TRANSM TTER 4 20NA CABLE RE
5. omun _ ma cm vertvonen 0 ma t __ la j jJ 49 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual ASSY PULSER OIL FILLED 175 MWD PULSER FORCE TEST aka VACUUM TEST vacuum m tool valve NE atmosphere oil reserve hal t t 7 7 1 41 open 7144 open Chart See Previous Step Notes for Valve Position 50 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual PULSER OIL FILL FIXTURE COLOR DIAGRAM 9 jequieq 10 51 Chapter 4 Maintenance Manual BOM Pulser Assembly Tensor Asset Part Number Size Product Line Description 201125 1 7 8 MWD Pulser System w Driver 175 Serialized Part Part Number Size Product Line Description 2011255 1 7 8 MWD Pulser System w Driver 175 201128 1 7 8 MWD Driver Pulser 175 201135 Common MWD Solenoid Non Serialized Part Part Product Number Size Line Description 201157 1 7 8 MWD Compensation Membrane Housing 201195 1 7 8 MWD Housing Solenoid 201203 1 7 8 MWD Pulser Screen Housing w Oil Fill Hole 201509 1 7 8 MWD Housing Interconnect 201511 1 7 8 MWD Housing Lower Oil Fill 201513 1 7 8 MWD Housing Upper Oil Fill 201514 1 7 8 MWD Intermodule End 201532 1 7 8 MWD Housing Pulser Driver 201845 1 7
6. Pulse Width Survey Seq Tool Face Seq Acq Time Transmit 1 0 600 v fr fe foz Each mode number represents a different power selection Low Volt Mode 1 8 Amp Mode 2 5 Amp Mode 3 3 Amp Mode 4 3 Amp Re sync Option for underbalanced situations when the flow switch stays on Tool will re sync after 16 minutes High Volt Mode 1 4 Amp Mode 2 2 5 Amp Mode 3 1 Amp Mode 4 z mud pulse telemetry Multi Frequency Settings are selected by the Toolface logging sequence T L Sequence 1 0 370 Default T L Sequence 2 0 250 T L Sequence 3 0 125 T L Sequence 4 0 78 Do not use still under development Select the Mode Number to match the required power Leave the Survey Sequence corresponding to the mode per example above This helps indicate which mode you are in when downlinking is enabled Do not run mode 1 or 2 8 or 5 Amp with the standard batteries it will blow the fuse Only run the 8 and 5 Amp with the EM batteries Pulse Width DO NOT USE any pulse width greater than 0 6 This will adversely affect the pulse definition and decoding ELS Chapter 5 Operations Manual Magnetic Field Data and Directional Processing Controls 4 Location Specific Data Input all required fields This Information should be furnished by the client 4 Location Specific Data shop Nominal Dip Angle 55 00 Dip Angle Tolerance 5 00 Nominal Magnetic Field
7. 55 COMBINATION MUD PULSE ELECTROMAGNETIC OPERATIONS MANUAL LEGAL NOTE This manual is the property of Compass Directional Guidance Inc This manual must remain with the principal user of the Compass EM tool COPYRIGHT Copies made by anyone without the permission of Compass Directional Guidance Inc is an infringement of copyright Field Operations Manual TABLE CONTENTS SECTION CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION A COMPASS PLATFORM B OTHER ACCESSORIES 1 GAMMA 2 RESISTIVITY 3 PRESSURE WHILE DRILLING CHAPTER 2 THEORY OF OPERATION A MUD PULSE B EM C THEORY OF CODING amp DECODING CHAPTER 3 SURFACE HARDWARE amp SOFTWARE A BENCHTREE B GE 1 SOFTWARE 2 HARDWARE C KEYDRILL D DIGIDRILL CHAPTER 4 MWD MAINTENANCE MANUAL A NOTES ON ASSEMBLY 1 NOTES ON ASSEMBLY PROCEDURES 2 O RINGLIST B PULSER SOLENOID STLYE HOT HOLE MANUFACTURING PROCEDURE amp FUNCTIONAL TEST LOWER END ASSEMBLY DRAWING BOM MAINTENANCE PULSER STEPPER MOTOR STYLE 1 MANUFACTURING PROCEDURE 2 PULSER OIL FILL FIXTURE COLOR DIAGRAM 3 ASSEMBLY DRAWING 4 BOM BILL OF MATERIALS BATTERY PACK ASSEMBLY 1 BATTERY MAINTENANCE 2 BOM BILL OF MATERIALS 3 EMBATTERIES 4 BATTERY SAFETY Field Operations Manual PAGE 1 2 3 6 7 9 9 10 1 15 16 3 40 43 1 38 39 70 71 92 94 109 110 147 La 0 84 4 34 34 43 51 52 54 55 83 84 110 111 112 113 114 115 13
8. we 7 5 jose aslam 22 sooo om 2 15 saw we e s jose one 22 ok so vor zo 22 15 ize 9 7 5 ose ars 22 homas sooo ur o ot 15 raw we o m s 22 os ox 188 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Poppet Orifice Table 3 1 2 Tool String Measured SPP Pulse Pulse Orifice Poppet Mud Mud Mud Solids Bit Hole Drill Colar Job Depth Rate Amplitude Length Size Size Weight Vis Size pL pL Luo wo m 1 un os wr we e ors ar an zlo sm e so w Jo cn w 25608 wn e so w far am 256008 W o se os ar Lm w om oo ars zm Lmm w tam om oo ars zm 2558 11 ce s us ar ame w om oo vo w ar zm ox amo w oo w ar zm Lum s w uz om oo ars zm aison cao w w om ars zm 25508 ox s w
9. 18 Hot Air Gun 6 19 Isopropyl alcohol 6 1 20 Multimeter 6 1 21 Needle nose Pliers 6 1 22 Nut Driver 6 1 23 Omega Meter 6 1 24 Permanent Marker 6 1 25 Piston Cap Tool Fixture 6 1 26 Pulser Test Box 6 1 27 Pulser Test Cable Slave 6 1 28 Punch x2 6 1 29 Ratchet Wrench 72 Drive 6 1 30 Rubber Mallet 7 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 6 1 31 6 1 32 Safety Wire Pliers 6 1 33 Screwdriver Flat Blade 6 1 34 Screwdriver Phillips Drive 6 1 35 Slave Plug 6 1 36 Snubber Shock Pigtail Slave 6 1 37 Solder 6 1 38 Steel Stamp Set 74 6 1 39 Steering Tool Gear Wrench 1 74 6 1 40 Strain Gauge 6 1 41 Syringe 60cc with Oil fill Adapter 6 1 42 System Gauge 6 1 43 Tip Tester Fixture 6 1 44 Torque Wrench 6 1 45 Torsion Spring Clamps 6 1 46 Tweezers 6 1 47 Vacuum Pump 6 1 48 V Block x2 6 1 49 Wire Cutters 6 2 Materials refer to the bill of materials and assembly drawings 7 0 PROCEDURE 7 1 Assemble Spring Shaft Assembly 7 1 1 Apply a few small dots of Loctite 243 to the threads of the Bellows Shaft part number 201 142 7 1 2 Thread the Bellows Shaft to the Spring Shaft Plug 201115 Hand torque only 8 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 1 3 Using Loctite 243 thread the Spring Shaft 201141 to the Spring Shaft Plug 201115 Assemble carefully and avoid excessive torque to prevent damage to parts 7 1 4 Inspect the assembly verify it is
10. Fiia Char ia basa on iho a Ciocia Type MELL 44 Chapter 5 Operations Manual C MWD Tool Pickup And Lay Down Procedures amp Torque Guide COMPASS MWD Tool Pickup and Lay Down Procedures THIS IS THE MOST CRITICAL TIME FOR HANDLING THE MWD TOOL MWD TOOL EXPOSURE TO DAMAGE THAT CAN BE CONTROLLED IS AT ITS HIGHEST UTMOST CARE AND ATTENTION TO HANDLING DETAILS MUST BE OBSERVED AND FOLLOWED THE MWD OPERATOR IS ULTIMATELY IN CHARGE OF ALL ASPECTS OF MWD TOOL HANDLING THE MWD OPERATOR WILL TAKE CHARGE OF ALL ASPECTS INVOLVING THE HANDLING OF THE MWD PROBE THE UBHO AND THE MULESHOE SLEEVE ANY QUESTION TO THIS AUTHORITY SHOULD BE DIRECTED TO THE MWD MANAGER OR SUPERVISOR ON CALL 45 Chapter 5 Operations Manual 1 MWD Tool Pickup Procedure a Meet with the rig crew and explain the pickup procedure to insure that the tool is picked up in a safe and secure manner to protect all personnel and the tool during the pickup procedure Use a minimum of three 3 persons to move the tool from the build area to the rig and back b The tool will be completely assembled and carried by three 3 persons to the open side of the V door between the rig and the pipe rack Refer to Figure 3 Place the top of the tool spear point closest to the rig Lay the tool on the ground or on one or two jack stands DO NOT pickup from the catwalk through the V Door c Attach the lifting bale to th
11. wyo lt 6 5 wyo lt 6 9 WYO lt 1 wyo 08 lt 8 9 lt 5 WYO Wh lt S WYO WE lt oS gt 99 UMOYS gt JO au lt JeAeu Pinoys Mq syueuoduio2 910449919 jeuuou uea se2uejsisay ueuo au uo SUBIS lt 9 gt 94 0 950 2 pue y oj 10 yoejg Pua oj 10 poy j2auuoo 291109 19540 aq snui sjueujenseaui WAG puesg eynjJ e esf Ku sieyeur ed 43993 sn LON OG uuo 8 6 9 oN uuo wievg 8 uuo wyeuvg Z uuo wreuvg 9 uuo lt 8 9 wyo lt uuo lt WYO y 52 lt 6 wyo WYO y 99 lt 9 uuo WYO uuo w euvary wyo Wh lt 0b WYO Wi e t WYO 8 5 uuo lt WYO Wi 9 WYO wi c c uuo Wiep t WYO ptt uuo Wieuvart wyo Wi orc wyo 1 lt 6 WYO lt WYO lt WYO Wi 9c WYO Wh lt S 2 WYO Wh lt b 2 WYO lt wyo Wi lt uva 2 WYO wise wyo uuo 090986 Nd Kiowa 1 1029 uod ejDuis y Dururejuoo 94 10 3994 INO Bury 157
12. Condition Clean all parts of mud and soil Clean solenoid with contact cleaner Solenoid 1 Check thc outgoing pull and hold Resistance and record below Driver E Rev Pull Resistance Spec 13 0 14 2 ohms Hold Resistance Spec 500 600 ohms Inspect the bebro connector for corrosion and damage Check all wiring that enters the solenoid for nicks cuts and teflon cold flow Check all splices for integrity and rework any bad splices Check solenoid screw for straightness Replace if necessary Check magnetism on clapper Replace if necessary Spray contact cleaner into solenoid and stroke Ensure free travel Check spring shaft and short spring shaft for any bending and wear Replace as required Remove wire tube and sleeve from flow sensor plug Clean thoroughly and reinstall with 243 blue Loctite Replace bellow Check springs for distortion and stretching Note each spring must be gt 2 5 inches in length Replace compensation membrane Clean and inspect the orifice Replace if necessary Clean threads and reinstall with 243 blue Loctite Inspect poppet and poppet assembly Replace if necessary Inspect all remaining parts Clean all threaded holes and O ring grooves Replace all O rings Document 0017 27 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Tensor Pulser 2 To be performed on tools with lt 300 hours ASSEMBLY Tighten Long spring shaft to Solenoid shaft with 243 Blue
13. Downhole Direction Attach to Geolograph Line threaded as shown around the idler pulleys at the top and the bottom and around the main measuring wheel The wing nuts on the idler pulleys can be loosened to allow the guide plate to be rotated allowing the cable to be threaded around the pulleys Insure that the sensor is securely anchored to the rig structure at the securing points to keep the sensor in place and prevent it from riding up and down as the line feeds through Shaft Encoder 193 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Standpipe Pressure Transducer 194 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual H 5 SURFACE SYSTEM CABLING DIAGRAM SAFE AREA P N 384021 P N 384023 P N 384023 RB 8 2 al CABLE PROGRAM qMWD TOP RE 8 P N 384027 MINIMUM TenaorM W D ELECTRONICS ASSEMBLY 983130 TensorM W D ELECTRONICS CARTRIDGE COPYRIGHT C 1995 2002G E RIGHTS RESERVED HAZARDOUS AREA D P N 384016 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER P N 384022 P N 384024 P N 384017 P N 384022 9 ATES THAT THE TERMINATED AT CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN IN THE ORIENTATION OF CABLE P N 384022 SURFACE SYSTEM CARUNG DIAGRAM EI 5 195 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 6 CABLING DIAGRAM W DEPTH TRACKING H P N 384023 COPYRIGHT C SAFE AREA P N 384008 P N 384025
14. 1 1 715 S p3 15 y f P it follows that the expectation value changes sign inversion We used here the fact that 2 being a symmetry operator is unitary J J and by definition the Hermitian adjoint J may be moved from bra to ket and then becomes J J Since the only quantity that is equal to minus itself is the zero the expectation value vanishes p 0 In the case of open shell atoms with degenerate energy levels one could define a dipole moment by the aid of the first order Stark effect This only gives a non vanishing dipole by definition proportional to a non vanishing first order Stark shift if some of the wavefunctions belonging to the degenerate energies have opposite parity i e have different behavior under inversion This is a rare occurrence but happens for the excited H atom where 2s and 2p states are accidentally degenerate see this article for the origin of this degeneracy and have opposite parity 2s is even and 2p is odd E Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Field from magnetic dipole See also Magnet The Two Models for Magnets Magnetic Poles and Atomic Currents and Magnetic Field Physical interpretation of the H field Magnitude The far field strength B of a dipole magnetic field is given by B m r A m 1 3sin gr where B is the strength of the field measured in teslas r is the distance from the center measured in me
15. 10 The step rate is the density of the curve data to be added to the track The lowest of 1 produces a smoother curve and is the default Corrected curve depths are adjusted using the stored surveys Vertical Section curves This instructs GeoLogPlot are useful for that any gaps in the data that horizontal section is larger than this amount plots should not be drawn 135 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software After a curve is selected GeoLogPlot will inquire whether the surveys from the database should be added These surveys will be listed in the right most track e GeoLogPlot will also inquire if the job information should be included for the data in plot s header page 9 Use the information for header data The resulting display would look similar to the illustration at the top of this section A print preview of the plot would produce T The header page with the job information included ET i T 1 HI i TIT mn 1 ALI Ho Hr pr mm nece The curve data inserted into the selected track Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 136 The survey data is inserted into the right most track 3 2 Editing Curve To edit the curve select the curve to modify by clicking on its description in the title block of the track it is
16. Compare Mame THE COMPANY dob Number 08512 Operstor THE OPERATOR Location T30173120 LONG 56 42 47 04 NABORS Stabe LEE Couty HARRELL E 7 RE Fidd Hoth Reference True Edit your tie in information here 284 Inclination Track Tod Inio ae Edit tool offset information here 5 3 Survey Log The survey log editor allows you to modify the surveys stored in the database including adding new surveys and deleting unwanted surveys Each time a survey is modified all the surveys after it are automatically re calculated Jf Data Editor Heb Stail Page Loginlomnalion Surveys GammaLog Temperature Suvey Repot Inclination Azimuth Dip GTotal HTotal Temperature Lasi Changed Right click 1087 8210 26325 5970 982056 4940952 000 7 20 2006 1 56 here to add 10838 8270 263 Bh 58 80 1002 21 48406 27 0 00 1120 2006 1 58 des 10871 90 80 26368 59 60 1000 07 4845117 0 00 2 20 2008 1 58 entries 10802 91 20 263958 5970 100237 4839366 040 7 20 2006 1 58 10834 81 80 263 85 59 70 1001 14 4840837 0 00 1088 9280 26438 59 80 1000 10 4945090 000 Edit existing entries in place 10897 9310 26458 5930 99937 4030178 000 11028 81 70 25456 5900 100218 4833867 000 7 20 2000 1 58 11081 8210 265 08 59 80 1001 70 49401 31 0 00 7 20 2008 1 58 11092 9290 26518 5950 1000 99 48480103 000 7 20 2006 1 58 1112
17. 16 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 9 6 Install 1 O ring AS 127 VITON 75D to the inner groove at 1 end of the pressure bulkhead 7 9 7 Install 1 O ring type AS 125 VITON 75D to the outer groove at same end of the pressure bulkhead 7 9 8 Install 1 O ring type AS 127 VITON 75D to the inner groove at the other end of the pressure bulkhead 7 9 9 Install 1 O ring type AS 125 VITON 75D to the outer groove at the same end of the pressure bulkhead 7 9 10 Apply silicone lubricant inside the up hole end of the pressure bulkhead housing where the M4 connector will seat 7 9 11 Verify that the M4 connector has a 200 etched into the shoulder indicating it is for use in high temperature tools 7 9 12 Apply silicone lubricant on the area between the brass rings at the top of the M4 connector 7 9 13 Install the M4 connector in the down hole end of the pressure bulkhead housing assembly 7 9 14 Verify that the 4 slots in the pressure bulkhead assembly are not aligned with the screw holes in the pressure bulkhead housing 217 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 9 15 Verify that the 2 oblong holes the pressure bulkhead assembly not aligned with the screw holes in the pressure bulkhead housing 7 9 16 Verify that the distance between the edge of the pressure bulkhead and the edge of the M4 connector is from 550 to 565 7 9 17 Apply Loctite 243 to the nose only
18. 63 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software qProg 11 TM Compatibility Notice qProg 11TM is designed to be a general purpose PC utility program for loading programs into Motorola M68HC11 MCU based equipment such as the qMWDTM receiver remote terminal and the downhole transmitter Please note that while GE Power Systems general practice is to test programs on several different brands and models of computers GE Power Systems cannot guarantee that qProg 11TM or any other programs will be 10096 compatible with all brands of PCs If you have questions concerning the compatibility of the software with a particular brand of PC please direct them to GE Power Systems 1840 Royston Lane Round Rock TEXAS 78664 9555 512 251 4131 qMWDTM 01 Quick Start Instructions Installing qMWD PCTM Programs amp Files Windows 95 98 Windows NT For clients using the Windows 95 98 Windows NT versions of the QDT MWD software just insert the CD containing the software in to the CD port of the PC and follow the highlighted prompts to properly install the programs The gProg1 1 programs will be located on the C drive To operate the qProg11 programs Windows 95 users Boot the PC in the DOS mode using the F8 soft key to prevent Windows from starting and go to the Prompt Only mode Windows 98 Windows NT users Just Reboot the system in the DOS mode for the features to operate DOS 6 22 For clients still using DOS 6 22 use t
19. If you are using a Windows version other than 2000 or XP You will need to manually change the IP address Under the control panel you will need to change your network properties for the Local Area Connection Change the TCP IP address to 192 168 0 15 with a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 Restart your machine after this and try restarting the program If you are still having problems with this software feel free to contact Bench Tree Technical Support service benchtree net 20 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software MWD Configuration Utility Version 1 4 Installing the software This software is packaged in the MWD Software Installation CD It is installed after running the automatic install from the CD If you have any questions on the installation refer to the installation section in the beginning of this manual Starting the Program After installing the program you will have shortcuts to access the program from the desktop and from within the start menu in the Bench Tree Group folder It is recommended that you have the BTR powered on and are connected to it with an Ethernet cable before starting the program If you wish to correctly communicate to the receiver from this software the BTR must have a firmware version of 1 5 4 or higher Connecting to the BTR is not required if you only wish to use the editing features of this program Using the Program Upon starting the program you will be prompted to choose a con
20. The signal orifice is placed in the lower end of the mule shoe sleeve with the beveled edge facing UpHole Refer to Table 2 for references to orifice selection sizes Poppet End Size Selection There are three poppet end sizes to choose from when configuring the MWD probe The sizes available are i 1 122 201140 ii 1 086 201213 iii 1 040 201214 Refer to Tables 2 and 3 for references to poppet end selection sizes The combination of these six orifice sizes and the three poppet tip sizes allows for numerous variations in configurations to accommodate the various flow regimes encountered in the field 178 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 2 POPPET TABLE Table 2 Poppet Orifice Selection Chart for 6 2 and 4 3 4 Muleshoes Orifice LD 1 35 1 35 1 35 Part No Poppet PartNo 201068 201067 201066 201051 201059 201060 201140 201213 201214 201140 201213 201214 201140 201213 201214 201140 201213 201214 201140 201213 201214 201140 201213 201214 179 Flow Ranges GPM Below 250 200 375 475 700 475 750 500 800 Over 700 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Flow Ranges GPM 12 201967 1122 201140 1 086 201213 1 20 1 040 201214 201966 1 122 201140 1 086 201213 1 040 201214 201961 1 122 201140 1 086 201213 1 040 201214 180 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual A Order of Pop
21. pesn 176 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual os e JO ainpeaoJd 141 esp aroge perensnij eauanbas aas mojaq yun ayy y yun WO LL LOG ay oyu 6 qe1ue2 Jayo ipium sud pesodxe seu Jezpejue2 e jo pue eu 341033044 ains 5 195181 177 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Standard Tool Configuration pulser battery directional module Gamma w one battery pulser gamma battery directional module Gamma w two batteries Pulser gamma battery 1 directional module battery 2 Note Other configurations are possible Refer to Module Position Options page The type of service provided and the requirements of the well determine the selection of specific MWD modules and their configuration in the probe design Refer to Figure 2 for a layout of the various module configurations available with the MWD Signal Orifice Size Selection There are six sizes of orifices to choose from when using the 6 gt or the 4 3 muleshoe sleeves The sizes available are i 1 28 201068 ii 1 35 201067 1 40 201066 iv 1 50 201051 v 1 55 201059 vi 1 60 201060
22. 4 Pulse Detection The QDT receiver uses the cascade of a simple front end analog roofing filter followed by a steep cut off tuneable low pass filter followed by a matched filter executed in software This methodology is discussed in the paper by Marsh et al mentioned above The matched filter has been shown to be the optimum filter for detecting signals corrupted by additive white Gaussian noise under a wide variety of criteria Use of the matched filter has proven effective in many different MWD systems over the years QDT has the ability to shift the tuneable filter edge during operation to help reduce the effect of inband interference For those cases where the noise interference is concentrated in the upper portion of the passband manually lowering the low pass cut off frequency will reduce the noise interference faster than it reduces the signal resulting in enhanced signal detection quality The results of the pulse detection process are the application in time of the centroid of the best pulse located in the allowed time window its amplitude and other characteristics In case multiple pulses are detected in the allowed symbol window and evaluation process is started which may enable the correct pulse to be selected 42 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Decoding Process After each pulse is detected the value of the symbol corresponding to its location is determined and when all of the expected pulses that make up
23. Idle Current 24 mA Solenoid pivees 0 01 Pull in Coil Voltage gt 65 Volts Holding Coil Voltage Pull in Coil Duration BS Mis 10 Ats Pull in Coil Current 4 0 Am Holding Coil Current Connect the pulser to a test box and ensure that the FLOW indicator light is ON Tap pulser for flow switch function Flow switch voltage Check for pull force hold force and RSF Record in table below Specs Measured OUTGOING PULL FORCH 10 17ibs Tbs OUTGOING HOLD FORCH __ gt 1 RETURNSPRING FORCE 3ibs ibs off Document 0017 28 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Tensor Pulser Level 2 To be performed on tools with 300 hours Perform a vibration test for 10 minutes if vib table is avail Update the tool tracking system L1 Write tool sn on green tag and hrs and on pulser Li Review this checklist to verify that all tests were performed and that all procedures were followed Comments and Faults Found Parts Used Oty Description Document 0017 29 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 10 63 solder these 3 wires together 7 10 64 Hook crimp and solder the two brown wires together 7 10 65 Hook crimp and solder the two red wires together 7 10 66 Clean the exposed wir
24. PROCEDURE FOR LEAKING OR VENTED BATTERIES Leaking or vented batteries should be isolated from personnel and equipment If possible the area should be vented to the outside Prior to handling the temperature of the batteries should be checked with a remote sensing device such as an infrared temperature probe If the batteries are at ambient temperature they should be handled with rubber gloves or non conductive pliers or tongs and placed in plastic bags containing Sodium Carbonate Spilled electrolyte should be absorbed with Sodium Carbonate and placed in plastic bags All bags should be placed in a sealed and labelled drum with Vermiculite or other non flammable cushioning material such as sand or Sodium Carbonate to cushion the batteries These materials should be disposed as previously discussed under Safe Disposal in the Lithium Battery Safety Manual PROCEDURE FOR HOT BATTERIES As soon as a hot battery is detected all personnel should be evacuated from the area The temperature of the battery should be monitored with a remote sensing device such as an infrared temperature probe The area should remain evacuated until the battery has cooled to ambient temperature When the battery has returned to ambient temperature it can be handled by an operator wearing protective equipment face shield flak jacket and gloves with non conductive pliers or tongs The batteries should be placed in plastic bags containing Sodium Carbonate and then plac
25. This will enable WITS data to be sent out the computer serial port Comport Choose the serial comport from the available ports The serial comport must be available when the program is started for this program to recognize it Baud Rate Choose the WITS serial baud rate you are using WITS Data Output Check any of the data listed that you wish to send out the WITS port 17 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software SHUTTING DOWN amp SAVING USER SETTINGS If you are connected to a BTR version 1 5 5 or higher you will be able to shutdown the system from this Windows interface program This option is located under the File menu and it is the selection called Shutdown BTR The program will prompt you to verify that you are about to shutdown the system making the receiver non operational Shutting the system down this way will ensure that all system files are closed correctly HELP USING THE PROGRAM If you have questions on how to use the program click on the He p menu and select Help Contents This will display a searchable help file After moving and resizing the windows you may want to reset them back to their original size at some point To do this select the Help menu and click on Reset Window Locations Clicking on the About item from the Help menu will display the current software version information 18 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Q How do
26. 1 0 SCOPE This procedure describes the functional testing at room temperature required to verify proper function under the vacuum test conditions for the Assy Pulser Oilfilled 175C MWD PN 201126 2 0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS 2 1 GE RS QA Manual Section 13 2 1 2 SOP C 5250 3 Qualification of Inspection and Test Personnel 2 1 3 SOP 290 15 1 Nonconformance Report NCR Procedure 2 1 4 Assembly Work Package 3 0 DEFINITIONS 3 1 Operator or Assembler The individual who performs a specific or several manufacturing steps 3 1 2 Documentation Point A step in a procedure requiring the operator to record information from an inspection test or process to a specified location such as in a Traveler Work Package or database 3 1 3 Work Package A package that may contain the Traveler Pick List or Bill of Materials relevant Assembly Drawings and other related documents needed to fabricate a product 3 1 4 Traveler A document contained in the Work Package that identifies the manufacturing and inspection steps required for the fabrication assembly and testing of a product 3 1 5 Pick List A list of piece parts required to fabricate a product The Pick List will not include standard commodities such as solder 3 1 6 Bill of Materials A list of all parts and materials required to fabricate a product The Bill of Materials will include standard commodities such as solder 3 1 7 Assembly Drawing An engineering drawing with product
27. 8 aTFA 8 P BatV 8 P 23 By right clicking the 10 the operator can select the parameters to be displayed in KeyDrill s rig floor display 107 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 24 By right clicking the 10 the operator can select the parameters to be displayed KeyDrill s rig floor display DipA RFD Top Let Display Select MagF v DipA Temp Grav Gamma xTFa Battery Pressure Svy Rel Clear All Pump Pressure PSI Pulse Amplitude The data color indicates whether the data is inside the presetting range or not If the data is in the range it displays in GREEN Otherwise it displays in RED as DipA shown above 25 Pump On time can be found 11 26 If you have any problem or you have some troubles to decode please send your Config mwd file with your recorded waveform files located in the directory C Program Files Key Drill Technology LLC KDT JobDir to Contact KeyDrill com Then please feel free to contact KeyDrill Technical Support at Contact KeyDrill com or call 281 253 2066 108 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 109 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software D DIGIDRILL Digital Drilling Data Systems DigiDrill Data Logger and Applications Operator s Manual 110 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 1 Introduction The applications included the product separated in
28. P N 384039 P N 384027 MINIMUM MW D ELECTRONICS ASSEMBLY MW D ELECTRONICS CARTRIDGE 1995 2002 G EPow er System ALL RIGHTS RESERVED CABLE PROGRAM qMWD TOP HAZARDOUS AREA P N 384029 REMOTE TERMINAL JUNCTION BOX HI UNOVE HM 1EM MUD PRESSURE TRANSMITTER P N 384031 OR XO CABLE MUD PRESSURE TRANSMITTER P N 384017 P N 384037 HOOK LOAD TRANSMITTER P N 384032 DEPTH ENCODER P N 384033 DTP NS384036 RIG HEAVE J SENSOR P N 384035 SECONDARY COMPENSATION STROKES 2 RIC SENSOR 1 GENERIC SENSOR 2 QUANTUMSOLLUTIONSS I SANTACLARA CALIKIRNL 196 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual GAMMA MODULE 201950 1 1 GAMMA MODULE ASSEMBLY PROCEDURES GAMMA MODULE ASSEMBLY PROCEDURES 1 Lower End 1 1 Grease O rings and install onto Intermodule End 201514 as shown below Tape threads to prevent damage to O rings Note Leave protective caps not shown on electrical connectors to guard against damage 1 2 Assemble the Gamma Snubber Pigtail 201955 and Gamma Snubber Shock 201953 as shown below Use Loctite 243 on the MDM connector screws 2 56 x 1 4 Pan 100030 Do not over tighten Note Make sure the pigtail wires lay flat in the wire groove on the bottom of the Snubber 1 3 Pass the 4 pin 6 socket connector through the Intermodule End as shown Using Loctite attach Snubber Intermodule End using four 6 32 x gt Screws 103180
29. Snubber Assembly Pulser Driver Solenoid Spacer Rotary Connector Female Rotary Connector Male Retaining Ring Solenoid Pigtail Pulser Driver AS 006 O Ring Viton AS 012 O Ring Viton AS 020 O Ring Viton AS 124 O Ring Viton AS 125 O Ring Viton AS 127 O Ring Viton AS 217 O Ring Viton AS 218 O Ring Viton AS 220 O Ring Viton Screw Servo Poppet Tip Screw 8 32 x 5 16 Phil Flat SS Screw 6 32 x 1 2 SHCS SS Screw 6 32 x 3 4 SHCS SS 2532 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Quantity 3 00 1 00 1 00 3 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 2 00 1 00 2 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 3 00 2 00 4 00 3 00 5 00 6 00 1 00 1 00 2 00 1 00 6 00 4 00 4 00 Non Serialized Part Part Number SC 015 SC 026 SC 028 035 037 058 059 Product Line MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD Description Screw 4 40 x 1 4 SHCS SS Screw 8 32 x 1 4 SHCS SS Screw 8 32 x 1 8 SHCS SS Screw 2 56 x 1 4 SHCS SS Screw 6 32 X 3 8 Phil Flat SS Screw Set Hole for Flow Sensor Plug Screw 2 56 x 1 4 Pan Head SS 54 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Quantity 2 00 3 00 4 00 2 00 3 00 1 00 2 00 7 PULSER MAINTENANCE PULSER MAINTENANCE The following has been prepared as a guide in the event that it has been a while sinc
30. and lists in time sequenc n in History Data lists all history data received since KDT receiver was turned ON or today Survey Data will display all Survey data received since KDT receiver was turned ON or today lists all current data The new data will overwrite the old data if the same data is received It will display the current data with the survey data on top followed by Telemetry data 104 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software window Click 19 will open the following Waveform Display Pressure Lem Pulse Amplitude Scale 0 10 PSI 0 20 PSI 0 50 PSI 0 100 PSI v 0 200 PSI 0 500 PSI 0 1000 PSI By moving the mouse and right clicking the mouse button the Pulse Amplitude Scale pop up menu will appear The scale in left hand side is the pressure scale The scale in right hand side is the Pulse amplitude scale The pressure scale adjusts automatically and the Pulse amplitude scale is adjusted manually 105 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 20 21 Clicking e will open the following window Select the parameters you want for your WITS output Wits Output Data Inclination Tool Face Azimuth lv Ganna Pump Pressure Inclination Thresh Clicking will open the following window New Run Control New Run Control Current Run Current Run s 3 New Run 3 Daily C Run Pu
31. coordinator prior to its return 38 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Batteries When a job is dispatched the operator is to review battery requirements and ensure that he has ample supply to complete the job plus budget for failures and extended runs Typically a kit will be supplied with 2 sets in barrels one of which may have low life remaining It is expected that operators will try to maximize battery consumption prior to rebuild After a battery is depleted the operator shall inform the coordinator who will decide whether or not a battery shall be rebuilt in the field or returned to the shop The return of a battery in rebuilt or stripped condition is deemed the responsibility of the field hand and shall be completed when a kit is turned in Batteries are to be transported in accordance with UN regulations 39 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation C THEORY CODING DECODING For some who are used to operating other MWD systems where manual decoding is possible not having this option available may be a little concerning However after working with the system you will find that manual decoding is not really necessary The QSI system can normally decode even in the worst situation with a few changes to your set up To better explain how the system works the following is 05 5 paper on their system QMWD Coding Detection and Decoding Processes A Brief Description 1 Background A large number of different coding
32. uz o w ors ar 210 2 2 2 2718 2718 211 216 216 w oa w 6 os 45 om 2 216 2 78 2718 21 21 2718 County Comments ST Closed Area D 189 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 3 SURFACE GEAR SETUP DIAGRAM A UPS MUST be used at all times for the SASB power The use of two UPS s is an option not a requirement one will suffice G E Tensor MWD Surface Gear Set Up Directional Only NOTE All power must originate from the same outlet This will insure a common ground connection for the system Hazardous Refer to QSI drawing SY 100522 01 NOTE RT End of 384022 is not connected to the Shield 190 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual H 4 DEPTH TRACKING SENSOR Junction Box Assembly 1 Depth Tracking Sensor Hook up _ Pressure Sensor Connected to Rig StandPipe for mud pulse detection 0 10 PSI range 4 20 mAmp 9 y DOWNHole Direction Hook Load Connected to hydraulic system to measure hookload from dead line Located at the dead line anchor drillers panel or Geolograph recorder 0 2K PSI range To be attached to the Geolograph Line that is connected to the Kelly to measure drilling activity 191 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Deadline Hookload Sensor 192 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual
33. 2 TOOL COMMUNICATIONS EDITING SEQUENCES Syntax CHANGING PREFERENCES e Start up e Generic Variables Miscellaneous e Tool Communications e Program Layout TROUBLESHOOTING FILE GRAPHER e INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE e STARTING THE PROGRAM e USING THE PROGRAM e PROGRAM LAYOUT CALIBRATION ROLL TESTS e INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE STARTING THE PROGRAM USING THE PROGRAM Starting a New Roll Test Opening a Previous Roll Test Acquiring Roll Test Data Viewing Test Results Editing Test Data Editing Test Header Information Printing Test Results Viewing Data Scatter Plots PROGRAM LAYOUT APPENDIX 3 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Document Overview This document provides information on the installation and use of the software programs which interface with the Bench Tree Receiver BTR This document is split up into sections each focusing on a different software package Each section will give an overview of the different program components and go into detail on how to use the different parts of the program If you need to find any section of the document quickly use the table of contents located on the previous page 4 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Interface Version 1 3 Installing the software Insert the Bench Tree Group MWD Software Installation CD into the computer s CD drive The computer must have Windows 2000 or XP operating system to run correctly Follow the on S
34. 201506 Common MWD Split Shell 2 00 201521 Common MWD Bulkhead Retainer Bottom 45 Degree 1 00 201617 Common MWD Snubber Assembly Battery 1 00 201951 Common MWD CBG Short Gamma Extension 1 00 201991 Common MWD Pigtail Battery 1 00 AS 124 Common MWD AS 124 O Ring Viton 2 00 AS 127 Common MWD AS 127 O Ring Viton 2 00 AS 217 Common MWD AS 217 O Ring Viton 4 00 AS 218 Common MWD AS 218 O Ring Viton 2 00 AS 220 Common MWD AS 220 O Ring Viton 2 00 013 MWD Screw 6 32 x 1 2 SHCS SS 4 00 SC 014 Common MWD Screw 6 32 x 3 4 SHCS SS 8 00 Non Serialized Part Part Number Size Product Line Description Quantity SC 015 Common MWD Screw 4 40 x 1 4 SHCS SS 4 00 203 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual SECTION C C SECTION F F 6 c SECTION E E SECTION D D i SECTION SECTION H H DETAIL G SCALE 2 1 COMPASS INC GAMMA MODULE 406110 204 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual TENSOR MWD SYSTEM CABLE PIN OUTS Main Cable Drillers Remote Terminal to Safe Area Power Supply Part Number 384022 CONNECTOR PN gi PN PN rm TERMINATE SHIELD RE RM L SUPPLY MO PIN NUMBER FUNCTION PIN NUMBER Programming Cable Safe Area Power Supply to Down Hole Tool Part Number 384025 PIN ASSIGNMENT
35. 7 4 4 Slip the coil over a cylinder of a diameter similar to the membrane support 7 4 5 Apply 2 drops of silicone lubricant on the extended end of the membrane 7 4 6 Slip the coiled safety wire over the extended end of the membrane and it in the inner membrane groove through the membrane Verify that the membrane remains extended 1 10 past the outer ridge of the membrane grooves at this end of the support 12 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 4 7 that the safety wire coils do not cross each other 7 4 8 Pull the twister knob on the safety wire pliers until the wire creates a tight crossing at the groove 7 4 9 Clip the twist at 3 8 length and fold it into the groove 7 4 10 Repeat the previous 8 steps to install safety wire in the outer membrane groove over the membrane 7 5 Install Safety Wires Over Other End of Membrane 7 5 1 Hold the other end of the membrane support and extend the membrane past the outer membrane groove by 1 10 7 5 2 Repeat the previous section to engage tighten clip and fold a pair of safety wires into the 2 membrane grooves on this end of the support 7 6 Install 1 O ring type AS 020 VITON 75D into each of the 4 grooves on the ends of the membrane support Membrane Support End Grooves 7 7 Install Oil fill Housing 7 7 1 Inspect all O rings for nicks or tears If any nicks or tears are found replace the O ring with a new unused O ring and inspect the replacemen
36. Chat 7 At the prompt enter the Link address by typing 05 The node selected will return a command prompt 8 Invoke Boot Mode by typing CCod 11 Boot and pressing the Enter key If successful then the target processor will NOT return a prompt 9 Exit qTalk by pressing F1 DO NOT PRESS ANY OTHER KEYS Insure that you are in directory CAqgMWDqMPRx D3 then proceed to the next step in these instructions 10 Load the qMIX 11 Operating Parameters Receiver Operating Parameters and the qMWD Receiver Program by typing ProgAll and pressing the Enter key 11 Turn the system power Off and then On again Loading Software To The qMWD Driller s Remote Terminal DRT Node 09 1 Switch to the C qMWD qDRT 3 directory The data in this file will load into the processor used to display the various routines in the qMWD Driller s Remote Terminal 2 Run qTalk by typing qTalk2 C qTalk should b in your path 3 Invoke the Host Mode by pressing F4 4 Interrogate all nodes on the network by pressing Shift F5 Be sure that nodes MPRx05 MPTx20 and DRT 09 all respond Should one of these nodes not respond check all of the connections and repeat this step 5 Invoke the Boot mode for the qMWD Display Processor DRTx09 6 Run qTalk by typing qTalk2 C qTalk should be in the path If it is not go to the qTalk directory CAqTalk and type qtalk2 67 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Switch To Term
37. Nominal Current Shock Vibration Mud Sand Content Lost Circulation Material 3 5 To 9 5in larger on request 89 to 241mm 40in longer on request 914mm 35 US gals min in water 8 1100 US gals min in water 67 l sec 175 C 350 F Maximum 20 000 psi 137 9MPa 20 29V 12mA 1000g 0 5millisecond 25g RMS 30 500 Hz Random 30g 50 300 Hz Sine Less than 196 recommended Up to 50 Ib bbl premixed Medium Nut Plug or Cedar Fiber 83 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual PULSER STEPPER MOTOR STYLE C 1 MANUFACTURING PROCEDURE PULSER MODULE COMPASS STEPPER C 1 MANUFACTURING PROCEDURE PULSER MODULE COMPASS STEPPER OVERVIEW The Pulser Module allows mud flow to be restricted creating a pressure differential by way of a main poppet orifice assembly The movement of the main poppet in and out of the orifice creates an increase in pressure These pressure changes translate into pressure pulses There is a series of events that controls the movement of the main poppet in and out of the orifice The two factors that greatly affect poppet movement are the operation of the electrical section of the module and the fluid pressure on the compensation membrane The Pulser Module consists of 3 main sections a Pulser Driver an Cil Fill Section and a helix end 84 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual PULSER DRIVER The Pulser driver contains a capacitor bank and a control circuit In its simplest form a capacito
38. Viton AS 016 O Ring Viton AS 124 O Ring Viton AS 127 O Ring Viton AS 217 O Ring Viton AS 218 O Ring Viton AS 220 O Ring Viton Screw 6 32 x 1 2 SHCS SS Screw 6 32 x 3 4 SHCS SS 134 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 2 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 2 00 1 00 2 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 2 00 2 00 4 00 2 00 4 00 4 00 4 00 0 3 5 EM Battery Configuration bottom CONNECTOR Top 6 Pin Kintec BAT2 4 BAT BUS 5 Q BUS 6 PULSE FLOW 8 GAMMA 9 MODE 10 MODE 2 0 C amp WIRE CELLSIN SERIES 22 VOLTS Le CELL IN SERIES 22 VOLTS WIRE THE TWO SERIES TOGETHER IN PARALLEL Note Use 4 fuse CREATING A 12 CELL 22 VOLT BATTERY wire on each end of the battery The fibreglass tube should be cut to 65 5 in with regular QDT ends on both sides 135 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual BATTERY HOUR CALCULATIONS 100 AH Batteries 50 AH per pack Pulses minute 50 30 Data Rate 20 16 Assuming TLSQ 1 Pulse width 0 375 B0 AH packs 40 AH per pack 8 5 3 Pulses minute 50 Data Rate 30 20 16 Assuming TLSQ 1 Pulse width 0 375 High Voltage Tool 28 V packs at 25 AH per pack for a total of 50 4 2 5 1 Pulses minute 50 Data Rate 30 20 16 136 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 0 4 BATTERY SAFETY BATTERY SAFETY SAFE STORAGE amp HANDLING In most cases improp
39. abort iv Once the boot loading process is complete the program begins transferring the contents of the source s19 file and displays the programming progress for each memory or memory page being programmed Generally the data transfers occur at 38 4K baud and transfer 32 data bytes per exchange in a single binary string The programming rate will vary depending on the types of EEPROMs being programmed However typical programming rates for Atmel and Xicor 28Cxxx devices will be about 1K data bytes second Invoking Boot Mode The M68HC1 1 is programmed using the serial communications interface and a multiple stage boot loader process The 68 11 processor has an internal bootloader program 68HC11 bootstrap mode which may be invoked when reset power on reset or external reset with the 68HC11 MODA and MODB inputs pulled low The MODA and MODB inputs are usually accessed via test points or through lines brought out through a connector This program loads the next stage boot loader program 1st stage bootloader to the 256 byte internal 68HC11 RAM It in turn loads the larger programming process 2nd stage bootloader to the larger external RAM These programs are loaded by the qProg 11 PC program Once the 2nd stage bootloader is loaded and running in RAM there is no need to start over by resetting the 68 11 in bootstrap mode Subsequent programs can be programmed by re executing qProg 11 using the nb command line option qPr
40. aligning the set screw with the wrench flat and ensuring the shaft is flush with the coupling body as is shown Loctite and tighten all of the screws 109 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Place new rubber bushing the new coupling On the motor side the matching coupling will have to be installed in the same manner Now you can place the springs and spacers back onto your Pulser shaft Note that in some cases the Pulser shaft will be a assembled unit and much simpler to install than has been shown in this sequence of photos 110 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual C 2 PULSER OIL FILL FIXTURE COLOR DIAGRAM Jesind 2 0 11 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual ASSEMBLY DRAWING 12 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual BOM Pulser Assembly Compass Asset Part Number Size 406169 Common Serialized Part Part Number Size 406083 Common 406131 Common 4061695 Non Serialized Part Part Number Size 201509 1 7 8 201514 1 7 8 09 1038 Common 09 1049 Common 13 1010 Common 16 1022 Common 201169 Common 201190 Common 201392 Common 201505 Common 201506 Common 201616 Common 204101 Common 406085 Common 406089 Common 406092 Common 406093 Common 406094 Commo
41. highest dipole moments are in the range of 10 to 11 From the dipole moment information can be deduced about the molecular geometry of the molecule For example the data illustrate that carbon dioxide is a linear molecule but ozone is not Quantum mechanical dipole operator Consider a collection of N particles with charges q and position vectorsT i For instance this collection may be a molecule consisting of electrons all with charge e and nuclei with charge eZ where 27 15 the atomic number of the i nucleus The physical quantity observable dipole has the quantum mechanical operator N qi i l 21 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Atomic dipoles A non degenerate S state atom can have only a zero permanent dipole This fact follows quantum mechanically from the inversion symmetry of atoms All 3 components of the dipole operator are antisymmetric under inversion with respect to the nucleus J p where Pis the dipole operator and 315 the inversion operator The permanent dipole moment of an atom in a non degenerate state see degenerate energy level is given as the expectation average value of the dipole operator p S p 5 Sy T where is an S state ae wavefunction which is symmetric or antisymmetric under inversion 5 Since the product of the wavefunction in the ket and its 25 the bra is always symmetric under inversion and its inverse
42. ig Roll Test Print Preview co diigo MWD Electronics Calibration Test SN 2461 Roll Test Summary eta ipe ger Ala Exporting To export the report click the envelope icon MWDRoll32 prompts you to enter the export format and destination To export to another file format enter the path and filename for the new file Printing Preview the report to verify that the data is correct To print click the printer icon A window with print options appears Select from the options and click OK To close the Print Export window click the X button Troubleshooting The following known issues may cause problems under infrequent circumstances 86 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software The Jet file vbajet dll or vbajet32 dll failed to initialize when called Try re installing the application that returned the error This error is due to a problem registering the DAO file ddao350 dll To correct this problem 1 Close MWDRoll32 2 Click the Windows Start button on the lower left corner of the screen 3 Click the Run item 4 Enter regsvr32 ddao350 dll 5 Click OK 6 Re start Windows 7 Re start MWDRoll32 Appearance Problems MWDRoll32 s main displays look discolored odd or indistinguishable This problem is probably due to bad color settings To correct your PC color settings 1 Close MWDRoll32 2 Click the Windows Start button on the lower le
43. in qDRT QProg 11 SYSTEM UTILITIES Version 3 00 July 2003 qProg 11TM System Utilities Programming M68HC11 Processors GE Power Systems requires that a license be obtained for the installation and use of the qProg 11TM M68HC1 1 Programming Utility Licenses may be obtained from GE Power Systems 1840 Royston Lane Round Rock TEXAS 78664 9555 GE Power Systems reserves the right to make changes without notice in the software described or contained herein in order to improve design and or performance GE Power Systems assumes no responsibility or liability for the use of this software and makes no representation or warranty that this software is free from patent or copyright infringement gProg 1 1 is a trademark of GE Power Systems Introduction to qProg 11 The qProg 11 program is a general purpose utility used to program application software firmware into the EEProm of 68HC11 microcontroller based processor boards qProg 11 adapts easily to new target hardware simply by defining the target specifications When 11 is executed to program a target it first locates the target specification which defines the files baud rates memory configurations and other information required to program the target The standard sequence used is as follows 54 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 1 Load the application software firmware from disk 2 Download the 1st stage bootloader and receive back acknowledge ch
44. not shown Replace protective cap 201514 Note MDM direction 201955 UPHOLE 201953 88127 1485220 Figure 1 197 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Steps 1 4 1 7 Refer to Drawing D 201950 02 1 4 Gamma Sensor Installation Install three pairs Split Ring 972124 and O rings to the selected Gamma Sensor 384000 384030 as shown Attach the MDM connector on the lower end of the Sensor to the MDM on the Snubber Shock Fasten the Snubber Shock and Gamma Sensor together using four 10 32 x 3 4 SHC screws 105430 and Loctite 243 1 5 Install O rings 2 on Gamma End 201888 as shown Fasten the MDM on the Pigtail Gamma End 201954 to the Gamma End MDM as shown using screws 2 56 x 1 4 Pan 100030 as shown Fasten Gamma End to Gamma Sensor using four 10 32 x 7 16 screws 105430 and Loctite 243 1 6 Wrap the following areas of the assembly with Kapton tape using a 1 8 overlap 1 6 1 Snubber Shock Gamma Sensor connection 1 6 2 Gamma Sensor Gamma End connection including entire Gamma End 1 7 Carefully slide the assembly into the Battery Gamma Housing 201635 grease the O rings and screw Intermodule End and Housing together 1 8 Grease O rings and install onto Bottom Bulkhead Retainer 201521 as shown below Grease O rings on the pigtail 10 pin connector Install Split Shell 201506 halves into the recess in the Intermodule End as shown Align the key on the 10 pin connector with the
45. process required Background Counts This is the count rate for the sensor being used and the environment the sensor is exposed to The background counts will differ due to the following e The natural gamma rays emitted from the earth at the current geographical Location Gamma rays emitted by the sun The sensitivity of the gamma sensor used Gamma ray attenuation of the tool housing Gamma rays emitted by drill pipe or other materials in the immediate area The API factor calculation will use this as a baseline count rate Measure this reading from the tool and record it Hot Counts After the background count rate is acquired then wrap the calibration blanket around the tool and record the count rate API Calibrator Rate This measurement is recorded on all calibration sources and will differ from one to another The API factor is then calculated using the following formula APICalibratorRate APIFactor HotCounts BackgroundCounts 2 2 4 Depth Calibration Depth tracking using the supplied equipment requires calibration There are two types of depth encoders supplied and each uses a different calibration method Geolograph Encoder which attaches to the Geolograph line inside the doghouse Drum Encoder that is connected to the shaft of the drawworks drum 117 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 2 2 4 1 Geolograph Encoder Calibration To use the Geolograph encoder check Use Depth Enc
46. the azimuth value is ignored 2 Set High Side refer to the Guidance Rose display and rotate the tool until the red High Side marker is within the green pie section 3 Click the Acquire button to record the data or click the Skip button to discard the data The green pie section moves to the next position 4 Repeat the previous step for each position until the green pie section has returned to the original position 5 Refer to the User Instructions display for further instructions Remote Mode Data Acquisition Prepare to use your watch to monitor the seconds passing as you position the tool into each orientation Stay within the allotted Hold Off and Interval times 1 Click the OK button on the Roll Test Options dialog 2 Position the MWD tool in the first orientation 3 Wait for the Hold Off time to elapse and for MWDRoll32 to acquire the data for the first orientation 4 Rotate the tool by 45 during the interval time 5 Wait for MWDRoll32 to acquire the data 6 Repeat the previous two steps until MWDRoll32 has acquired data for all orientations Printing and Exporting Reports Print a report for every completed roll test MWDRoll32 saves all data but a printed report is useful for reference 85 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Previewing To view a preview of the test report click the Print Export Report item from the File menu A window containing a preview pane and print control buttons appears
47. the technician can transmit the data to GE Power Systems for analysis Note the different Ringout tables for the different Directional Modules in service Trained technicians in the shop should periodically inspect the mechanical integrity of the Directional Module Only disassemble the module in a clean environ ment using complete Electro Static Discharge ESD controls ESD controls are vital to protect the electronics contained in the Directional Module Please follow the enclosed disassembly and inspection instructions 152 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 2 DISASSEMBLY INSPECTION REASSEMBLY Directional Module Disassembly Inspection and Reassembly Procedures Note A roll test must be performed prior to any disassembly of the Directional Module Repair of electronics and proper calibration of the QDT MWD orientation module can only be properly performed at the factory Should the unit fail to pass a roll test it should be returned to the factory for full servicing Servicing of MWD Directional Module following successful completion of MWDRoll test 1 1 Removal of Electronics Assembly from Pressure Housing Note When making or breaking threaded connections use onlyPetol Gearench Parmalee wrenches or equivalent tools with smooth gripping surfaces to grip the barrel 1 1 1 From the UpHole end of the module first remove the Thread Protector 201845 then remove the Interconnect Housing 201509 Note
48. the warning flags are shown The names of the flags are displayed with two circles to the left of each name Both circles to the left of the flag name will be empty same color as the background until the flag value has been decoded If the flag value is True or On the left circle will be filled in red If the flag value is False or Off the right circle will be filled in blue 7 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Pulse Pressure Window Stretching the window vertically of the pulse and pressure graphs will increase the number of displayed graphs to the maximum that will fit on your screen On the bottom of this window there are several options to choose from You can select to view either pulses pressure or both together from the radio buttons on the left You may select to turn on single scaling for all graphs and amplified pressure Using the same scaling for all graphs will apply the same scale only to all visible graphs Viewing the amplified pressure will automatically scale displayed pressure vertically to best fit on the graph The red line displayed on the graph represents the low pulse limit LoPL It is displayed to the same scale as the pulses and only visible while viewing the pulses The value of this line is displayed above the bottom graph in the window The current pump pressure PmpP average pulse amplitude AvPA and current synchronization status are also displayed above the bottom graph The top right
49. 0 Disassembly Downhole End 4 1 Remove Downhole End Plug Note For field maintenance do not remove the Interconnect Housing from the Downhole Intermodule End Skip Steps 4 2 to 4 6 4 2 Break the connection between the Downhole Interconnect Housing and the Intermodule End 122 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 4 3 Remove the Bulkhead Retainer using the same procedure listed steps 3 3to 3 8 After the Downhole Bulkhead Retainer is removed two Split Shells are exposed Remove the Split Shells 4 4 Using two Gearenches break the connection between the Downhole Intermodule End and the Battery Pressure Housing 123 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 4 5 Use the Spanner Wrench to remove the Intermodule End Make sure that the Uphole pigtail rotates freely while removing the Intermodule End c _____ 4 6 Place a protector over the Uphole pigtail Protector on 1 Uphole Pigtail 124 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 4 7 Pullthe Battery of the Battery Pressure Housing far enough to expose the Snubber Unit 4 8 Remove Kapton Tape from the Snubber Unit 125 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 4 9 Hold the Snubber Unit sideways and remove the four screws holding the snubber unit to the battery 4 10 Remove old battery and locate the fresh battery 5 0 Replacing the Battery 5 1 Remove the battery from the plastic bag Save the paperwork included with
50. 1 4 Cup Point Socket Set Alloy Steel 3 00 SC 095 Common MWD Screw M3 x 8 SHCS SS 4 00 SC 096 Common MWD Screw M3 x 12 SHCS SS 3 00 114 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual D BATTERY PACK ASSEMBLY D 1 MAINTENANCE Battery Maintenance MWD Battery Housing This section of the Manual is designed to instruct the shop technician to totally disassemble and re assemble the battery module Total disassembly is required every time a battery housing is returned to the shop from a job The Compass MWD field operator should be knowledgeable in performing the assembly and disassembly of battery housings in the field to the point of being able to remove discharged battery packs and installing new battery packs into the battery housing In the case of high temperature environments the field operator must be able to perform the total break down of the module to change the required elastomers Battery maintenance should normally be performed in the shop and should only be performed in the field under special circumstances i e remote location weather or premature battery depletion Extreme care should be taken and all steps properly followed to prevent accidents 115 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual CHANGE BATTERIES 1 0 The Battery Housing Top or Uphole End Bottom or Downhole End Safety Plug Intermodule End Downhole h NS 2 N N Intermodule End Uphole Battery Pressure Housin
51. 1 ASSEMBLY DRAWING 1307 5 3113 2 1 awas 0 610c ER COI23NHS Id u388nN iNIOdNuV3dS SSVdWOD sive 60 51 80 237111 ure on sa 60 80 556402 40 SHL InOiIA 370HN BD lNYd NI 6350 0 2 631602 38 10 TIVES ONW ONT 55 2 30 1120080 771293012807 51 MIHLIM C3AIYINO2 NOIIYMACANI SHI ONY 1N3MSCOC SIMI 4 1 300 111018142803 SINOC XUWW es 2 SIMESE 500 7 xxx 910 1 020 1 0 03sy3138 310 0 3 NMYSG N23 1 B E X 02 04 135 3825 00 25 I X23NHSI3 11 102 I lNIOd 49345 026102 6 I SNIYO 420 5 8 SNIUO 2 5 SNINO 022 5 9 I S9NIN 1 05102 8 I 11145 05102 v I 31vW34 801231084 QV3HHl 115102 5 u388nH 651102 2 I ANY18 181048 345 14VHS 126102 ALD 0114182530 u38H N 18 4 ON WALI NOILOAS 169 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual G 2 BOM SPEARPOINT ASSEMBLY BOM Spearpoint Kit Rubber Fin Fishneck Non Serialized Part Part Number
52. 10 450 Magnetic Field Tolerance 0 050 Nominal Gravity 1 000 Gravity Tolerance 0 050 Total Magnetic Correction 10 00 5 Directional Processing Controls High Temperature Threshold so Sensor Power Control E Calculate Magnetic Tool Faces Survey Acquisition Mode NoFlow v Survey Control Values Steering Control Values Survey Delay Time Steering Sample Rate _ Survey Sample Rate TEN Steering Sample Time 00 Survey Sample Time Bo 5 Directional Processing Controls High Temperature threshold should be set to the maximum expected downhole temperature expected This is a switch the tool will power down when this temperature is detected 6 Gamma If the rotary switch is installed the Gamma Sensor Power Control enables or disables the RFS Gamma Sensor Power Control Enabled Turns off the RFS and it acts like a normal vibration Switch Gamma Sensor Power Control Disabled Turns on the RFS and flow will go off after 2 minutes and 15 seconds of continuous rotation 36 Chapter 5 Operations Manual 7 Battery New version software where the Battery Full Scale option is available BFS Default is 41 7 for standard batteries Set to 44 5 when using the 22 V Compass Battery The Low Battery Voltage switchover should be set to 18 5V for the Compass extended battery cell Leave standard cells as per normal operation 6 Gamma Sensor Power Control Enable v Downhole Scale Factor 1 000000 Sensor War
53. 3 sigma for the inclination measurement up or down and 0 25 3 sigma for the azimuth measurement left right Refer to the qProg 11 section of the Maintenance manual or the Operations manual for the methods of programming the downhole and uphole processors with the latest firmware 419 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation ELECTRICAL POWER Electrical power is supplied to the downhole probe via the lithium thionyl chloride Battery The Compass MWD probe draws power from one battery pack It can also switch to an additional battery pack when the first pack is drawn below operating capacity Drilling exercises requiring extended battery life 2200 hours can configure the system to use a stacked battery arrangement The use of the Gamma Ray detection module will require tandem batteries to extend power life beyond 150 hours The tool design only limits module arrangement to the requirement that the pulser in the Compass MWD always be on tool s downhole end The batteries may be alkaline or lithium thionyl chloride Alkaline packs are limited to 120 Celsius and use seventeen D size cells Lithium packs are rated for 150 Celsius and 175 Celsius and use eight double D size DD cells It is estimated that a single alkaline battery pack will operate the downhole probe for about 100 hours while a single lithium battery pack can last over 200 hours Battery pack life is totally dependant upon the pulse length the tool configuration modul
54. 51 57 gTF 106 88 Tmpw 1 52 09 Missed Decode 121 gTFA 106 88 33 106 88 45 106 88 AZM 52 57 gTFA 106 88 9 0 4 Average 1 7 1 1 Change to 09 49 05 VUE Pulses 7 Pressure Pumps On ichange toi Pumps Change to 09 52 5 Pressure 5000 0 Change to aul i Advanced Variables 2 1 PmpP 111 AvPA 15 400 LoPLe 7 Sync Received 09 53 04 23 181 Magnetic 4 34 C Enable Advanced Variable Editing Gamma 5 1 0 11 136 Pulse Width 1 0 0 91 1 Pulses Pressure 2 Both Max Pulse Scale Auto v v Show Amplified Pressure Status Receiving data Program with labelled internal windows 1 Menus 2 Directional Compass display 3 All received history from current transmission sequence 4 Recent decoded values for the current transmission sequence 5 Graphed pulses and pressure 6 Changeable receiver variables 6 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software USING THE PROGRAM The internal windows can be moved and most of them can be resized If you do not wish to view one of the windows currently displayed click on the red x in the top right corner of that window If you wish to view one of the windows that is not displayed go to the Window menu a
55. 53 66 5 29 2006 7 52 10 E 51 54 porma 53 GE Start Tool Logging States Disabled Slips are Ortabsse fle CD Dif HARRELL LEG 3nd Ede Surveys Expet aS View CON Port Diagnostics Surrey Report E tGemme Grologtot Reli Test PitSuneys c Prev When this screen appears the depth data from the encoder box or WITS will automatically update The tool however must be started in order to begin receiving data by pressing the Start Tool button 123 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 2 3 1 Starting The Tool Each tool has a startup procedure as defined below Tensor Steering Tool Press the Start Tool button press OK on the popup that appears then turn the tool power on Applied Physics 750 850 Net Protocol Press the Start Tool button press OK on the popup that appears then turn the tool power on Tensor QDT MWD Tool Turn the tool on and let the receiver begin operation then press Start Tool and the Data Logger will begin listening for data from the tool Gyrodata DMI Turn the tool power on then press Start Tool and the Data Logger will begin listening for data from the tool RSS Systems Steering Tool Not yet completed Press the Start Tool button press OK on the popup that appears then turn the tool power on Test Tool This
56. 8 MWD Thread Protector Male 120001 Common MWD Temp Tab B 120002 Common MWD Temp Tab C 201141 Common MWD Spring Shaft Assembly w Plug 201142 Common MWD Bellows Shaft 201143 Common MWD Solenoid Wave Spring 201152 Common MWD Shim Pulser 201154 Common MWD Wire Tube 201155 Common MWD Compensation Membrane Support 201160 Common MWD Short Spring Spacer 252 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Quantity 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 2 00 Non Serialized Part Part Number 201169 201189 201190 201205 201233 201348 201392 201419 201505 201506 201518 201529 201543 201598 201599 201961 201990 AS 006 AS 012 AS 020 AS 124 AS 125 AS 127 AS 217 AS 218 AS 220 SC 006 SC 011 SC 013 SC 014 Size Common Common Common Common Common Common Common Common Common Common Common Common Common Common Common Common Common Common Common Common Common Common Common Common Common Common Common Common Common Common Product Line MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD Description Plug Oil Fill Long Spring Spacer Compensation Membrane Pulser Screen Bellows High Temp Servo Poppet Tip Assembly Servo Orifice Spring Solenoid Return Bulkhead Retainer Top 90 Degree Split Shell Flow Sensor Plug
57. BDLSDAI seyrini 1 Sawe BY por ITEM Je 100087 IB TH Noe 7 14 Install Helix End Assembly 7 14 1 Apply clear RTV to the orifice CERAMIC POPPET sidewalls 7 14 2 Install the orifice CERAMIC POPPET in the up hole end of the signal valve shaft with beveled end facing uphole 7 14 3 Clean the excess clear RTV from the signal valve shaft 7 14 4 Install O ring AS 127 VITON 75D on the bottom position of the poppet housing 7 14 5 Install O ring AS 125 VITON 75D on the top position of the poppet housing 7 14 6 Install O ring AS 221 VITON 75D on the bottom position of the helix end PULSER HELIX END down hole position 34 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 14 7 Install the abrasion ring to its stop position above this O ring 7 14 8 Verify that the chamfer on the abrasion ring is positioned down hole 7 14 9 Install O ring AS 221 VITON 75D on the middle position of the helix end 7 14 10 Install O ring AS 126 VITON 75D on the top position of the helix end 7 14 11 Install the signal shaft into the down hole end of the helix shaft 7 14 12 Place the assembly in a tabletop chain vice with the chain connected to the mid section 7 14 13 Rotate the tool until the slot is underneath and the chain lies on a smooth surface 7 14 14 Put the seal STD POLYPAK in the groove on the down hole end of the piston cap Make sure the installed O ring in the p
58. Click OK button to continue 11 This is a KDT receiver window if the screen resolution is 800 by 600 pixels E PPM Receiver KeyDrill Technology LLC Ver 1 40 Receiver lt DipA RFD TopLetf MagF Top Right Data Display Pump Time Waveform Pump Off Time Wits Output Pump ON Timer INC AZM Pulse Amplitude View Config 3413 12 If the screen resolution is larger than 800 by 600 pixels the receiver window will look like this Pump Pressure PSI 100 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software PPM Receiver KeyDrill Technology LLC Elo 222 gTFA 1872380K Rel 100 0 0 t Omet Picus md Dato Name Auto Dicablo Time _______ Col Amp Ver 1 40 05 032701 14 09 554 10 357 2 05 034 1 14 03 092 198 2553 05 03 53 01 14 03 2453 19 2551 Eu 05040701 14 09 674 199 2 RID Top Lor 05 0420 01 14 03 Mag 10 255 1 Hocalves Cid Q5 043301 14 0 Grav 0 895 9 350 95 0 3891 14 0 TLSQ 1 0 we mo 05 18 38 01 14 09 1872 19 3927 MagF RFD Top Figli 05 08 34 01 14 09 Temp 50 19 352 6 Display 05 147501 14 4 os 19 352 05 14 33 01714709 222 1008 3526 Time Nome Yoke 05 18 38 01 14 09 1872 19 35 05 182301 14 09 qTFA 1072 19 35 05 18 09 01 14 09 gTFA 1072 19 25 05 17 55 01 14 09 gIFA 1072 19 25 05 17 40 01 14 09
59. Command Ax Accelerometer X axis corrected amp scaled Data Ay Accelerometer Y axis corrected amp scaled Data Az Accelerometer Z axis corrected amp scaled Data Azm Directional Sensor Azimuth Data refer to TAzm B Bat2 Auxiliary Battery Switch Control State BatD Battery Data Block BatV Battery Voltage BHiV Battery High Voltage Measurement BLoV Battery Low Voltage Measurement BThr Low Battery Voltage Threshold 50 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software CCod Capability Code Number D DipA Dip Angle DLC Downlink Controls Parameter Block DLTP Downlink Time Period DSns Directional Sensor Information Block G Gama Gamma Data Value GamD Gamma Data Block GamD Gamma Data Block Grav Gravity Data gTFA Gravity Toolface Angle Inc Inclination Data InvF Inverted Flow Switch LnkA qMIXTM Link node Address LnkL qMIXTM Link node Label LnkM qMIXTM Link Mode following a Reset Loc Job Site Location Information Block LoPL Receiver Low Pulse Amplitude Limit editing control MagD Magnetic Data Block MagF Total Magnetic Field MDec Magnetic Declination Mod1 Telemetry Controls Parameter Block for Mode 1 Mod2 Telemetry Controls Parameter Block for Mode 2 Mod3 Telemetry Controls Parameter Block for Mode 3 Mod4 Telemetry Controls Parameter Block for Mode 4 ModC Main Telemetry Mode Controls Parameter Block ModN Telemetry Mode Number at power on 51 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software
60. D Dat Hex 49 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software F4 EOL Chr ETX F5 Idle stop qMix allow node access F6 gMIX restart qMix after idle F7 Chat select a node F8 Errors F9 Go to Multipoint re access Multipoint program F10 Toggles the Next Menu WARNING After establishing communications with a particular node and before exiting the qTalk program the operator MUST reestablish qMIX communication by selecting the qMIX softkey F6 Otherwise the node will be idle and may appear non functional Cycling the power to the system should cold boot the system for all of the nodes and reestablish qMIX operations Care should be taken to know which labels were changed if any and which labels should be changed back to their original values or settings Observe that while performing the configuration routine the program changes only those labels listed in the configuration Observe the configuration routine using two PCs connected to the SASB qBus outlets with one PC in qTalk or qBus monitor Every operating company should allow one individual access to these procedures for the purpose of upgrading the firmware of the systems Each operator should have at least minimal qTalk training to enhance his troubleshooting capabilities Commonly Used mNemonic Labels A Acquire Directional Steering T L Data Command AcqS Acquire Directional Survey Data Command AcqG Acquire Gamma Data
61. Device Manager to determine which port has been assigned for this card Refer to Win95 documentation The qW32Srvr will default to COM when run the first time after the initial installation of qMWDW32 If the COM Port is changed the new COM Port is saved in the system registry and is used each time the qW32Srvr is run Note Insure the COM Port change is required If the system is operating properly do not change the COM Port unless otherwise directed Current COM port selection n Enter New COM port selection 1 8 Cancel AN Are you absolutely sure you need to change COM ports If you are operating properly now you will need to move your cable to the new port as soon as you have made your new selection E Cancel 44 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Manually Stopping the qW32Srvr Clicking the STOP MWD System button causes the server to exit or quit running In normal operation the operator should not need to use this button The server keeps a list of running qMWD W32 programs When the last program exits the server exits as well qTalk DOS INTRODUCTION qTalk System Utilities is the program used to communicate with the various network nodes that make up the QDT MWD system Partially enter into this program via the qBus Monitor Alt 7 in the PC program Use qTalk System Utilities to talk directly to the MWD probe to troubleshoot the probe or any other node on the system P
62. I view data received from the BTR A This program stores all of the data received into the History sub folder of your installed program directory The data is stored in folders for each day it was received in the History folder The folder name format is YYYY MM DD The files stored in this folder are described in section 6 of this document They are all standard ASCII text documents and can be opened in any text editor An easy way to access this folder is to click on the Data Logs menu and select the item titled Open History Folder Q Why won t the program connect to the receiver A There are many reasons this may happen Some of them include improper cable connection receiver not powered on firewall settings and wrong cable type Any Windows version other than 2000 or XP will not work without manually changing your IP address Check the troubleshooting section below for more details How do send a new configuration to the receiver and tool A Refer to Storing configurations to receiver tool section in the MWD Configuration Utility section of this document Q How do measure and calculate the Driller s Assembly Offset DAO A Instructions are located in a separate help window located inside of this program To access this window you can click on the Help menu and select the Calculate DAO menu item This will bring up a window with the instructions on how to measure the angle and also provide the controls to c
63. Insulated Tool Gap Arc Over Arc Over Incorrect Alignment Degrades Signal Wastes Battery Life Sub With Incorrect Alignment EMT itt ransmitter Insulated Gap Arc Over Arc Over Arc Over from misalignment Arc Over Arc ver Insulated Tool Gap Arc Over Arc Over from misalignment 23 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation CONTACT POINTS Down Hole e Bow Spring Centralizers make sure they are tight e Contact Spring on Helix replace after every run Surface BOP cable 300 or 100m Attached to BOP optional attached to ground stake next to BOP Antenna cable 600 or 200m Ground Stake the deeper into the ground the better Clean contact points poor contact will result in noisy signal EQUIPMENT TRANSPORTATION Surface System The EM Down hole Tool Strings shall be transported in kit boxes Where possible sensitive equipment computers surface system are to be transported in a protective environment If safe to do so tools can be transported in the cab of a pickup or in a protected place pick up with hard shell topper Down hole Tool Strings The EM tool shall be transferred in a warm waterproof environment The preferred location is either in the vehicle cab or heated truck box with topper All tools and barrels are to be cleaned and tagged with the appropriate information Equipment that is damaged or requiring service shall be red tagged and its condition relayed to the
64. It can be used in practically any non magnetic drill collar with an internal diameter in the range of 2 3 16 inches minimum to 3 1 4 inches maximum The drill collar diameter used is directly related to the amount in gallons per minute of the expected drill fluid flow The recommended flow velocity should not exceed 40 feet second to prevent excessive erosion of the tool parts in drilling fluids with normal solids content Refer to Velocity Chart Sec 4 P 175 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Surface Equipment Compass employs the new Bench Tree Receiver to replace the older and dated GE Tensor SAI design The BTRc and the BTRD Rig floor Display totally replace the older designs and incorporate an improved and faster processor to allow improved decoding capabilities The system interfaces with the GE Tensor software packages for the downhole equipment and offers more advantages in the MWD surface system design The system still connects to any Windows based PC and records all transmitted data and all pulse waveform and standpipe pressure data This accumulation of data allows for excellent data comparison and calculation for improved troubleshooting efforts The surface gear allows for MWD operation to be configured to fit a company preference and to tailor the MWD function to suit the environment of the hole being drilled The system links to several gamma tracking and gamma ray log presentation software packages The Bench Tree s
65. Loctite Measure from the bottom of the solenoid to the top of the clapper and adjust Clearance U gt Replace 006 O rings Oil fill ports LI Tighten screws in servo poppet using 243 Blue Loctite Replace screws DRIVER CHECK Check connector sockets for retention force using a tester Ensure all pins are straight and undamaged Check Female Bebro socket for damage Perform breakout on driver Check resistance 6 37 amp 91Ohousing _ __ ___ ___ Inspect the wires flowing from the kintec to sec if the soldering connections are intact Check for any degradation in the wiring and teflon cold flow Re tape Re tape with Kapton tape if necessary Check the guaging and ensure the driver is guaged properly Ensure set screws on female bebro are tight Reinstall with 243 blue Loctite if necessary OOOO 000 Inspect snubber for wear damage Ensure bolts tight Reinstall with 243 blue Loctite if necessary ASSEMBLY Replace all O rings Assemble in reverse order of tear down Li Tighten all joints with barrel wrenches OIL FILL STATION Fill pulser with oil till air bubbles stop emerging L Check oil in the compensation membrane L1 Clean off excess oil Ensure no leaks Filled by 1 Date 271 OUTGOING CHECKS Conduct the Pulser Driver Circuit Test and record results in table below Pulser Test Unit 24VDC 2
66. Open This will allow you to select a file on your computer using a file chooser You may also open a file by dragging it onto this program from a Windows explorer window Once the file is opened the data will be displayed in the graph section The pump pressure is drawn in blue over a white background The graph shows five different pressure levels on the left scale with a horizontal line extending across the graph The times on the bottom axis are displayed to show the relative time the pressure data was collected This time may not be accurate if the filename has been changed If an associated filtered pulse file ftr can be found with a pressure file then they will both be displayed together The pressure line will be in blue and the pulses will be in black The scale on the left will also show both scaling in their associated colors Several items are located below the graph which allow you to change different aspects of the graph You may change most of the values by entering a new value in the field and pressing Enter For the compression value you can use the slider to change its value The variables are described below High Value Highest value of PSI displayed for that value type Low Value Lowest value of PSI displayed for that value type Pressure Full Scale The full scale of the pressure transducer used Compression Amount of data to be displayed per pixel 1 1 is uncompressed Start Time The time used to determi
67. PEM Tool Suggested programming setup Telemetry Controls Up Link Controls Recerre Delay Time 20 Transmit Delap Time Bo Synch Window Factor Number of Synch Pulses Surveu Header Size Toolface Logging Header Size B Type of Header Check 35 aly Down Link Controls Downlink Commands axe Command Time Period i Command Set Save Commands Auto T ooface Inclinetion Threshold 5 0 Evaluation Mode s v Label DLTy Use arrow keys or mouse to select an option Transmit delay time should be set long enough for mud Pulse 5 Chapter 8 Tool Mode Number 4 Mode Pulse Survey Seq Acquisition Transmit Numbers Widths Seq H s B s Times Times joss 10 jo gt 0375 fz n n 3 oss 3 no la s f T Label TSN4 Limits 1 to 4 Modes 1 3 should have the pulse width set to the same Mode 4 should be set to the mud pulses pulse width Survey Seq s should correspond to the mode numbers so it can be verified which mode the tool is in The same Seq should be used for all modes All survey sequences should be the same incase the tool down links accidentally This will prevent having to change the mode numbers in the receiver every time 6 Chapter 8 Tool Toolface Logging Seque
68. ROP and premature MWD failures Description Compass VIB monitoring tool can be adapted to the EM tool string The VIB provides real time monitoring and early warnings of excessive vibration The VIB has 2 axis monitoring the reads 0 to 35G Updates are transmitted to surface via mud pulse through generic variables the variables can be logged with your existing gamma software The drillers can take the data and adapt to the drilling environment before any costly damage can occur The VIB indicates to the driller when bit bounce and pipe whirl is occurring and can prevent drill string fatigue 2 Chapter 7 Pressure While Drilling Features Temperature option up to 350 F 175 Simple to operate under a wide range of flow rates from 75 to 1100 gal min 12 0 long by 1 875 OD module that plugs into the top of the tool string e 0 35g GV6 Z axis bit bounce e GV7 x y axis pipe whirl lateral vibration e 13 bit mi Be Chapter 7 Pressure While Drilling CHAPTER 8 TOOL This tool is equipped with an EM transmitter coupled with DC brush less pulser The tool is equipped to run in one telemetry only but the ability to switch back and forth The EM telemetry is run in modes 1 2 and 3 and mud pulse telemetry in mode 4 The EM telemetry is equipped to survey in flow off state and when in mud pulse mode operate like normal and transmit only when flow is turned on Flo
69. Software EDITING SEQUENCES The section describes the basics about the variables and syntax characters for different transmission sequences Below is a list of the available variable names for transmitted values in the sequences The variables come in two main types logical and regular Logical variable values can only represent On True or Off False The variable names are on the left and a description is located in parentheses next to the variable name The variable names are not case sensitive Regular Variables Logical Variables Inc Inclination Bat2 Battery 2 state On or Off aTFA Auto tool face angle BatW Battery voltage warning True or False gTFA Gravity tool face angle GrvW Gravity warning True or False mTFA Magnetic tool face angle MagW Magnetic warning True or False Azm Azimuth DipW Dip angle warning True or False Grav Gravity TmpW Temperature warning True or False Temp Temperature BatV Battery Voltage Gama Gamma MagF Magnetic Field DipA Dip Angle SYNTAX Transmitted Bits Each regular variable requires a transmitted bit amount This number is added directly after the variable name and is separated by a colon The valid bit range is between 1 and 21 bits Ex Inc 9 This will request Inclination transmitted in 9 bits Error Checking An optional error check can be added to either regular or logical variable transmissions This can be added to the transmission by f
70. The exposed connector should have 6pins 4 sockets 1 1 2 Support the Top Bulkhead retainer 201505 and remove the two 4 40 X 14 SCS screws 102010 which fasten it to the Intermodule End 201514 Carefully pull and disengage the tabs and slots of the Top bulkhead Retainer and the Intermodule End 1 1 3 Rotate the Top Bulkhead Retainer to align the tabs of both pieces While supporting the Top Bulkhead Retainer with one hand use a 77 wooden or plastic dowel to push the 6 pin 4 socket connector in order to break free the O ring seal Use the gt dowel to hold the connector while sliding the Top Bulkhead Retainer away from the assembly Remove both halves of the Split Shell 201506 1 1 4 Slowly unscrew the UpHole Intermodule End from the Sensor Pressure Housing 201725 while carefully passing the connector through the Intermodule End Avoid stressing the solder connections on the connector 153 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 1 1 5 From the DownHole end the module first remove the Thread Protector 201845 then remove the Interconnect Housing 201509 Carefully unscrew the remaining Intermodule End from the Sensor Pressure Housing With the entire module lying flat slowly slide the Intermodule End with the electronics assembly attached from the Pressure Housing far enough to expose the Snubber Shock Assembly 201730 Inspection of Directional Module Note ESD controls must be used when performing this inspec
71. The first time will take a while due to the surface tension between the oil and the reservoir 76 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Performing an Oil Fill Setting Up 1 have found that the oil fill is more easily done using the oil fill port on the bottom of the tool versus using the oil fill port on the top of the tool 2 With all of the valves closed attach the Pulser line to the lower port of the oil fill section of the Pulser This connection should be tightened by hand 3 Connect the communications cable to the Pulser and the Pulser driver as is done when checking the activation of the EFS The picture on the next page shows the basic configuration with the exception of the communications cable going from the Pulser Driver to the Oil Fill portion of the Pulser Attach the Communications Cable here and to the top of the Pulser 4 With all of the valves closed turn on the vacuum pump open the vacuum line and build up a vacuum in the system Once you have a vacuum the valve for the line to the sight tube can be opened Open it slowly and very little at first to get the first bunch of air out of the system without aerating the system too much 77 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual This is the valve that should be opened only a little and very slowly You can expect to initially see a lot of air coming out of the lines and pulser This should settle down after a few minutes This is the valve that is to
72. This is an indication that the tapping is rigorous C You may want to rig up a shelf to set the Pulser on when in the raised position It is typical for the air to start to come out just when you don t think your arms or shoulders will allow you to hold the Pulser in the raised position a second longer d As was mentioned the deeper the well that the tools will be used in the more diligent you must be in getting all of the air out of the tool The tool can be considered done when after sitting in the upright position being Tapped vigorously then raised and held in the raised position for a number of minutes and you don t get any bubbles f did not mention earlier that once or twice during the process will release the vacuum and let the tool pulse in the up right or inverted position My reasoning for this is that air may be trapped below the compensator membrane which is fully compressed when on vacuum and this may let some air migrate upward 80 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 0 Another thing not previously mentioned is that early in the evacuation process normally pressure the system up to about 30 PSI and hold it for a few seconds This is to ensure all of my tie wires are sealing the system and have no holes in the diaphragm compensator membrane or bellows Finishing Up When cease to get any air out of the system have another procedure for finishing off the oil fill Although some people do not l
73. UNS 5 8 18 UNF threaded shafts The resolution of the encoder is 25 counts per revolution and is scaled using the Data Logger 4 step calibration procedure 2 1 4 Hookload Sensor There are 2 hookload sensors available 200 PSI for attaching to a pancake for deadline weight measurement 2000 PSI for attaching to the weight indicator at the driller s station The hookload sensors are scaled using the Data Logger 2 step calibration procedure 2 2 Setup The Data Logger is implemented as a wizard type startup application that simplifies the steps required for proper operation Once each step is completed the wizard will automatically configure itself for the next step in the process 112 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 2 2 1 Job Setup The Data Logger is responsible for creating a master database for all data logged Every job and track sidetrack will have its own unique database to work from The first step in the startup process is to enter all the job information in the first wizard screen Since each database represents a unique job and track side track the tie in survey information will also be included here Database File LEG Lnd Browse Job information Job Number HTI20EXW 132 Use Metric Well Nome HARRELL E 1 RE Company WCS OIL AND GAS Field AUSTIN CHALK Operator STEPHEN SMART Location LAT 30 17 31 20 LONG 96 42 47 04 Rig D NABORS 27 State TX Cour
74. Verify that the oil is not discolored and there are bubbles 7 1 69 Release the air pressure completely by turning the air pressure regulator knob counter clockwise 7 1 70 Increase the air pressure by turning the air pressure regulator knob clockwise until you reach 10cc less than the number noted above 7 1 71 Write the resulting amount of oil on line 6 of the data sheet 7 1 72 Remove the syringe and discard the oil in an approved container 7 1 73 Verify that the oil in the tool is at the top of the hole 7 1 74 Plug the oil fill 7 1 75 Wipe the excess oil off the assembly and the plug area 7 1 76 Remove the threaded protector 7 1 77 Remove the air supply hose and reduce the air pressure to zero psi 7 1 78 Loosen the nuts on the pressure apparatus 7 1 79 Move the assembly to the next assembly queue 7 2 When there is a conflict of information in the instructions the order of precedence of documentation is listed below 1 Product Specification and Drawings and manufacturing instructions contained on them 2 Manufacturing Flow Chart 3 Manufacturing Procedures MPs 4 Process Instructions such as welding procedures Ps 1 5 and 1 5 Standard Operating Procedures SOPs 48 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 8 0 EXHIBITS 8 1 Pulser Force Test Valve Positions ASSY PULSER OIL FILLED 175C MWD PULSER FORCE TEST aka VACUUM TEST ___ __ voen
75. a data word have been received the decoded value is reported to the receiver display and logging functions The receiver display maintains files containing all decoded data words pulse data buffers contains the characteristics of all detected and suspected detected pulses and pulse waveform records contains a stripchart vs time of the output of the matched filter process 5 Parity Check and Error Correction Code Each data word and header if used can be encoded with parity or error correction code symbols added to the data The parity check will detect a single one slot pulse position error contained in the detected data word The error correction code will detect a single two slot pulse position error and correct a single one slot pulse position error The single slot error in pulse location is the most likely form of error source to be expected in the received signal 6 Other System Capabilities The qMWD Engineer s Reference Manual describes in detail many system attributes such as the ability to detect either positive or negative pressure pulses the wide variety of available formats for data words and the ability to change almost any parameter of the tool while downhole using a series of timed flow off and on sequences The system has been used to successfully encode and decode several other proprietary signal formats 43 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation 44 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation 45 Chapter 2 Theory
76. a new gamma point right click on the left hand grid and select Add new entry 11473 64 46 00 7 20 2006 1 59 11473 85 48 00 7 20 2006 1 59 gt qu 7 27 2006 8 01 Relocate Selection You will then prompted to enter the new log entry Depending on the editor the prompt will vary slightly but the following is an example of the gamma log entry prompt New Gamma Log Entry DEAR Depth Gamma Raw Gamma Corectedl 144 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 5 4 2 Removing points from a real time log Simply select the row you wish to remove and press the del key the keyboard 5 4 3 Changing points on a real time log Editing points can be done by either drag editing the curve points directly or by editing the point value in the data grid 5 4 3 1 Drag editing points To drag edit points you must first enable point dragging on the curve plot To do so click on the button that looks like a mouse cursor on the plot toolbar T alal Click here to enable point dragging 45 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Then click on the point you wish to move and drag it with the mouse The modified rov in the grid will be scrolled to and highlighted and the point on the plot will move to its new position X pata Edit This noint was moved 5 4 3 2 Editing points in the data grid Points can also be easily edited via the data grid Simply locate the
77. accomplished with either the Pulser line or a line coming off the bottom of the reservoir can be used Insert either line into your oil bottle When the line is in the oil slowly open the appropriate valve The valve will be dependent on the line being used If coming off the line in the bottom of the reservoir this would be the valve to open If using the Pulser line open the valve going from this line to the bottom of the reservoir You should barely have to crack the valve Regardless how careful you are expect that you will end up with a lot of bubbles 4 Keep the valve open until the reservoir is about 1 2 2 3rds full of oil When at this level close the valve drain the hose in your oil bottle and recap and put the oil away 5 Start the vacuum pump again open the vacuum line and ensure that you have a good vacuum Close the valve again and shut off the pump Observe the system for any leaks and repair as needed As mentioned you may get a lot of bubbles out of the reservoir for the first half hour or more This is a function of the aerated oil plus the surface tension of the oil that we discussed earlier 6 Once you have gotten the air out of the system and fixed any leaks so that the system will hold a vacuum without losing any vacuum for an hour or so at a minimum you are ready to start working on the oil fill of a Pulser It should be noted that normally getting the air out of the system is only needed after filling the reservoir
78. and watch the reservoir fill until you reach the top mark 7 1 8 Close valve D 7 1 9 Remove the oil fill plug 7 1 10 Connect the oil fill adapter to the pressure bulkhead at the oil fill port 7 1 11 Power on the pulser test box 7 1 12 Set the on time knob to 1 7 1 13 Set the off time knob to 2 7 1 14 Verify that valve D is closed 7 1 15 Verify that valve A is open 7 1 16 Power on the vacuum pump 7 1 17 Partially open tool valve B 1 8 turn to allow air in pulser to move into the oil reservoir 7 1 18 When the bubbles slow completely open valve B 7 1 19 With all connections in place hold the tool in a vertical position and raise it above your shoulders for 10 seconds 7 1 20 Rotate the tool 180 degrees and raise it above your head for 10 seconds 7 1 21 Lower the tool to table level and tap it for 1 minute with a rubber mallet 7 1 22 Raise the tool above your shoulders for 10 seconds 7 1 23 Rotate the tool 180 degrees and hold it above your head for 10 seconds 7 1 24 Place the tool in its stand and verify that the MDM and oil fill connections are in place 7 1 25 Completely close valves A and C 7 1 26 Power off the vacuum pump 45 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 1 27 Verify that valve is completely open 7 1 28 Allow the tool to pulse to release the air for 5 minutes Note if a constant stream of air bubbles is present refer to the lead tech for troubleshooting 7 1 29 When the
79. are loosened so it can be unscrewed 102 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Once the set screw has been loosened unscrew the lock nut with pliers while keeping the shaft from rotating with a wooden stick in the lugs on the coupling The coupling is Aluminum and using the wooden dowel will avoid damaged Once the Lock Nut is off the threads loosen the set screw in the coupling Once this is done the coupling and lock nut can be removed from the shaft Remove spacer as shown 103 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual The Bearing Mount is the next component you will see on top of the assembly Remove the four screws that hold the bearing mount to the ball screw housing Remove mount and bearing from ball screw housing Knock out pin with punch and hammer 104 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual With the pin removed the old shaft can be removed from Ball Screw Housing Shown are the parts that were removed with the old shaft They are laid out in the order in which they are mounted on the complete assembly Shown are the new shaft with the new parts that are going to be needed The major changes are improvements to the Ball Screw Assembly including the Servo Poppet Tip a stronger and simpler bearing unit and a simpler coupling assembly 105 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual We now going to assemble the drive assembly utilizing the new components Shown in the picture
80. arise on each side of the dipole creating a torque for electric dipole moment in coulomb meters T mxB for a magnetic dipole moment m in ampere square meters 25 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation The resulting torque will tend to align the dipole with the applied field which in the case of an electric dipole yields a potential energy of The energy of a magnetic dipole is similarly m B Dipole radiation In addition to dipoles in electrostatics it is also common to consider an electric or magnetic dipole that is oscillating in time In particular a harmonically oscillating electric dipole is described by a dipole moment of n eo ivt the form P r where is the angular frequency In vacuum this produces fields 1 w 1 iw r x x r 3r r __ gums Cr P cp p 2 WwW Qr 1 ATE QC r Far away for gt 1 the fields approach the limiting form of a radiating spherical wave w 4 4 r E cBxr which produces a total time average radiated power P given by P 12 26 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation This power is not distributed isotropically but is rather concentrated around the directions lying perpendicular to the dipole moment Usually such equations are descr
81. bases KDT Receiver can output WITS or Gamma Output data format 95 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software RECEIVER OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES 1 Link the pressure transducer cable and the tool program cable to the computer box 2 Plug the power cord into the computer box 3 Turn on your computer and wait until the computer is running smoothly e g complete its virus scan procedures etc 4 Find KeyDrill App folder All program icons are located in this folder It includes all the operational manuals as well KeyDnllApp C Documents and Settings All Users Desktop KeyDrill App File Edit View Favorites Tools Help 3 2 d I Search Folders Address la C Documents and Settings All Users Desktop KeyDrill App Folders Tool Config a OMA Documents Shortcut a 1 KeyDrill Receiver Shortcut 1 Bt 1 32 My Computer 5 Program your MWD tool If it is an industrial standard MWD tool you can Ls program it using KeyDrill s Tool Config software 96 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 6 If the third party s configuration file is used please the configuration file to C Program Technology LLC KDT directory and double clicking to reopen it in KeyDrill s tool configuration proqram Make sure that the content of C Program Files KeyDrill Technology LLC KDT
82. be opened in Step 6 on the following page This will allow the lines to fill and put the oil down to the milser where it will be drawn in 5 Some people recommend keeping the vacuum on for about 15 minutes before starting the fill have not found this to be that beneficial Once the initial vacuum has been taken the pump can however be run on a continuous basis for the first 15 minutes while getting the first bunch of air out of the system At this point the Pulser would normally be on ground supports in the horizontal position This way any oil in the lines should be pulled into the Pulser 6 Open the valve between the Pulser line and the bottom of the reservoir When opened the lines down to the Pulser on the ground stands should fill up with the air in the line going up the sight line This valve is shown on the picture on the bottom of the previous page 7 When you think there isn t really any air coming out of the Pulser pick it up and raise it above the reservoir as shown in the picture below You should see all kinds of air come bubbling out When doing this try to hold a loop in the lines as indicated When the Pulser is lowered and the air bubbles kept in the loop this will prevent the air from going back into the Pulser 8 Raising and lowering the Pulser for the first 15 30 minutes should get you to the point where it is harder to get bubbles to come out of the Pulser During this time the vacuum pump can be started then
83. calculated closure information is displayed here TVD 1406 25 CDIS 419 99 DLS 11 32 vs 419 81 127 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software The toolface offset entered the Toolface mode indicator M startup wizard is displayed here for High or gravity N user verification toolface and MTF or magnetic toolface is displayed Toolface dial Clicking anywhere on the dial face will switch between toolface modes Used to manually insert and remove the slips enable diable logging when a hookload sensor is not used Real time log display Currently only gamma These toolbar buttons are used is displayed in this graph The RED line is to scroll scale zoom in out the raw gamma data scaled to API units The and print the real time log BLUE line is filtered gamma data display 128 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software All functions on the last screen of the startup wizard diagnostics screen are available on the Surveying screen The illustrations below show the pull down menu items that reflect their diagnostics screen counterparts File Edit Help File Edit Help Surveys Plot Surveys Export to LAS GeoLogPlot Hole Depth Click T 2 4 2 Editing a Survey 0 2 Backup the databace bef ore editing pent Before the survey editor appears a prompt will appear for
84. chloride batteries must be disposed of properly in accordance with 40 CFR PARTS 261 amp 262 Lithium batteries for disposal are classified as Waste Lithium Batteries 9 UN3090 II for shipping purposes and they have an EPA waste disposal code of 0003 and 0001 The products of lithium thionyl chloride battery deactivation are not toxic non hazardous once neutralized Lithium thionyl chloride batteries should be disposed of by an EPA permitted treatment storage and disposal facility Because each state and country has different disposal regulations contact your local environmental agency for instructions on how to properly manage and dispose of waste lithium batteries 138 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual EMERGENCY CONDITIONS Because of the high energy density inherent in lithium thionyl chloride batteries the potential for hazardous situations does exist Most hazards are due to internal or external heating of a hermetically sealed battery Overheating causes liquid electrolyte to expand increasing hydrostatic pressure inside the can This might cause the battery to burst Further heating can cause the lithium anode to melt which in turn will react spontaneously with the electrolyte and bring about a violent reaction of the battery CAUSES OF HAZARDOUS CONDITIONS ELECTRICAL AND PHYSICAL Hazardous electrical conditions include recharging short circuiting and forced discharging voltage reversal Hazardous physical
85. colors 7 10 59 Slide 1 1 section of heat shrink tubing 3 32 diameter Kynar down the black heavy gauge wire for later use Do not heat this tubing now 7 10 60 Slide 1 section of heat shrink tubing 3 32 diameter Kynar down 1 of the brown wires 7 10 61 Slide 1 94 section of heat shrink tubing 3 32 diameter Kynar down 1 of the red wires 7 10 62 Lay the 2 light gauge black wires parallel and connect their hooks to the hooked end of the heavy gauge black wire 26 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Tensor Pulser Level 2 To be performed on tools with lt 300 hours Last Updated Dec 17 2007 Serial Number Level2 Circ Hours Tech Name Date of Service Customer Kit Job Operator Well Name INCOMING CHECKS 00000 Look at the tool s history checking for earlier problems and the tool s Operating hours Clean grease writing etc from tool Connect the pulser to test box and ensure that the FI OW indicator light is ON pulser for flow switch function Flow switch voltage Check pull force hold force return spring force RSF Specs Mieasured INCOMING PULL FORCH 10 17ibs d INCOMING HOLD FORC RETURN SPRING FORCE 3ibs Off Check the oil in the compensation membrane INTERNAL CHECKS 0000 00000000000 00 Loosen all joints on the pulser Rate the oil condition 1 clean to 10 mud invasion
86. conditions include external heating due to uncontrolled storage incineration and physical destruction of the battery case via crushing puncturing and disassembly Excessive heating can cause violent behavior with any type of battery Physical destruction can result in leakage of toxic and highly corrosive electrolyte EMERGENCY PROCEDURES Y Safety Regulations must be followed at all times the regulatory references are found in 29 CFR PART 1910 In the unlikely event of violent battery behaviour the area should be evacuated immediately Unless they are wearing personal protection devices all workers should stay away from the area for at least 15 minutes rather than trying to correct the situation Burning or fuming batteries should be left isolated until expert handling can correct the condition Lithium fires should never be extinguished with equipment other than that which is designed for lithium fires i e Lith X Y Incase of leakage leaking batteries should be isolated from all personnel and equipment Since electrolyte can be neutralized with common baking soda leaking batteries should be placed in sealed plastic bags containing baking soda The bags should be placed in a sealed and labelled drum Vermiculite should be used to cushion the batteries Note Personal protective equipment should always be used around leaking batteries 139 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual SAFETY EQUIPMENT AND MATERI
87. do not need all nodes to be connected to load the firmware to the targeted node 5 Invoke the Boot Mode for the qMWD Transmitter MPTx20 6 Run qTalk C qTalk should be in the path If it is not go to the qTalk directory CAqTalk and type qtalk2 7 Switch to Terminal Mode by pressing Shift F9 8 Set the Baud Rate to 9600 by pressing F6 Baud softkey 9 Switch to Second Menu by pressing F10 Next Menu 10 Idle the qBus by pressing F5 Idle Depress rapidly 3 4 times 11 Invoke the Chat Mode by pressing F7 Chat 12 At the prompt type the Link address 20 and press the Enter key The node selected will return a command prompt 13 Invoke Boot Mode by typing CCod 11 Boot and pressing the Enter key If successful then the target processor will NOT return a prompt 14 Exit qTalk by pressing F1 68 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software DO NOT PRESS ANY OTHER KEYS 15 Verify that you are in the correct directory C qMWD qMPTx for the standard 100080 02 module x CAgMWDWqMPTx 2 for the new 2 100640 01 module CAgMWDNqMPTx 2R for the new 2 100640 02 module with recorder memory For all Software Versions PRIOR to V01 30 Do NOT use the batch file command to load these files to the downhole tool Doing so would reset the calibration factors to default values Instead continue with the steps below 1 Load the qMIX 11TM Operati
88. extinguishing media for fires involving lithium metal or batteries If a fire is in an adjacent area and batteries are packed in their original containers the fire can be fought based on fuelling material e g paper and plastic products Avoid fume inhalation DISPOSAL DO NOT INCINERATE or subject batteries to temperatures in excess of 212 F 100 C Such abuse can result in loss of seal leakage and or explosion Dispose of in accordance with appropriate Federal State and Local regulations HANDLING AND USE PRECAUTIONS MECHANICAL CONTAINMENT Encapsulation some potting will not allow for expansion Such enclosure can result in high pressure explosion from heating due to inadvertent charging or high temperature environments i e in excess of 100 C SHORT CIRCUIT Batteries should always be packaged and transported in such a manner as to prevent direct contact with each other Short circuiting will cause heat and reduce capacity Jewellery such as rings and bracelets should be removed or insulated before handling the batteries to prevent inadvertent short circuiting through contact with the battery terminals Burns to the skin may result from the heat generated by a short circuit CHARGING These batteries are not designed to be charged or recharged To do so may cause the batteries to leak or explode OTHER If soldering or welding to the terminals or case of the battery is required exercise proper precautions to prevent dama
89. for its operation 71 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Hardware Requirements PC compatible computer qNIC cable Safe Area Power Supply SAPS Tool Programming cable Hardware Setup 1 Connect one end of the qNIC cable to an available qBus port on the SAPS 2 Connect the other end of the qNIC cable to an available COM port on the computer 3 Connect the tool programming cable to the SAPS and the MWD tool Software Requirements Microsoft Windows 95 98 or NT 4 0 Minimum Windows Settings Screen resolution of 640x480 pixels Video color depth of 8 bits 256 colors Recommended Windows Settings Screen resolution of 1024x768 pixels Video color depth of 16 bits 65536 colors or more What s New MWDROII32 is not an upgrade from MWDRoll It is an entirely new program 32 encompasses almost all the functionality of the older MW DRoll plus additional features described below O S platform upgrade from MS DOS to Windows 95 98 NT New UI presenting a graphical alphanumerical display MWD tool communication now handled via qW32Server application New Remote data acquisition mode No need to save data manually it is all automatically saved into a database Added header data editing New print previewing feature Printed reports now present information in more comprehensive fashion New feature allows opening editing and updating previous roll tests Added help an
90. for the tangential field at the surface of the conductor The conductors have a finite conductivity and so these currents cause a transformation of electrical energy into heat The energy lost comes from the stored energy of the wave and so the wave as it progresses diminishes in amplitude The conductors are necessarily supported by insulators which are imperfect and cause additional attenuation of the wave standing wave detector electromagnetism An electric indicating instrument used for detecting a standing electromagnetic wave along a transmission line or in a waveguide and measuring the resulting standing wave ratio it can also be used to measure the wavelength and hence the frequency of the wave Also known as standing wave indicator standing wave meter standing wave ratio meter 31 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Retrievable tools vs Fixed mounted tools MWD tools may be semi permanently mounted in a drill collar only removable at servicing facilities or they may be self contained and wireline retrievable Retrievable tools sometimes known as 5 Tools be retrieved and replaced using wireline though the drill string This generally allows the tool to be replaced much faster in case of failure and it allows the tool to be recovered if the drillstring becomes stuck Retrievable tools must be much smaller usually about 2 inches or less in diameter though their length may be 20 feet or more The small size
91. from the File menu The Open Roll Test dialog appears Note MWDRoll32 must contain at least one completed roll test to open the Open Roll Test dialog Open Test Test Identifier Header Information Operator oboe Start Date And Time 8 16 99 842128 Tool Serial Number Tool Bias Multiplier 44444 Site Location Tensor 9 City RoundRock State Province ZIP Code 78927 Country JUSA Miscellaneous Notes None 2 Select a test by number in the Test Identifier column and click the OK button Note When you select a test number that test s Header Information and Miscellaneous Notes appear Use this information to help identify the test you want to open 80 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Editing Header Information The Roll Test Header Information dialog opens when the user starts a new test or re opens a completed test and chooses to edit the Header To open the Roll Test Header Information dialog 1 Open a Previous Roll Test 2 Select the Header Information item from the Edit menu The Roll Test Header Information dialog appears Roll Test Header Information Test Specifics Unige ID Number o perator Name Tool Serial Number ato Tool Bias Multiple 0 Start Date and Time 8 16 99 8 4212 Address SieLocaiom TensorDlRig Nearest City Romd
92. groove in the Bulkhead Retainer and install the retainer as shown Fasten the Retainer in place using 2 4 40 x 1 4 screws 102010 not shown and Loctite 243 Note These screws should be barely snug to allow the Bulkhead Retainer to self align when installing the Interconnect Housing next step 198 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual UPHOLE AS124 pem Groove Figure 2 1 9 Grease O rings thread Interconnect Housing 201509 in place as shown Grease O ring and install Thread Protector 201845 not shown into open end of Interconnect Housing 199 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 201514 m 201509 UPHOLE ZI Figure 3 2 Upper End 2 1 Grease and install O rings on Gamma Intermodule End 201632 as shown below Tape threads to prevent damage to O rings Grease the Orings feed the 10 pin connector into the Gamma Intermodule End and thread the Intermodule End into the Pressure Housing as shown 201632 UPHOLE AS220 AS127 Figure 4 2 2 Grease O rings and install onto Top Bulkhead Retainer 201505 as shown below Grease O rings on the pigtail 10 pin connector Install Split Shell halves into the recess in the Gamma Intermodule End as shown Align the key on the 10 pin connector with the groove in the Bulkhead Retainer and install the retainer as shown Fasten the Retainer in place using 2 4 40 x 1 4 screws not shown and Loctite 243 200 Chap
93. horizontal position 7 1 52 Remove the plunger from the syringe 7 1 53 Remove the oil fill adapter from the oil fill plughole and replace it with the oil fill adapter on the syringe 7 1 54 Plug the adapter on oil fill supply line 7 1 55 Wipe excess oil off the assembly and the plug area 7 1 56 Place the pulser in a tabletop chain vice resting on blocks of wood in the horizontal position with the syringe in the vertical position 7 1 57 Connect the chain over the solenoid housing near the syringe 7 1 58 Verify that the mud compensator holes are open 7 1 59 Remove the end caps from both sides of the pressure apparatus 7 1 60 Slide the nut washer and o ring past the window on the screen housing and the mud compensator holes 7 1 61 Slide the pressure apparatus into the nut and loosely tighten 7 1 62 Install the o ring washer and nut onto the outside end of the pressure apparatus to hand tight 7 1 63 Install thread protectors to the screen housing to hand tight 7 1 64 Power on the air pressure source to 60 16 7 1 65 Turn the air pressure regulator knob counter clockwise to the off position 7 1 66 Turn the air source line to the pressure apparatus plug 7 1 67 Gradually increase the air pressure to 40 Ibs by turning the air pressure regulator knob clockwise At 40 lbs of air pressure the level of oil in the syringe should be from 20 to 24cc Note the number 47 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 1 68
94. housing until the pin sets into position 7 3 8 Secure the large end of the bellows with safety wire 10 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 3 9 Verify that the wire tube assembly at the nose sits evenly and without rotation at the 3 web fingers in the pulser screen housing 7 3 10 Install the shim over the wire tube and onto the wire tube plug inside the pulser screen housing 7 3 11 Remove the part label and clean the membrane support with isopropyl alcohol 7 3 12 Clean inside the membrane Membrane Grooves Inner Groove Outer Groove support until all visible debris is removed 7 3 13 Inspect the membrane PRESS COMPENS for nicks or tears If any nicks or tears are found replace the membrane and inspect the v T EF gt al replacement 7 3 14 Clean the membrane with isopropyl alcohol 7 3 15 Slide the membrane over the membrane support Verify that the membrane extends 1 10 past the outer ridge of the membrane grooves at 1 end of the support 11 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 3 16 Apply 2 drops of silicone lubricant at opposite sides on the membrane 90 degrees from the release marks 7 4 Install Safety Wires Over 1 End of Membrane 7 4 1 Coil the safety wire 025 DIA 302 into 1 diameter coils 7 4 2 Verify that the top wire faces counter clockwise and the bottom wire faces clockwise 7 4 3 Grip the wire at the cross point with safety wire pliers
95. is a simulated tool that will generate artificial data internally for testing and demo purposes It will simulate either a steering tool or MWD tool 2 3 2 Displays Descriptions for the data displayed on this screen are Block Height Sent via the WITS system or generated internally by using the depth tracking equipment Bit Depth Sent via the WITS system or generated internally by using the depth tracking equipment Bit depth will only change if the slips are out The Data Logger uses this depth for data logging When using the supplied depth tracking equipment the display to the right of Bit Depth indicates the bit status as On Bottom or Off Bottom This is important when using a hookload sensor for automatic slips detection If the bit is On Bottom and the hookload weight falls below the Threshold Weight defined earlier then the slips will not automatically be removed This is to prevent errors in depth tracking when weight stacks up on long lateral drills Hole Depth Sent via WITS or generated internally by using the depth tracking equipment Sent via WITS or generated internally by using the depth tracking equipment This data is also logged into the database for plotting Hook Load Sent via WITS or generated internally using the hookload sensor This data is also logged into the database 124 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Ref Hkld Also known as the Bottom Weight this p
96. is necessary for the tool to fit through the drillstring however it also limits the tool s capabilities For example slim tools are not capable of sending data at the same rates as collar mounted tools and they are also more limited in their ability to communicate with and supply electrical power to other LWD tools Collar mounted tools also known as Fat Tools cannot generally be removed from their drill collar at the wellsite If the tool fails the entire drillstring must be pulled out of the hole to replace it However without the need to fit through the drillstring the tool can be larger and more capable The ability to retrieve the tool via wireline is often useful For example if the drillstring becomes stuck in the hole then retrieving the tool via wireline will save a substantial amount of money compared to leaving it in the hole with the stuck portion of the drillstring However there are some limitations on the process Limitations Retrieving a tool using wireline is not necessarily faster than pulling the tool out of the hole For example if the tool fails at 1 500 ft 460 m while drilling with a triple rig able to trip 3 joints of pipe or about 90 ft 30 m feet at a time then it would generally be faster to pull the tool out of the hole then it would be to rig up wireline and retrieve the tool especially if the wireline unit must be transported to the rig Wireline retrievals also introduce additional risk If th
97. is not a tool stand under the isolation ring that can cause a short across the tool isolation when measuring the output voltage Connect the transmitter test box to the BOP connector and to the Antenna connector on the back of the Fl Receiver box Power up the Receiver connect the transducer cable to the SAI and set gain to 7 Do not tap test the tool string with the programming cable connected to the tool and SAI Incorrect operations could possibly cause damage to the SAI Tap test the tool and watch the LED flash on the transmitter test box indicating that the tool string is transmitting Tap test the tool for approximately 2 minutes to get a complete survey on the computer screen A pulse signal at approximately 4 Volts should appear on the Oscilloscope This indicates that the tool is functioning properly PICKING UP TOOL When carrying the tool string across the lease to the catwalk the tool can turn on because of vibration and transmit and receive delay time is set too low Place the bottom area of the transmitter in rags or blocks of wood when lying on catwalk Do not drag the tool across the catwalk as this can cause it to spark and blow a fuse Use an extended J Latch assembly to seat the tool Because of the Isolation Sub the tool string sits deeper into the drill collar Fill the helix end key slot with chalk and run the tool string in without any o rings or springs Mark the J Latch at the top of the drill collar when the tool is pro
98. is screwed on to the helix end with blue Loctite Make sure all o rings are installed on the Pressure Stinger outside 210 o ring x 4 and 115 o ring on threads Make sure wear shoulder is not worn down If it is it will not line up the ported hole on the Pressure Stinger to the ported holes on the Muleshoe sleeve Slide the pressure test sleeve over the Muleshoe and use the hydraulic pump to apply pressure Configuration of the annular pressure can be setup in the Survey Sequence or Toolface Sequence The variable used for annular pressure is GV1 the minimum bits that should be used is 13 For example GV1 13 Parity Inc Azm Grav and MagF should be added to the Toolface Logging Sequence The Toolface should be added to the survey sequence Tap test the tool and watch GV1 come up with the pressure reading The re sync option Mode 4 3 Amps should be run for underbalanced situations For situations when the tool will not turn off because the well is flowing the tool will automatically shut off after 16 minutes and look for sync again ED Chapter 7 Pressure While Drilling Annular Pressure optional e E g GV1 13P Mode 4 Re Sync option Add Inc AZM screws prior to landing tool e Replace with ported set screws once tool is seated Vibration Monitoring optional The drilling environment can introduce severe vibration to the drill string Drill string vibration which can cause excessive bit wear reduce
99. may be accessed by clicking on the Settings menu and then clicking on the Preferences menu item This will open a new window showing you the current settings and what can be configured by the user This section will go into detail in each section of preferences START UP This preferences section will show you the options that you can change for the program to alter the startup conditions Load Previous Window Positions Displays the windows in the same positions as they were when the program was closed Show Open File Dialog on Start up This will display a file chooser window for you to open a MWD file Default Variable Values This deals with the values loaded in the displayed MWD file when no file is opened at startup You may choose to use the program defaults or use a custom file Generic Variables This preferences section shows the generic variable names alternate display name and also the decode routing The descriptions below go into more detail for each section Variable This column lists the default generic variable names These cannot be changed but may be overridden using the alternate display names Alt Display Alternate display name for the generic variables If a name is provided here it will be displayed in the configuration file with this name and also appear in the BTR Interface using this name Decode Houting This option allows the user to route a decoded generic variable value to a display windo
100. may contain up to 16 alphanumeric characters The target ID is primarily used to define the names of the bootloader files and the memory configuration for the target processor ii filename ext identifies the source file to be transferred to the target processor and may be preceded by a path designation This file specification may be omitted if it is specified in the target specification or if the BO option switch is used iii S1 52 and sn designate option switch settings and are only required to change the default settings A list of available options can be obtained directly from qProg 11 by entering qProg11 by itself the command line The available options are 1 2 The Port select switches Selects the desired serial communications port to be used C NC The Checksum enable and Checksum disable switches The Checksum enable switch is the default and indicates qProg 1 1 should write checksums The type of checksum and destination address is individually specified for each device in the target processor F NF The Fill and No Fill switches When No Fill is used only the bytes defined by the s19 file are programmed The default is individually specified for each target Fill will cause all bytes in a memory or memory page which are not defined in the source file to be filled with the character specified for the target G 57 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software NG The Go and No Go swi
101. motor activated pulser This new design has proved to be more reliable and robust while providing extreme energy conservation by using considerably lower battery consumption For extreme environments with high concentrations of LCM Compass employs the APS Advanced Product Support pulser This is a top mounted direct drive rotor stator design This is a high energy consumption pulser but is able to handle the harsh environments The GE Tensor pulser design consists of an oil filled pulser section and an electronic driver section The driver section contains a large multi capacitor bank that stores energy from the battery packs and is controlled by the timing switching circuitry to generate time pulses This section is connected to the oil filled section containing a double solenoid attached via spring loaded shafts to the servo poppet A pulse is generated when a pulse signal sent by the directional module to the pulser driver releases energy from the capacitor bank to the solenoid assembly The energy activates both the pull in solenoid and the holding solenoid ES Chapter 2 Theory of Operation This imparts a magnetic field in the pull in solenoid that causes a piston to move up within the housing and pull the spring loaded shafts up to allow the steel clapper to contact the holding solenoid The energy to the pull in solenoid is stopped and the energy to the holding solenoid holds the clapper for t
102. not coincide Electric dipole with moment Qd An electric dipole whose moment oscillates sinusoidally radiates electromagnetic waves and is known as a hertzian dipole it is of interest in developing the theory of electromagnetic radiation For practical purposes a half wave dipole consisting of two collinear conducting rods fed at the center whose combined length equals half the wavelength of the radiation to be transmitted or received is often used as an antenna element either by itself or in an array or as a feed for a reflector In physics there are two kinds of dipoles Hell nic di s two and p la pivot hinge An electric dipole is a separation of positive and negative charge The simplest example of this is a pair of electric charges of equal magnitude but opposite sign separated by some usually small distance A permanent electric dipole is called an electret A magnetic dipole is a closed circulation of electric current A simple example of this is a single loop of wire with some constant current flowing through it Il Dipoles can be characterized by their dipole moment a vector quantity For the simple electric dipole given above the electric dipole moment would point from the negative charge towards the positive charge and have a magnitude equal to the strength of each charge times the separation between the charges For the current loop the magnetic dipole moment would point through the loop accordin
103. not to the threads of each of 4 setscrews type 8 32 SET 1 8 7 9 18 Install the 4 setscrews 34 of the way into the pressure bulkhead 7 9 19 Verify that the M4 connector is centered on the pressure bulkhead housing 7 9 20 Tighten the 4 setscrews in a cross pattern to hand tight 7 10 Install Membrane Screen Housing 7 10 1 Install 1 spring type SOLENOID RETURN onto the spring shaft 7 10 2 Verify that the spring slides down the shaft without resistance 7 10 3 Install 1 short spring spacer into the spring shaft 7 10 4 Install a second spring type SOLENOID RETURN into the spring shaft 7 10 5 Install a second short spring spacer into the spring shaft 7 10 6 Install 1 long spring spacer into the spring shaft 18 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 10 7 Verify that the long spring spacer extends 1 7 8 out of the wire tube 7 10 8 Apply silicone lubricant to the O ring on the down hole end of the mud compensator housing 7 10 9 Connect the mud compensator housing to the membrane screen housing 7 10 10 Clean the assembly 9 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 10 11 Place the assembly tabletop chain vice resting on blocks of wood with the membrane screen housing under the chain 7 10 12 Connect a gear wrench to the oil fill housing to hold the housing in position 7 10 13 Connect a second gear wrench to the spring housing to tighten it into position 7 10 14 Place the second gear wr
104. of Operation CHAPTER 3 OPERATIONS MANUAL SURFACE HARDWARE amp SOFTWARE A BENCHTREE B GE C KEYDRILL D DRIGIDRILL A BENCHTREE OPERATIONS MANUAL Bench Tree Group MWD Receiver Software For Windows 2000 and XP Flags OO aw OC ogw 00 Revised September 13 2007 960050 Document 960050 3000 Manufactured by Bench Tree Group LLC PO Box 1878 Georgetown TX 78627 1878 Phone 512 869 6900 FAX 512 233 0968 2004 2007 Bench Tree Group LLC All rights reserved Information subject to change without notice 1 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Table of Contents DOCUMENT OVERVIEW BTR INTERFACE e Installing the Software Installed Locations e Connecting to the Receiver PROGRAM LAYOUT USING THE PROGRAM e Compass Window Pulse Pressure Window Database Status Window History Window Recently Decoded Data Window View Change Variables Window MWD File Window Shock Window STORED FILES e Viewing Log Files e Viewing Database Survey Reports CHANGING PREFERENCES e Compass Data Format Generic Variables Miscellaneous Saved Files Sounds Warnings WITS SHUTTING DOWN BTR AND SAVING USER SETTINGS HELP USING THE PROGRAM FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS TROUBLESHOOTING MWD CONFIGURATION UTILITY e Installing the Software Starting the Program e Using the Program Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software
105. of spring housing that contains a main spring and a piston cap with un energized Poly Pak o rings In the lower end of the housing is a Ceramic wear sleeve that allows the piston cap to move up and down The piston cap is attached to the top of the main signal shaft The main signal shaft is inserted through the helix end that is used to align the MWD tool with the scribe line of the mud motor indicating the point of the maximum bend on the motor When the MWD tool is inserted into the Muleshoe sleeve a key and reverse helix assist to orient the tool to align with the toolface of the mud motor and places the poppet tip on the end of the Main Signal shaft into the carbide orifice contained in the Muleshoe sleeve 4 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation In the No Flow situation refer to first display figure below the MWD tool has the main signal poppet fully extended into the main orifice in the muleshoe sleeve and mud infiltrates all of the areas of the lower end of the pulsers in a static situation As mud flow is initiated the mud moves around the tool and through the main orifice Mud inside the spring housing plenum and main signal shaft is drawn out as flow goes by With the servo poppet closed the pressure in the plenum decreases not a vacuum Therefore the pressure in the plenum is less than the pressure on the outside of the housing The un loaded Poly Paks form a partial seal to prevent seepage of fluid into the plenum A
106. ohms is ideal for Low Voltage 4 40 ohms with High Voltage High resistance acts as Open Circuit pt ty TUET J0Ck 5755006 Antenna Rod 34 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation GOOD SIGNAL SURFACE ad Antenna Re OOJOO DO nano 693593326 NEGO nnn nr 3 Tuum y proe iet eve IEEE gt 44 iM iu ur pom anng Sort eter yee E M Reci neum 999202051 DIETO moe cm won ENS NC OJT EMGS 922900020003 Eust xx x tx SS 3 lt all circuits connect Good reception 35 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation POOR SIGNAL SURFACE e Low Resistance acts as a Short Circuit Antenna Rod 3 nonnzccu3 QAARMISCEHE 1 G Low DRILLING FLUIDS Signalis lost into low resistance mud similar to formations high resistance mud e g Invert is a good insulator 36 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation ISOLATION SUB GAP SUB ALIGNMENT 6 0 alignment Arc over currents through mud Gap Sub With Correct Alignment Tr i EM Transmitter Insulated Gap Arc Over Arc Over Arc Over
107. out This brochure will not attempt to explain paperwork because every carrier has different requirements e U S DOT The proper shipping name is LITHIUM BATTERY 9 UN3090 PG II The Regulations State that the batteries must be separated to prevent external short circuits and they must be packed in inner fiberboard containers no more than 500 grams of lithium per inner container The inner containers can then be packed with at least one inch of non combustible packing material such as vermiculite separating each inner package in 4G fiberboard boxes 1A2 or 1B2 steel drums 1G fiber drums 4C1 4C2 4D wooden boxes Motor freight rail freight water or Cargo Aircraft can ship the batteries only Restricted batteries cannot be carried aboard passenger carrying aircraft Boxes must be labelled MISANEOUS CLASS 9 If the batteries are to be shipped by air then the package has to have a CARGO AIRCRAFT ONLY label also known as DANGER LABEL attached Boxes must be marked with the proper shipping name and the UN number near the shipping labels e INTERNATIONAL AIR TRANSPORT ASSOCIATION IATA IATA regulations are very similar to the DOT regulations except for paperwork and packaging Packaging for IATA shipments has to be performance tested before the packages are used for shipping These packages have to be marked with a United Nations Marking Symbol section 6 0 of IATA shipping regulations SAFE DISPOSAL Lithium thionyl
108. point you wish to change and edit the data in place in the grid The plot will update to reflect the new data in the grid ES Data Editor Fle Heb Stait Page LogIniomaticn Surveys Germa Log ROP WOB Temperature Survey Depth Gamma Last Changed 1144044 4000 7 20 2008 1 59 HN 1440 85 4100 7 20 2008 1 59 This point was 11440 87 45 00 7 20 2008 1 59 changed in the grid 11441 08 5500 2 20 2008 1 58 441 22 56 00 7 20 2008 1 59 11441 51 441 72 6800 7 20 2006 1 59 11441 93 7500 7 20 2008 1 59 44214 7100 7 20 2006 1 59 1144236 67 00 7 20 2006 1 59 44257 68 00 7 20 2006 1 59 11442 78 77 00 7 20 2006 1 59 11442 99 7600 7 20 2006 1 59 11443 68 00 7 20 2006 1 58 11443 21 70 00 7 20 2006 1 59 11443 21 75 00 7 20 2006 1 58 1144342 73 00 7 20 2008 1 59 11449 43 7300 7 20 2006 1 59 1000 11443 53 71 00 7 20 2006 1 146 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 5 4 4 Relocating a section of real time log Sections of the real time logs can easily be relocated In order to relocate a section simply select the rows representing the data you wish to move F Stat Garsa Log R PAw B Last 1148881 4800 2 11420 02 4500 1142023 4800 1147045 4500 11420 86 4500 11470 87 4100 11471 18 4800 114713 4100 1147151 4200 11
109. properly to the standpipe and the DRT Yes Go to step 9 No Correct the situation Go to step 1 10 Chapter 5 Operations Manual 9 Do the values the transducer settings match the type of transducer being used Yes Go to Step 10 No Correct the settings and retry 10 Check for closed valves and plugged connections are they open Yes Change out the Transducer No Open all valves to the transducer and remove any solids blocking the standpipe connectors Go to Step 1 Pulser Troubleshooting Guide Lower End Inspection Condition of Signal Poppet Tip and Shaft Stop Check these two parts for unusual damage and wear If the poppet is chipped severe wash and erosion will result when it run DOWNhole The shaft stop should be secure and not jammed with debris or eroded severely Always check to insure that the tip is secure to the shaft Condition of Signal Poppet Shaft The shaft should be free moving and not jammed with debris Check for excessive wear that would allow for excessive wobble while in the pulsing motion Should the Signal Poppet Shaft offer resistance when shoved upwards into the helix end then remove the helix end and the shaft for inspection Condition of Piston Cap Wiper Poly Pak and Orifice The piston cap and wipers are subject to a tremendous amount wear and should be checked on every trip out of the hole for damage and excessive wear They can be easily changed when the lower end is inspecte
110. receiver 39 Chapter 5 Operations Manual UPON PERFORMING SHALLOW EM TEST Although theory says that EM should not work in casing one typically will receive surveys to a depth of 500 to 1200 feet depending upon power levels ground stake placements etc The EM operator should be looking for signs of detection while running in hole and comparing transmitted data to known parameters i e inclination Once in open hole a survey should be taken while stationary to verify G Total and B Total etc Tie on Survey Edit a tie on survey to use as a starting point on the well It is important that this survey be the same as directional and coordinates throughout the course of the well are the same Surveying in hole While running in hole surveys are frequently obtained to determined accurate coordinates at kick off The requirements for survey intervals vary with inclination but assuming the wells are vertical the interval should be no more than 200 or 70m COMMON PROBLEMS Tool would not shut off Check to see if well has circulation inspect pumps to determine if there is any flow bleed lines Run INC and AZM in tool logging sequence re sync option Noise While Rotating Move ground stake check cables clean all connections and lubricate ground stake Tool would not catch sync Switch the Automatic Manual switch to MANUAL Tool flat lined Remove the bottom to determine if the Gap Sub failed 40 Cha
111. right and moving the red lead to the remaining plugs and housing until all combinations have been covered MAKE NOTE reading of anything but OL Open would indicate possible moisture invasion or short the interconnect should not be run until the cause is identified and remedied 7 Check for continuity with the Fluke meter on and leads in Black plug 1 and Red plug 1 8 A meter reading ofless than 1 0 Ohms should be observed and an audible beep heard MAKE 2999099999 BREAK 9 Continue checking between 2 2 and so on to 10 10 10 A reading other than 0 1 ohms without the would indicate an open in one ofthe wires NOTE Poor readings could be caused by a poor connection with the break out box clean and retest In certain situations an interconnect failing a continuity test could be run above the electronics 149 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual ELECTRONICS INTEGRITY AND RING OUT TEST 1 Hook up break out boxon both ends of electronics with switches in the break position 2 Set the Fluke meter to read Ohms 2 Pay particular attention to the orientation of the leads as reversing the polarity will affect readings rE REP HRP PR PRL BREAK 3 Follow the instructions on the RING OUT TEST SHEET using the Black lead for the first plug of the combination i e 4 5 Black lead in Red plug 4 and Red lead in Red plug
112. said to shift the parameter of the carrier signal between a finite number of values For a modulating signal with only two amplitudes binary is sometimes added before these terms Digital modulating signals with more than two amplitudes are sometimes encoded into both the amplitude and phase of the carrier signal For example if the amplitude of the modulating signal can vary between four different values each such value can be encoded as a combination of one of two amplitudes and one of two phases of the carrier signal Quadrature amplitude modulation QAM is an example of such a technique In certain applications of modulation the carrier signal rather than being a sine wave consists of a sequence of electromagnetic pulses of constant amplitude and time duration which occur at regular points in time Changing one or the other of these parameters gives rise to three modulation schemes known as pulse position modulation PPM pulse duration modulation PDM and pulse amplitude modulation PAM in which the time of occurrence of a pulse relative to its nominal occurrence the time duration of a pulse or its amplitude are determined by the amplitude of the modulating signal This system generally offers data rates of up to 10 bits per second In addition many of these tools are also capable of receiving data from the surface in the same way while mud pulse based tools rely on changes in the drilling parameters such as rotation speed of
113. second This is not acceptable and a change in the collar with a larger ID must be made or the flow must be reduced to a range below 300 GPM 172 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 5 173 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual MWD System Module Selection and Configuration Battery selection is a very important decision to be made when designing the configuration of the tool module location The MWD tool is designed to run either one or two battery packs depending upon the design of the bit run the tool will be used in There are numerous options to consider when designing the MWD tool to match the conditions of the bit run The conditions of the bit run to consider are the order of the list is not relevant to the importance of each item each item must be considered for its individual importance in relation to the bit run i Duration of the bit run ii Pulse width choice iii Sensor choice gamma sensor reduces battery duration by a factor of 12 iv Desire to deplete used battery and switch to new battery during run Calculations and testing have shown that one lithium battery pack will operate the basic MWD system pulser directional module battery for 200 hours at a 2 second pulse width To determine the potential of a battery pack the operator should multiply the pulse width by a factor of 100 The addition of the gamma module changes the factor to 50 174 Chapter 4 MWD
114. temperature the Earth s Magnetic and Gravitational Fields with high resolution The data output is digitized and processed to determine the vector to the earth s magnetic North Pole and the vector for the earth s magnetic forces dipping down at the earth s surface and below This information and other measured parameters produce data such as Inclination Azimuth and magnetic and gravity toolface values that are transmitted to the surface via mud pulse telemetry to assist in well deviation control Numerous quality and tool environment data variables can also be transmitted via mud pulse telemetry to quantify and qualify data values and tool health Processor The MWD processor is the controller of the MWD system and commands all functions and downhole calculations The processor monitors the state of the flow sense to determine when mud flow has started or stopped The condition of Flow or No Flow determines the function performed by the MWD downhole system In a No Flow situation the system ceases transmission and activates the sensor package to measure the magnetic and gravitational forces of the Earth These measurements are used to calculate the values for the data transmitted to the surface in the survey sequence In a Flow situation the processor commences the data transmission process to relay the calculated data to the surface sensors via the mud pulse telemetry created by the activation of the MWD pulser unit 2 Chapter 2 Theory o
115. the operating mode letter changes case when you disconnected the qBus cable For an active qMIX bus the master node sends calling and polling sequences to the slave nodes If another node is master and polls the qTalK link address qTalk responds with light blue EOT characters If qTalk itself is master it sends the calling and polling sequences in blue while any responses from the slave nodes are in yellow In either master or slave modes messages going to or from the PC node are handled automatically by qTalk Some PC displays may not scroll fast enough to keep up with the qMIX calling and polling sequences at 9600 Baud If a display lag develops the qTalk buffer stores up to 8192 delayed characters after which the message break appears in red to indicate that a section of data has been dropped in order to catch up Pressing either the F5 CrLf Cr Carriage Return Lf Line Feed or F7 Filt key combinations can reduce lag in the display The break message also appears when a break sequence is received on the serial communications line A repeated string of breaks usually indicates operation at an incorrect baud rate Other warning messages that appear in red indicate problems with the printer or with a disk file In host mode normal interactive dialog occurs in green while red indicates an error response Host Mode In addition to simply monitoring the Multipoint bus activity the operator may send and receive messages by routing
116. the scaling on the scope for a better view SATURATION SAT Led are indicators of too high of gain and will flash red when the amps begin to saturate When this happens turn the gain down by pressing the gain buttons until the SAT lights turn off Extended amplifier saturation will cause damage to the Receiver and will cause unwanted noise PUMPS AUTO OVERRIDE SWITCH Always set the switch to Auto default This lets the system operate normally Use the Override switch during surveys when there is noise causing the FI Receiver to think that the tool is turning on The Override switch prevents the Receiver from cycling the pumps on off because of noise Once the tool is in sync switch back to auto The pumps will not cycle off if the Override switch is on LOW HIGH WINDOW The Low High Window is used to increase or decrease the window that the FI Receiver uses to look for signal Set to 1 and 6 default To decrease the window when there is noise press one atatime Do not adjust during slides as you may lose sync 29 Chapter 5 Operations Manual EM FREQUENCY INTERFACE RECEIVER RECEIVER The Frequency Interface Receiver takes the signal transmitted from the tool filters it and sends the signal to the SAI or RT for decoding The decoded signal is viewed and monitored on the QMWDPC Benchtree software The F I Receiver always looks for the tool to turn On Off transmitting instead of looking for flow on off T
117. the tool in hard Severe contact of the point of the helix to the Muleshoe Key can damage one or the other or both CLOSELY Observe the tool for rotation as it enters the Muleshoe sleeve and seats Have the hoist operator gently lift the tool up approximately 3 feet and rotate the tool 180 degrees counter clockwise then slowly lower the MWD tool assembly back into the Muleshoe sleeve Again CLOSELY observe the tool for rotation as it enters the Muleshoe sleeve With a pipe wrench grip the spacer bar and attempt to rotate the tool clockwise looking down hole A strong resistance to turn will indicate that the tool is seated The MWD operator and the Directional Supervisor MUST observe the tool s rotation before proceeding q Disconnect the J latch from the spear point by pushing down on the spacer bar and lifting the assembly off the tool r Pickup the lifting and seating tools and clean them completely and place them back in the kit box Keep them clean and free from rust by painting them 47 Chapter 5 Operations Manual 2 MWD Tool lay down Procedures a Meet with the rig crew and carefully explain the lay down procedure to insure that the tool is laid down in a safe and secure manner to protect all personnel and the tool during the lay down procedure b Attach J latch to top of tool Slowly pick up the tool to slots on spear point for attaching pick up bale Attach the bale to the MWD tool and insert the locking pin from the bot
118. them onto the bus through the qTalk Host mode In Host mode the PC keyboard and screen are treated as a point to point port which has the label Talk and uses the address defined in the qMIX LnkA control variable That is LnkA is the number assigned to the PC using the Node Address conventions described in the Help in the qMWD program The Multipoint port on the serial bus continues to operate as normal In qBus Monitor you can enter the Host mode by pressing the F4 key In qTALK you can enter the Host mode by pressing either the F4 key or the ESC key Once in Host mode the communication display halts and presents gt prompt character to solicit messages from the user Communications are still present but are not displayed on screen Only those nodes respond which have information relating to the operator request These nodes precede their responses with their source routing information Use Host mode to investigate certain aspects and conditions on the qbus Practice using Host mode to gain proficiency with this system Numerous routines allow the operator to enter command lines and interrogate the surface system and when connected the downhole system Following are a couple of methods used to call up the command line 46 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Typed Displayed Purpose Command Line VV 4 Inquiry to all nodes 05 05 Inquiry to node 05 Note Target any node with its speci
119. to be set 102 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 17 Click 4 will open the following window Receiver Controls Warning Flags Battery Flag _ Setto 5 Gravity Flag PTG Set to Dip Angle Flag PTfs Set to Flow Flag PmpT _ Setto Magnetic Field Flag wk tealto v Temperature Flag DAD Set to MDec Set to 154 dn Auto Pulse Threshold Diaitize On Revr Ver 1 40 Sync On Demand Filter Level Temperature Unit Fahr 1 v Close You can change some parameters in the left half to control the receiver behavior The right half side shows the various flags IncT can only be changed when you program the tools IncT is an indicator where Inclination Threshold is set in tool configuration program You cannot change it in receiver software here Digitize On is used to turn on the pressure waveform record function It is automatically turned off when your harddisk is less than 1G We do NOT recommend changing the Filter Level The Receiver will automatically set it to 1 If the noise is too strong and or the decoded data is often incorrect you can increase the Filter Level one by one Do not jump the Filter level more than 1 level at a time 103 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 18 open the following window m Data Display Recent Data Save Current Data Time Conf Am
120. top end of the tool ensures that the Directional Sensor package is always correctly oriented with the GRT sensors Since the GRT is a laterolog type tool it will not give accurate results in oil based muds if there is a significant amount of emulsion breakdown However in high resistivity formations operation at reduced accuracy is still possible Laterolog tools excel in very high resistivity formations where it may be necessary to distinguish between oil and fresh water An example is the heavy oil Orinoco Basin of Venezuela where the wave propagation tools have been found unusable Another example is in fresh water injection well situations such as in Saudi Arabia Wave propagation tools are not accurate in resistivities above about 200 ohm meters The GRT has another advantage over other directional types of resistivity tools As the graph below indicates the detection distance for an adjacent contrasting rock formation is dependant only on resistivity contrast and not on the actual resistivities Detection distance is constant for a wide range of resistivities GEN Il RESISTIVITY TOOL Introduction The Gen resistivity tool uses low frequency waves that permeate into the formation As they travel into the formation the amplitude of the wave is attenuated The amplitude of the received wave corresponds how resistive the formation is The amount of current required to generate this wave between the transmitter and receiver is also m
121. will automatically close If the progress bar is still displayed after a minute check the Ethernet connections e f you still are having problems connecting refer to the help html which can be accessed from the start menu under the Bench Tree Group folder Once you are successfully connected the status bar at the bottom of the window will display information about the received data If it displays Receiving data then everything is connected properly and you are ready to start using the program WARNING Do not allow the computer to hibernate while this program is running The program cannot communicate during this state and will not record data Please shut down the program before closing the lid of a laptop to ensure proper functionality 5 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software PROGRAM LAYOUT T BIR Interface File Setting 7 dow Help Compas 3 ise Decoded Data D 09 53 05 ETT E 2 Vim H 1 i100 49 On 00 06 13 09 48 90 42 64 oer Off 00 00 24 149 171 07 75 Pune 49 56 33 2 49 DipA 56 33 Total On 01 04 39 SR 49 53 Grav 1 0007 0 5406 6 5017 MagF 0 5406 Warning Flags 50 off 99 50 21 Bat2 On Off 33 BatV 27 58 90 50 BatV 27 58 Batz 50 51 90 2 F 3 50 51 Tempe 90 F True False ty 554 5257 gTFA 106 88 OO 51 09 gTFA 106 88 51 21 gTFA 106 88 OOpDipw 33 gTFA 106 88 OO crew 51 45 gTFA 106 88 OO
122. wires in their channel while applying the tape 7 10 26 Apply 1 wraps of 77 wide Kapton tape around the entry groove 7 10 27 Remove the shipping nut and washer from the solenoid shaft and discard 7 10 28 Apply silicone lubricant to the solenoid spring shaft washer to hold it in position while installing the solenoid 7 10 29 Install the lubricant side of the washer against the solenoid clapper 7 10 30 Clean the threads of the solenoid shaft with isopropyl alcohol 7 10 31 Apply a dot of Loctite 243 on the solenoid shaft threads 7 10 32 Insert a narrow flat blade screwdriver in the plunger hole in the solenoid retainer 299 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 10 33 Match the solenoid wide leg to the wide slot of the housing socket Note Be careful to hold the clapper against the solenoid until the assembly is in place 7 10 34 Support the weight of the solenoid and lower the solenoid shaft into the solenoid retainer 7 10 35 Rotate the screwdriver clockwise until you feel the solenoid shaft threads engage 7 10 36 Raise the solenoid assembly and insert a punch above the clapper into the hole in the solenoid shaft 7 10 37 At the engagement use the punch to tighten the assembly 7 10 38 Apply a dot of Loctite 243 on the threads of the 3 coil housing screws type 6 32 PHL 3 8 FLT 292 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 10 39 Install the 3 screws 34 of the way into the
123. x 300120 300140 900142 Yard Cable 350 100m 5C Remote Display Pressure Cable EM Receiver Transducer Y Cable Black Node 18 55 NOTE OF RD G GRAPHIC PANEL ACTIVE WITH THIS CONFIGURATION 900142 Cable EM Recerver Transducer LN to RD G 19 65 s 0 25 i 1 900120 Yard Cable 350 100m 5C NOTE BACKLIGHT OF RD G GRAPHIC PANEL NOT ACTIVE WITH THIS CONFIGURATION 37 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software DRAWING 1 STANDARD 5 CONDUCTOR CONFIGURATION 300121 300142 Yard Cable 900141 Cable EM Receiver Transducer 350 100m 8C Y Cable RD G to 13 55 Yellow Band Marking Blue Node 300142 Cable EM Receiver Transducer to RD G 19P 6S 2 300124 Yard Cable 350 100m 8 Yellow Band Marking 22 tt Qs NN NSA N N DRAWING 2 BACKLIGHT CONFIGURATION 8 CONDUCTOR CABLE 38 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software qW32 Server qTalk Procedures GE Power Systems qW32 qTalk Procedures System Utilities Tensor MWD GE Power Systems 1840 Roysten Lane Technica Rock Texas 78664 912 252 6130 Version 3 00 July 2003 This document is an unpublished work Copyright 2003 Revised GE Power Systems All rights reserved This document and all information and expressions contained herein are the property of GE Power Systems and are provided to the recipient in c
124. y axis represent the measured value ranges for that direction type The x axis labels represent the tool face angle There are vertical markers on the graph for every 45 degree tool face segment which corresponds to the positions the roll test data shots are taken at 35 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Sensor Derived Data Sensor Acquired Data 180 North 0 8423 gnetic Field erometer Y 0 7750 Magnetic Toolface Accelerometer 2 0 0302 Dip Magnetometer X 0 1099 Azimuth Magnetometer Y 0 4170 High Side Magnetometer 2 0 0025 Inclination Battery 17 78 Gamma Temperature 50 Header Information perator Name Testing Operator Site Location Bench Tree Site Data Sets Acquired 0 Nearest City Georgetown Stable Tool Serial Number 2004 State Province Texas Azimuth Tool Bias Multiplier 1 0 Zip Postal Code 78717 0 South High Side Inclination Created 2006 06 29 16 35 34 Country USA User Instructions otes uisition has started Use the acquire and skip buttons to procede through the different ntations Skip Main Window Menus Compass Window Tool Sensor Derived Data Tool Sensor Acquired Data Test Header Information User Instructions Acquisition Control Buttons User Notes 36 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software APPENDIX V a PP 2 LRL NIIP 74 ES JU khe 477 uo
125. 0 1051 6 3A 30 3154 7 10 1153 7 30 3460 714 10 1221 7 30 3662 734 10 1411 734 30 4232 8 10 1533 8 30 4600 9 10 1998 9 30 5994 9 15 10 2251 9 1 30 6753 10 10 2518 10 30 7553 55 Chapter 5 Operations Manual Good Drill Pipe Collar Handling Practices MWD operators should observe some of the practices on the rig when tripping Not following the practices listed below can alert operators that there may be problems down the road due to lax handling practices Initial Make up Proper initial make up is probably the most important factor affecting the life of the tool joint connections Here are some recommendations to follow 1 Proper make up torque is determined by the connection type size OD and ID and may be found in torque tables 2 Make up connections slowly preferably using chain tongs High speed Kelly spinners or the spinning chain used on initial make up can cause galling of the threads 3 Tong them up to the predetermined torque using a properly working calibrated torque gauge to measure the required line pull 4 Breakout clean visually inspect redope and repeat 1 3 Always use the backup tongs to make and break connections 5 Stagger breaks on each trip so that each connection can be checked redoped and made up every second or third trip depending on the length of drill pipe and size rig Drill pipe deserves good surface handling equipment and tools Ch
126. 00 rnc 10 0 azn 90 0 Surveys from the database are 1 0 0 90 0 automatically inserted in the other data section of the LAS file Rate Vunetration The curve data section of the LAS file Null data is defined as 9999 0 in the well information block above 5 Data Editor The Data Editor application allows for advanced editing of your log files and job information It tightly integrates the editing of all logs Gamma ROP WOB Temperature as well as job company information and directional surveys The Data Editor also allows the user to generate survey reports directly from the editor 5 1 Start Page The Data Editor has an interface which is broken down into tabs which separate the data types being edited When the application is first opened you are typically greeted by the Start Page This page simply allows you to choose the database file you wish to edit Data Editor Stat Page Loginisimstion Sureejz GammaLog ROPAVOB Temperature Survey Digital Drilling Data Systems LL 41 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 5 2 Log Information The Log Information tab allows you to edit information such as tie in company and job information E Date Editor Hep Stat Page Logiriomshon Gamma Log Survey Repat Edit company information here Company Iro
127. 1072 19 25 05 17 26 01 14 09 107 2 19 35 00 12711 91 14 09 1072 19 00 16 57 01 14 09 1072 19 25 05 16 45 01 14 09 1074 19 25 00 16 28 01 14 09 1072 19 gt 1 105 161401 14 09 1872 19 05 15 59 01 14 09 1872 19 06 1645 01 14 09 1874 19 05 15 31 01 14 09 1872 19 06 1616 01 14 09 1872 19 05 15 02 01 14 09 1872 112 05 14 47 01 14 09 1872 19 05 14 33 01 14 09 227 109 05 14 25 01 14 09 ow 102 05 1422 01 14 09 1872 19 ViRRRRRS SSS 13 displays the current received data with its confidence number also known as reliability When the area is RED it means that KDT Receiver is searching for synchronization When the receiver is synced its color will change to GREEN 14 When receiver receives survey data a Survey Depth Input dialog box pops up The depth you input into the box will be saved in the file and can be reloaded and viewed later If you don t need it please check Never ask again 101 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Survey Depth Input Enter Total Depth M ES 5 6 g Clear Never Ask Again Cancel Enter 15 window will display the warning message 16 e enables and disables the Automatic Pulse Threshold function When Automatic Pulse Threshold is enabled the receiver will run automatically LoPL and HiPL do not need
128. 2 133 134 135 136 137 150 DIRECTIONAL MODULE ASSEMBLY 1 MAINTENANCE 151 2 DISASSEMBLY INSPECTION amp REASSEMBLY 152 154 3 RING OUT SHEET 155 158 4 BOM BILL OF MATERIAL COMPASS 159 160 5 BOM BILL OF MATERIAL SOC 161 162 F CENTRALIZERS 1 ASSEMBLY DRAWING BOW SPRING 164 2 BOM BILL OF MATERIALS 165 3 ASSEMBLY DRAWING RUBBER FIN 166 4 BOM BILL OF MATERIALS 167 5 ASSEMBLY DRAWING COMPASS ROTARY 168 6 ASSEMBLY DRAWING CLAMP ON AIR DRILLING 169 G SPEARPOINT 201925 1 ASSEMBLY DRAWING 169 2 BOM BILL OF MATERIALS 170 H MWD PULSER SETUP amp TOOL PARAMETERS 1 MWD PULSER SETUP amp PARAMETERS 171 178 2 POPPET ORFICE TABLE 179 189 3 MWD SURFACE GEAR SETUP DIAGRAM 190 4 DEPTH TRACKING SENSOR HOOKUP SEE DIGIDRIL 191 194 5 SURFACE SYSTEM CABLING DIAGRAM SEE DIGIDRIL 195 6 CABLING DIAGRAM W DEPTH TRACKING SEE DIGIDRIL 196 GAMMA MODULE 201950 1 GAMMA MODULE ASSEMBLY PROCEDURES 197 202 2 BOM BILL OF MATERIALS 203 3 FOCUSED 204 212 A ASSEMBLY DRAWING B BOM BILL OF MATERIALS C CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE UBHO SUBS 213 214 2 MSSLEEVES 215 3 GAP SUBS 216 CHAPTER 5 OPERATIONS MANUAL A MUD PULSE 1 19 1 MECHANICAL amp SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING amp TROUBLESHOOTING B EM 20 44 1 MECHANICAL amp SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING amp TROUBLESHOOTING C MWD Tool Pickup And Lay Down Procedures amp Torque Guide 45 56 CHAPTER 6 RESISTIVITY GRT CHAPTER 7 PRESSURE WHILE DRILLING CHAPTE
129. 217 O Ring Viton AS 218 Common MWD AS 218 O Ring Viton AS 220 Common MWD AS 220 O Ring Viton SC 013 Common MWD Screw 6 32 x 1 2 SHCS SS SC 014 Common MWD Screw 6 32 x 3 4 SHCS SS SC 015 Common MWD Screw 4 40 x 1 4 SHCS SS SC 031 Common MWD Screw 2 56 x 1 4 Phil Flat 133 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Quantity 2 00 1 00 1 00 2 00 1 00 1 00 2 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 2 00 2 00 4 00 2 00 4 00 4 00 4 00 4 00 2 00 Battery Module Tensor Asset Part Number Size Product Line Description 201675 Common MWD Battery Housing Module Serialized Part Part Number Size Non Serialized Part Part Product Number Size Line 201509 1 7 8 MWD 201514 1 7 8 MWD 201635 1 7 8 MWD 201650 1 7 8 MWD 201845 1 7 8 MWD 201505 Common MWD 201506 Common MWD 201521 Common MWD 201617 Common MWD 201645 Common MWD 201991 Common MWD AS 011 Common MWD AS 016 Common MWD AS 124 Common MWD 5 127 MWD AS 217 Common MWD AS 218 Common MWD AS 220 Common MWD 013 MWD SC 014 Common MWD Product Line 2016755 MWD Description Battery Housing Module Description Housing Interconnect Intermodule End Battery Barrel Housing Housing Battery Vent Plug Thread Protector Male Bulkhead Retainer Top 90 Degree Split Shell Bulkhead Retainer Bottom 45 Degree Snubber Assembly Battery Battery Vent Plug Pigtail Battery AS 011 O Ring
130. 30 seconds and the timer is finished an electromagnetic signal is emitted every twelve seconds At each of these burst 1024 samples of the received voltage are read and 1024 samples of the transmitted current are read These values are then converted to numbers the directional module can understand and are broadcasted onto the communication line These values are then stored in the directional units memory and ready to be pulsed to surface Electromagnetic Current Flow Electric Field Lines Voltage measured 9 Chapter 6 Resistivity GRT CHAPTER 7 ANNULAR PRESSURE WHILE DRILLING VIBRATION MONITOR ANNULAR PRESSURE Annular pressure requires the Pressure Stinger and pressure Muleshoe sleeve The Muleshoe sleeve is seated into the UBHO Sub and is oriented to the high side of the mud motor Modified set screws with a ported hole in the middle are used to tighten up the Muleshoe sleeve to the UBHO Sub An alternate method is to use a UBHO Sub that is ported When setting the Muleshoe sleeve to the high side use solid set screws to lock the sleeve in place first Pick up tool string and seat the tool string in the collar Pull the BHA up to the UBHO Sub and replace the solid set screws with the ported set screws one at a time This will prevent any flow from coming back to surface if the ported set screws are used The Transducer is located inside the barrel above the helix end The Pressure Stinger
131. 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Table 6 Category B Survey Duration Comparison ime 60 sec TxDT Time Time Time VV arnings for Dip Angle Mag Field Temperature Battery Voltage Dynamic Toolface Gamma Update Rate Gamma Pts Foot Ft Hr ROP Gamma Pts Foot Ft ROP Note The data used in these examples was compiled from a Simulated Flow Lab Test Fixture The times presented may vary 3 5 seconds using the same configurations 185 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Table 7 O Rings O Rings in Numerical AS AFF E O ring AS 012 Viton eee ee eee a I l __ O ring AS 227 Viton 186 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Poppet Orifice Table 3 1 2 Tool String Measured Flow SPP Pulse Pulse Orifice Poppet Mud Mud Mud Solids Bit Hole Drill Collar Job County Comments Depth Rate i i Type Weight Vis TFA Size Pipe 0 ST Closed Area wo wo ux uk 1200 1006 ee w w 0 om 2 15 120 f u 278 255 sut e 6 2 sr 15 120 w f ux 278 aars simo vo 22 12 120 o ous 22 187 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Poppet Orifice Table 3 1 2 Tool String Measured Flow SPP Pulse Pulse Orifice Poppet Mud Mud Mud Soli
132. 4 Copy the contents of the qProg 11 Diskette by typing xcopy a v Installing qMWD 11TM 1 Insert the qMWD 11 Diskette into drive 2 Type a install a c lt Enter gt The files containing the programs for the transmitter processor receiver processor and the DRT processor will be stored in the directory qMWD These files will be needed to access required program files used by the three processors in the QDT MWD system Updating Embedded qMWDTM Firmware Programs GE Power Systems recommends that the firmware programs all qMWD hardware such as receivers displays and the down hole tool be upgraded to versions in effect with the qMWD 01 60 release Note Only qMPTx 2R program is V01 60a All other firmware programs are as released with the qMWD 11 V01 60 distributions and are identified as 01 60 in their application 1 0 strings To determine whether the qUWD equipment is loaded with the latest firmware use the Ver function to identify the firmware versions using the qTalk PC refer to Appendix in the qMWD manual Appendix P in the qMWD Engineer s Reference Manual provides complete instructions for programming the MC68HC11 based systems used the qMWD hardware The following information presumes an understanding of those programming procedures 65 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Note The qTalk PC and qProg 11 programs required to upgrade embedded firmware programs w
133. 4 658 1 60 1 090 800 1150 326 673 19 1 60 1 090 800 1150 326 673 1 50 1 040 ESH 850 1000 296 640 20 1 60 1 040 BRUSH 850 1000 296 640 Select flow range at least 100 gpm below and 100 gpm above the expected flow range that the system will be operating POPPET ORIFICE CONFIGURATIONS FLOW TFA 181 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Software Parameters That Affect System Operation Data Word Update Times Pulse Durations Real time Data Word Updates are dependent upon Pulse Length and the Number of Bits per Word The following chart of Empirical Data indicates the time required for Data Word updates for three different word lengths per pulse length The resolution of the Data Word value transmitted is dependent on the number of bits per Word Observe that as the pulse width lengthens the data bits per word become extremely important A decision to sacrifice resolution for a faster update is crucial and the course of action must be determined Obviously a 12 bit word is almost twice as long as a 6 bit word but a 12 bit word is NOT twice as accurate as a 6 bit word For example the resolutions for each of the different length Toolface data words are i 12 bits 0 12 ii 8 bits 1 5 iii 6 bits 5 5 The accuracy is dependent on the values of the least significant bits This dependency will somewhat affect the accuracy of the gTFA measurements but not as adversely
134. 4 8330 20518 58 00 100164 4845786 000 71202008 1 58 11158 93 90 264 88 59 50 1001 28 48305 90 0 00 7 20 2006 1 58 11197 8420 26408 5380 100272 4029508 000 7 20 2006 1 58 11218 8210 26458 5950 4846465 000 272002006 1 58 11251 92 40 264 76 59 40 1000 48403 72 0 00 58 11202 8260 26468 590 996 91 4040002 000 131 8320 26486 5950 88728 484840 000 11348 0330 26488 _ 5280 100088 4845038 000 1137 8200 26538 5944 95985 4043322 040 11441 8220 26546 5940 100130 4844398 000 93 00 265 78 59 50 1001 01 48284 71 142 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 0 00 5 3 1 Adding a new survey In order to add a new survey simply right click anywhere on the grid When the context menu appears select Add Survey This will bring up the following dialog EIE AddSurveyForm Simply enter the depth inclination and azimuth you wish to use for the survey and the new survey will be calculated 5 3 2 Deleting a survey E Date Edite Imdina 82 70 910 91 20 91 90 92 60 93 10 91 70 8210 32 90 93 30 83 80 9420 9210 Surveys be deleted by selectin 1000 99 1001 54 1001 86 1002 72 999 01 1000 64 396 81 997 28 1000 88 999 95 1001 30 1001 01 HTotal 49406 27 4845117 48303 66 49403 37 48450 90 48381 79 48338 67 49401 21 48481 03 48467 49305 80 48286 66 48484 85 48403 72 49480 02 4848407 49459 35 49433 23 48443 36 T rmperatur
135. 47172 4600 11471 94 4300 1147215 4800 4300 4600 Relocate Selection This will bring up the Relocate Selection dialog You only need to fill out the relocation offset field This allows you to specify how much and what direction to relocate the log For example to relocate the selection down 100 feet simply enter 100 To move it up 100 feet simply enter 100 When you are done press Ok Relocate Section Stait Selection 14692 ____ End Selection 14698 Offset By 4 04 Offsets are amounts to add or subtract from the entre ex 30 or 30 147 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 148 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 149 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software CHAPTER 4 MWD MAINTENANCE MANUAL A NOTES ON ASSEMBLY B PULSER SOLENOID STYLE HOT HOLE C PULSER STEPPER MOTOR STYLE D STEPPER UPGRADE E BATTERY PACK ASSEMBLY F DIRECTIONAL MODULE ASSEMBLY G CENTRALIZERS H SPEARPOINT MWD PULSER SETUP amp TOOL PARAMETERS J GAMMA MODULE K SUBS SECTION NOTES ASSEMBLY 1 NOTES ON ASSEMBLY PROCEDURES NOTES ON ASSEMBLY PROCEDURES All O rings must be made of Viton 70 90 durometer Shore A Other softer elastomers such as Neoprene will deteriorate rapidly swell and extrude under extreme pressures and temperatures Extreme care should be taken when installing O rings to avoid over stretching a
136. 5 4 Record readings on a blank ring out sheet 5 Compare readings to ring out sheet example Resistance readings may vary slightly fromthe example but Opens should be open as a variance here would indicate a leak short 6 If there is any extreme variances tool should not be run until the cause is determined and remedied NOTE There is a protection circuit transorbs in the electronics to protect fromover voltage a blown diode in this circuit would be evident by showing an Open instead of 0 1 Ohms during the 1 1 2 2 3 3 etc checks 7 Perform a Roll test following instructions in the Roll Test Section 150 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual E DIRECTIONAL MODULE ASSEMBLY E 1 MAINTENANCE Directional Module Maintenance Procedures The Directional Module contains the Orientation Module OM the Data Acquisition Assembly DAQ and the Electronics Strongback which contains the Triple Power Supply 3xPS the Microprocessor MPTx These three units are assembled together to make the Directional Module The OM contains the accelerometer and magnetometer sensor packages used to gather the required directional measurements used to derive the survey and toolface data necessary to drill a well Many other forms of data can be derived from this data and from the sensors contained within the OM The DAQ is an analog to digital converter It is also an integral part of the package and must remain mated with the matc
137. ALS Common personal protective equipment and material that should be available in the event of a lithium thionyl chloride battery being involved in an incident such as a crush puncture or fire is as follows Y Rubber Gloves Fisher Scientific 11 394 23A or equal Rubber Boots Uniroyal Steel Shank Rubber Boot or equal Respirator MSA 4571000 AI Front Mounted Gas Mask Acid Gasses and Carrying Case 84494 Acid Gas Canister or equal Lab Apron Lab Safety Supply R3003 or equal Neutralization Materials 10 16 Industrial Grade Sodium Bicarbonate LITHIUM BATTERY SAFETY MANUAL APPENDIX HANDLING OF LITHIUM THIONYL CHLORIDE BATTERIES UNDER ABNORMAL CONDITIONS The following paragraphs will discuss the safe handling of Lithium Thionyl Chloride LTC batteries under the abnormal hazardous conditions of Leaking or venting batteries Hot batteries Exploding batteries Lithium fires YYYY Personnel Protective Equipment Required e Safety Glasses Rubber Gloves Helmet with full face shield Flak Jacket with gloves Riot Shield Respirator with canisters for Acid Gases or full face respirator with acid gas cartridges Other Equipment Required e Infrared Temperature Probe Sodium Carbonate Soda Lime or Sodium Bicarbonate Baking Soda Vermiculite Fire Extinguisher containing Lith X Graphite powder extended Non conductive pliers or tongs Thermal resistant gloves welding gloves 140 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual
138. Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual PROCEDURE FOR LITHIUM FIRE Evacuate the premises Personnel should avoid breathing the smoke from a lithium fire as it may be corrosive Trained personnel wearing self contained breathing apparatus or a respirator with acid gas cartridges should use Lith X fire extinguishers to fight the fire When the fire is extinguished and the residue cooled it can be absorbed with Sodium Carbonate and placed in plastic bags All bags should be placed in a sealed and labelled drum with Vermiculite or other non flammable cushioning material such as sand or Sodium Carbonate to cushion the s These materials should be disposed as previously described under Safe Disposal in the Lithium Battery Safety Manual LITHIUM BATTERY SAFETY With proper use and handling lithium batteries have demonstrated an extensive safety record The success and wide use of lithium batteries is partially because they contain more energy per unit weight than conventional batteries However the same properties which result in a high energy density also contribute to potential hazards if the energy is released at a fast and uncontrolled rate In recognition of the high energy content of lithium systems safety has been incorporated into the design and manufacture of all batteries However abuse or mishandling of lithium batteries can still result in hazardous conditions The information provided here is intended to give users some guidelines to sa
139. Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual vLOO uuo wWistz red 80785 10p0203 HOd 1615 2 05 94 Bururejuo AMIN 943 10 6 INO Bury 19995 90S 158 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 51 00 wyo gt 2 2 wyo INL lt 2 b wyo lt 6 uno 8 IL lt uva 2 wyo lt 9 wyo wL lt yya s wyo lt wyo Wresva c uuo WisHvgS z uuo WLeNvg r 980785 Nd ourojy 49p40203J GINS M 3104 5 5 S4 2 AMIN 941 10 19945 Bury jeeus 252 159 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 4 BOM COMPASS BOM Directional Module Tensor Compass Asset Part Number Size Product Line 502001 1 7 8 MWD Serialized Part Part Number Size Product Line 5020015 1 7 8 MWD 502005 Common MWD 502006 Common MWD 502010 Common MWD Non Serialized Part Part Number Size Product Line 201509 1 7 8 MWD 201514 1 7 8 MWD 201725 1 7 8 MWD 201845 1 7 8 MWD 120001 Common MWD 120002 Common MWD 201505 Common MWD 201506 Common MWD 201521 Common MWD 201709 Common MWD 201957 Common MWD 201959 Common MWD 201993 Common MWD AS 124 Common MWD AS 127 Common MWD AS 217 Common MWD AS 218 Common MWD Description Directional Mo
140. Chapter 5 Operations Manual Attach the second Intermodule Connector to the DOWNhole end of the Directional Module Insure that the threaded ring connection is snug and NOT over torqued Note 6 PINS point UPhole and 4 PINS point DOWNhole Attach the Intermod Conn and the Directional Module to the uphole end of the Gamma Module Insure that the threaded ring connection is snug and NOT over torqued Note 6 PINS point UPhole and 4 PINS point DOWNhole Record the Serial Number of the Number 2 Battery Module and Battery selected SN Attach the third Intermod Conn to the DOWNhole End of the Number 2 Battery Module Insure that the threaded ring connection is snug and NOT over torqued Note 6 PINS point UPhole and 4 PINS point DOWNhole SECURE the VENT PLUGS on the Battery Number 2 Module Attach the Number 2 Battery Module and 3 Intermod Conn to the Uphole end of the Survey Electronics Insure that the threaded ring connection is snug and NOT over torqued Note 6 PINS point UPhole and 4 PINS point DOWNhole Record the Serial Number of the Number 1 Battery Module and Battery selected SN Attach the fourth Attach the second Intermodule Connector to the DOWNhole end of the Directional Module Insure that the threaded ring connection is snug and NOT over torqued Note 6 PINS point UPhole and 4 PINS point DOWNhole to the DOWNhole End of the Number 1 Battery Module Insure that the threaded ring connection is snug an
141. ConfigLoc dat file is point to the file If you use KeyDrill s configuration software all these procedures are automatically set Please remember to uncheck the hide the extension from the known files types in the following figure It is located in the Tools menu of File Explorer so that you can see the file extension mwd Folder Options General View File Types Offline Files Folder views You can apply the view such as Details or Tiles that you are using for this folder to all folders Apply to All Folders Reset All Folders Advanced settings v Automatically search for network folders and printers Display file size information in folder tips Display simple folder view in Explorer s Folders list Display the contents of system folders Display the full path in the address bar Display the full path in the title bar Do not cache thumbnails Hidden files and folders Do not show hidden files and folders Show hidden files and folders Hide extensions for known file types Hide protected operating system files Recommended e Restore Defaults 7 Start KDT receiver software by double clicking the icon If you start the job for the first time after configuring a tool the following window will appear Click Yes to continue 97 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software PPM Receiver KeyDrill Technology LLC If this is a new job please rename the old job data in C Program File
142. DS sheets 1 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual GE Power Systems only recommends 0 025 to 0 030 diameter annealed stainless steel lock wire for use in attaching and sealing the compensation membrane and the bellows The lock wire tie wire is an expendable spare part and not designed for reuse GE Power Systems does not recommend reusing elastomers for module rebuild after the Tensor MWD tool has been exposed to the downhole environment GE Power Systems recommends lubricating all threaded parts and O rings with a light coat of Dow Corning Compound 4 This compound is compatible with drilling fluids and temperatures to 400 F 204 C Apply Loctite 243 dried to a paste and hand tighten all screws with the proper screwdriver All pressure barrels and housings should be torqued using Petol Gearench or Parmalee wrenches fitted with 1 7 8 jaws Torque to a range of 65 to 100 ft lbs It is advised to use Loctite 243 on the two threaded connections below the screen housing of the pulser 2 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual SECTION A 2 O RING LIST BOM BOM Battery Module Standard Asset Part Number Size Product Line Description 201675 Common MWD Battery Housing Module Serialized Part Part Number Size Product Line Description 201675S Common MWD Battery Housing Module Non Serialized Part Part Product Number Size Line Description 201509 1 7 8 MWD Housing Interconnect 201514 1 7 8 MWD Inter
143. INC ang reruns MULESHOE MEDIUM 1 5584 ASSEMBLY DOES NOT INCLUDE ITEM 12 MAIN ORIFICE 201832 SCALE 1 1 201832 SHEET 1021 MULE SHOE and LANDING SUBS 1 4 UBHO SUBS 213 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual NOTES 1 DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED gt ALL ORING SURFACES 63 2435 the DIA 1550 DIA DETAIL DETAIL A xt 923 CORRECTED RAW MATERIAL boy 12 1 94 12 1 98 631 INITIAL RELEASE UD 4 29 94 SV 4 29 94 5 9 94 MT Cl ewe E WEE 00 TUR 7 080 0 NUMBER 8981 ef s E IN 018 TYP D 4 IPTION AUSTIN TEXAS U S A 08 BOTTOM SLEEVE OR TYP XX 015 XX i05 WEM REUROENS RV 1 1 2 AMPCDSS gt A sous o2 35 BAR 35 DIA 1 4 3 2 214 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual l 5 MS SLEEVES AN wuesse AZZEMBLY DOES WOT INCLUOG ITEM 12 MAIN ORIFICE SECTION es PT 1 2 zr s p eem pes inue cenam gi cd im 28GONITT 1 21100042 St geg wil TE 1 1 pesca 2500208 215 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual l 6 GAP SUBS PIN THREAD THREAD SECTION S
144. L LI a 22 2 e AE x 7474 7444 Ld am Hi ici Pe i e 4 a SSS 2 me 91207 3 27 22 ATE za n dU EPA PPP ME Cr eee 5 Saleneid Released CPoppet 14 The next step is to adjust the gap between the Servo Orifice and the Servo Poppet The best way to do this is to insert the appropriate size of Ball Driver 0 100 0 110 between the Clapper and the Solenoid body and then screw the Servo Poppet Assembly down until the Ball Driver is held tight between the Clapper and the Solenoid body Step 15 Once the gap has been set the screws should be tightened to maintain the setting The next step would be to remove each of the screws in the Servo Poppet Assembly one at a time put Loctite on them re install them and tighten well At this point the connections on the Bebro should be checked using your Multimeter Instructions on doing this inspection or quality control check are in the next section Step 16 With the Pulser in the upright position insert the Male Bebro into the top of the Solenoid It has to be aligned so that the slot in the housing of the Male Bebro matches the Dowel Pin In order to avoid damage to the wires the three wires should be pulled out of one of the holes in the side of the Solenoid With the wires pulled out the Bebro should seat well and the Retaining Ring can be installed holding every
145. MOTE TERM NAL TO TRANSMI TER A 20MA COPYRIGHT C 1994 QUANTUM SOLUTDNS NC ALL RESERVED 209 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual PROGRAMM NC LL REHTS RESERVED 994 QUANTUM SOLUTDNS NC CABLE REMOTE TERM AL SUPPLY BOX TO DOW NEOLR TOO CABLE REMOTE TERM NAL SUPPLY BOX TO 210 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 50 1 FEET SEENOTE4 5 1 1 0 0 1 FEET 6 2 PLACES SEE NOTE 3 1 SEE NOTE 1 8 CONNECTS TO SENSOR CABLE EXTENSION PIN FUNCTION FUNCTION 1 FUNCTION 2 FUNCTION 3 1 0 0 1 FEET FUNCTION 4 NOT USED SEE NOTE 1 NOTES 1 KPTCONNECTOR SHELL IS TO BE ELECTRICALLY ISOLATED FROM THE CABLE SHIELD 2 SHIELD TO BE TERMINATED TO PIN D AT BOTH ENDS 3 MARK WRAP LABEL WITH JUNCTION BOX TO SENSOR 100527 01 4 INSTALL CAPS ITEM 4 AND 5 USING ITEM 8 BOTH ENDS COPYRIGHT C 1995 QUANTUM SOLUTIONS INC ALL RIGHTS RESERVED A INITIAL RELEASE GENS HSM CONNECTS TO SENSOR PIN FUNCTION FUNCTION 1 FUNCTION 2 FUNCTION 3 FUNCTION 4 NOT USED QUANTUM SOLLITIONS INC SANTA CLARA CALIFORNIA CABLE ASSEMBLY FIELD SENSOR 211 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual a CONNECTOR TYPE KPTO6F14 5P CONNECTOR PIN A NO CONNECTION CONNECTOR PIN SENSOR SUPPLY C
146. Maintenance Manual Table 1 Battery Duration Chart Standard Tool Pulse Width Configuration Duration in Hours Factor 150 150 PV 120 120 97 100 10 2 O80 A 80 ___ Pulse Width Samma w One Battery Factor Duration in Hours Gamma w Two Batteries Factor 175 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual TOOL CONFIGURATIONS gna aous qng Buipue au uo sjog UO geua ug 24 3203331 19540 3531 Uo RESNI uo pajeoipui 500 509 oj 911209 0 woy sa2ugisip yg o1 26 SOS ainseayy suonisodajnpou BuruiuJsje p usu 810328 2410 pue asusa azu jepisuo2 151 5 95 suondos e suonisod SINPOWJO 25941 0422402 au PINUS 2762 90019900 puas 0 2518 51230409 625126 0290007 adwn ayl 7 SAvACIV srapmpopy apo LIEG SAV OW 51 euo goaa MOTIE 4291 apo eut 2 uonisod 105181 acus uore201 pog o 1 5049297 di peddog WE yoo suswanssaw pg 5 25 SHWE JO 0018201 05 86 savans q OW vaum asn 7901 2104 seog 0 Jaduune 23196 EIT TST sueuensseu zousa ppg 23 0545 e ung
147. ONNECTOR PIN C SENSOR RETURN CONNECTOR PIN D SHIELD CONNECTOR PIN E NO CONNECTION CONNECTOR TYPE KPTO6F12 3P CONNECTOR PIN A CONNECTOR PIN B CONNECTOR PIN C 1 ITEM NUMBERS REFER TO ITEM NUMBERS IN THE ASSOCIATED PARTS LIST PL 100551 01 2 SHIELD TO BE TERMINATED TO PIN D ON LEFT END CONNECTOR 3 MARK WRAP LABEL WITH SENSOR XOVER 100551 01 4 INSTALL CAPS ITEM 4 AND 5 USING ITEM 7 BOTH ENDS COPYRIGHT C 1996 QUANTUM SOLUTIONS INC ALL RIGHTS RESERVED SENSOR SUPPLY SENSOR SUPPLY NO CONNECTION OVALS CONTRACT NO AS MJANE HSM QUANTUM SOLUTIONS INC SANTA CLARA CALIFORNIA CABLE ASSEMBLY CROSSOVER 212 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual T crees 1 406181 5 BODY W REVERSE HELIX MEDIUM 201372 KEY MULESHOE MEDIUM 3 201827 SLEEVE INSERT MULESHOE Ls jeancur 8 s 201828 RETAINING RING 200 6 201829 RETAINING RING 244 7 55 55 SCREW SET CUP 174 20 X 0 25 55 s 565 522 PIN SPRING COILED 5 32 X I 557 9 8516 AS 233 124 20064 1 28 MAIN ORIFICE iz 2097 1 357 WAIN ORIFICE ize 201066 1 40 MAIN ORIFICE iz 201051 1 50 MAIN ORIFICE 22e 20100 1 60 WAIN ORIFICE CONIISGNTIAL PROPRRT 25 COMPASS INC AND SMALL COPIGE REPRODUCED OR USED IN PART CO WRITTEN PERNESSION 22 COMPASS
148. Offset To Bit The distance of the survey sensors to the bit 2 2 2 3 Gamma Settings Background Counts The count rate of the gamma sensor without any gamma source applied See below Hot Counts The count rate of the gamma sensor with the calibration blanket wrapped around the tool See below Calibrator Rate count rate marked on the gamma blanket used for calibration See below Collar Attenuation Factor The calculated amount of gamma ray attenuation that the drill collar will introduce This factor may be calculated by pressing the Calculate button then entering the collar O D and 1 0 or the user may enter their own factor manually Gamma Offset To Bit The distance of the gamma ray sensor to the bit Data Smoothing The amount of smoothing that will be used to filter the gamma data sent from the tool 116 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 2 2 3 Gamma Calibration Proper gamma sensor calibration requires that a standard rate calibration source be used to scale the gamma data to units When a new database is created the parameters for the gamma calibration are adjusted so that there will not be any API calibration applied to the gamma data received from the tool If the user prefers to use a single factor for calibration then this parameter may be entered into the Collar Attenuation Factor If API calibration is desired then the following steps describe the
149. R 8 PEM TOOL Field Operations Manual PRELUDE The enclosed is a composite of materials designed for the users of MWD tools based on the Compass Platform or systems that are compatible including Tensor MWD now GE the existing GE 3 bay system and other various compatible Tensor MWD platforms Mud Pulse MWD complete with pulsers types solenoid stepper top mount Hot Hole Pressure Transmitting Tools EM MWD High amp tools High voltage tools Pressure Transmitting Tools Survey Monitoring MWD MWD accessories Resistivity Package Gamma Compass has incorporated material from various vendors as needed to ensure the ability to cover different and various tool configurations Field Operations Manual INTRODUCTION This manual was designed for users of MWD systems Presented on the Compass Directional Guidance Platform And With other various compatible Tensor MWD too Field Operations Manual 1 INTRODUCTION A COMPASS PLATFORM B OTHER ACCESSORIES 55 Compass has been working on the current platform since the first Tensor tools were being introduced back in 1996 During the earlier Tensor years the answer to problems was to make slight modifications tweek it After being acquired by several other companies and finally by General Electric all involved did not make any significant changes to the tool and became obvious that it became synonymous with good e
150. Ring Viton AS 220 Common MWD AS 220 O Ring Viton SC 020 Common MWD Roll Pin 5 32 x 1 420 SS Muleshoe Key 164 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Quantity 2 00 2 00 2 00 1 00 4 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 2 00 2 00 2 00 6 00 2 00 1 00 F 3 ASSEMBLY DRAWING RUBBER FIN 85 102 3113 85 102 301 13385 axe 13 438903 62 S3N0f A18W3SSY I123NNO2U3INI SSVdWOD sw 0112182530 V V 011235 035 313 OW N23 5310 165 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 4 BOM BOW SPRING BOM Kit Bow Spring EM Non Serialized Part Part Number 201753 201754 201759 301751 301785 384035 Size Common Common Common Common Common Common Product Line MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD Description Bumper Interconnect Spacer Spring Compression Blade EM Bow Spring Collar 2 Piece Bow Spring 4 Blade Connector DB9 Female 166 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Quantity 1 00 2 00 1 00 4 00 2 00 1 00 COMPASS 5 F ATEW3S5S 193NN02831NI 399108 INI SSVdWOD xsse 11 167 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 6 SLIPOVER CENTRALIZER PART NUMBER 601159 Side View Cross Section View G SPEARPOINT 201925 168 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual G
151. Rock 00 State Province TX 7 ZIP Postal Code 709327 Country JUSA Miscellaneous Notes None Note Always enter complete header information and descriptive notes This information helps you identify a test should you need to re open it Note MWDRoll32 completes the following three fields automatically Unique ID Number Tool Serial Number Start Data and Time 81 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Editing Test Data Unfortunately roll tests do not always work exactly as expected Bad data due to magnetic interference human misalignment or any other source could plague a roll test of a perfectly good tool This eventuality can be handled by flagging bad test data Starting the dialog 1 Open a Previous Roll Test by clicking the Data Sets item from the Edit menu The Edit Roll Test data window opens displaying a row for each data shot Each row lists several pieces of data under column headings M 120 050 0 6 2162 00 440 050 066 7211 992 0930 6 0 120 050 92 721180 0990 6 00 060 006 24 m 30 e om 150 Of 9046 9 908 120 90105040 2 9 9930 on 1890 040 066 7 9 9990 209 140 040 646 3 2 99 03 125 1 106 922 006 00106 92 4 040 086 21250 9 222056 040 06 231250 Data Column Description Units Shot The incremental number corresponding to the data shot Orientation The tool s orientation the data sh
152. Size Product Line Description 201504 1 7 8 MWD Threaded Rings 201517 1 7 8 MWD Thread Protector Female 201920 1 7 8 MWD Spear Point 201930 1 7 8 MWD Spearpoint Kit Rubber Fin 201159 Common MWD 13 Rubber Fin 201503 Common MWD Split Shear Rings AS 027 Common MWD AS 027 O Ring Viton AS 213 Common MWD AS 213 O Ring Viton AS 220 Common MWD AS 220 O Ring Viton T 15 Common MWD Blank Shaft 170 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Quantity 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 3 00 1 00 1 00 MWD PULSER SETUP amp TOOL PARAMETERS H 1 MWD PULSER SETUP amp PARAMETERS Pulser MWD Probe Operational Parameters When preparing the system for a job the field operator must choose several hardware and software parameters The well environment where the system will be used determines the choices This document names the parameters discusses some of the options and leaves other options to the MWD operator s discretion 1 Hardware Parameters a Drill Collar Size b MWD System Module Selection and Configuration c Signal Orifice Size Selection d Poppet End Size Selection 2 Software Parameters That Affect System Operation a Data Word Update Times Pulse Durations b Survey Data Selection for Transmission c Toolface Logging Data Selection for Transmission d Downlinking Capabilities All parameters hardware and software are synergistic changing one may affect another Therefore consider all settings befo
153. Tensor requirements ZZ ZZ 777 oe cin c Weill Wi ZA 2 TIN wae WI 187 772 0 up E 5 LL UII 02 AA 2 27722777 LLL 1040 po ss 110 02 ss FANSA 7 1 7 10 0 3 15 310 91 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 777722722774 T ili WA C5 Tii 445 CIN Li LI 2 22777777777 lg lA 2727277 72777722722 77 707277027025222224 gt LLL 228 WA yyy Ms MZ LN Ml 2777777 TIN 92 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 93 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software KEYDRILL MEYDRILE Operational Manual KDT MWD Mud Pulse Receiver For Window 2000 Window XP and Vista Revised February 16 2009 Manufactured By KeyDrill Technology LLC 831 Spring Mist CT Sugar Land TX 77479 Phone 281 253 2066 The Fifth Edition Copyright 22008 by KeyDrill Technology LLC All rights reserved No part of thi
154. The antenna is pounded into the ground at least 1 foot deep away from the rig in a moist undisturbed area Connect the antenna cable from the rod to the Receiver Important Clean a BOP bolt with a wire brush and file to ensure good contact with clamp make sure clamp is screwed down tight Use vice grips to clamp down wire if there is no spot on the BOP An alternate place for the antenna cable is on a close by well head 28 Chapter 5 Operations Manual CONFIGURING THE TOOL SET UP Connect the Power Supply cable Antenna cable BOP cable BNC BNC cable to the Oscilloscope Leave the Transducer pigtail cable unplugged until the tool is programmed Once the tool and SAI BTRC RT is programmed connect the Transducer pigtail cable from the SAI to the Fl Receiver At this point a base line pressure should appear on the QMWDPC software approx 450 psi The actual number will depend on what PTFS is set to GAIN SETTINGS The gain settings are used to amplify the signal located on the front of the Fl Receiver The gain can be set from 0 19 a good number to start with would be 6 Adjust the numbers by pressing the buttons until you get a peak voltage of approximately 5 volts on the scope Anything under 0 7V will not be detected by the software Use the Gain Adj dial to increase or decrease the gain by smaller increments When gaining the signal up and down adjust
155. The red line across the top indicates a velocity of 40 ft second Along the bottom of the chart is the scale for gallons per minute GPM from 0 GPM to 1200 GPM Along the top of the chart the red line indicates 40 feet second flow velocity At 40 feet second the critical flow rate water flow at that rate will begin to remove metal from the body of the MWD tool Add to the water solids and sand the velocity of the fluid will become more hazardous to the condition of the metal To use the chart select the ID size of the collar being used on the job and select the curve that most closely relates to the size Always select the next smaller size ID for calculations should the ID of the collar on the rig site not perfectly match the size on the chart Select the maximum flow rate expected for the job on the bottom scale and move up the chart until the line representing the ID size of the collar being used is intersected Move across to the left of the chart to the scale on the left to determine the expected fluid velocity for the job If the GPM selected intersects the curve above the 40 ft second line then adjustments must be made in either the selected flow or the ID of the drill collar Example Using a 3 0 ID collar with an expected flow of 500 GPM This would result in a 37 feet second flow velocity around the MWD tool Example Using a 2 5 ID collar with an expected flow of 450 GPM would result in a fluid velocity in excess of 65 feet
156. UA SIZE ITEM NO allem DESCRIPTION sus eus a 1 475026 601104 200011 crossover sus 2 47sozs 601103 800010 soLar ow sus 3 601132 601131 601099 ISOLATION RING 3 U2 a172 xu 6 578 RE sox mureno ISOLATION RING OD N A Assv 601005 601007 800007 Aassemev 1 1 1 TAES DOCUMENT AN INFRRRATEIN WITREN DD gE CORR 1252 TITLE E TR CRASS pory FILE Sud 22156 SHEET 10 1 216 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 217 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual CHAPTER 5 OPERATIONS MANUAL A MUD PULSE B EM C MWD Tool Pickup And Lay Down Procedures amp Torque Guide SECTION MUD PULSE A 1 MECHANICAL amp SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING amp TROUBLESHOOTING ARRIVING ON LOCATION Once on location introduce yourself to the company representative as soon as practical In addition notify the office once all of our company personnel have arrived or if someone is missing and the contact phone numbers at the site should be given to the coordinator The job is expected to be set up and equipment tested as soon as possible upon arrival Confirm hole size to be drilled and the services required Directional Gamma Conduct a quick inventory to determine if all of the required subs and tubulars are present Con
157. Wh lt 6 9 uu wies WYO Y 08 lt 8 9 xc 9 G WYO WYO 29 9 WYO 00 98 WYO fags UMOYS SHUIpedd uiu gt 10 ay lt 1 Pinoys 04 syUaUOdWOd 0 ULI 59202151599 uo SUBIS lt 9 gt OU 0 950 2 pua joHdn oj 10 99218 y pea 10 poy a4 j2euuoo 281102 19540 aq e Od WAG e esf 39 v WV IM srejeui 93993 SN LON 00 WYO wieuvare pey oy WYO lt 4 89 wav 80 0N wyevaro WYO wieuva c WYO WSL lt O bP WYO WYO 5 lt WYO 9 lt wyo gig y WYO WYO Weve WYO WOLE WYO wi eec WYO wiegt WYO lt WYO 459 WYO wiegt WYO lt t WYO Wie me lt WYO Wi gc mu wyo ENS pa 980785 Nd Aowa gig M Durg ay bururejuoo 94 10 19945 MO Bury 156 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual WYO gt WYO WI lt 01 6 WYO gt 6 6 pli uuo Wh lt 0b 8 WYO Wi 0i L uno Wi 01 9 62
158. a level equal to or above the top of the reservoir This process greatly facilitates removal of air from the system 4 Ideally the height of the system or the length of the Pulser line will be such that the Pulser can be rested in a horizontal position on ground supports of some kind 5 The system should also be designed such that the Pulser can be stood up in a corner both in the upright and inverted position If this is done it should also allow the Technician to bounce the Pulser on the Tapping Block on the floor 6 As mentioned a pressure system is not crucial to a good oil fill However do use air other systems have been rigged up with a simple foot pump others utilize a pump and some rely on strictly gravity 75 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Getting Started The steps involved in getting started once the system has been set up as outlined in the previous section are as follows 1 With all of the valves in the closed position start up the vacuum pump Once running open the valve for the vacuum line going from the pump up to the top of the bottle Your gauge should register about 24 28 PSI of vacuum This is dependent on your elevation Close the valve and shut off the pump 1 Hopefully your system will hold the desired PSI of vacuum If not try to locate the leak and tighten the connection as needed Sometimes these leaks are easier to locate when the system has oil in it 3 Filling the reservoir can be
159. aded into the collar 6 Chapter 5 Operations Manual Extended Duration Gamma Directional Select a level place on the ground and set out the jack stands or V blocks It is important that the assembly area be level to insure that the threads on the tool connections are not placed in a bind when they are assembled Extended Duration Gamma Directional Configuration Pulser 1 Intermodule Conn Gamma Module 27 Intermodule Conn Directional Module 31 Intermodule Conn Battery Number TWO Module 4 Intermodule Conn Battery Number ONE Module 5 Intermodule Conn Spear Point Assembly Job No MWD Run No MWD Operator Date PLACE IN FRONT OF EACH STEP AS IT IS COMPLETED TO INSURE THAT THE PROPER PROCEDURE IS FOLLOWED PRIOR TO EACH RUN IN THE HOLE Record the Serial Number of the Pulser selected SN Record the Serial Number of the Gamma Module 5 ______ Record the Serial Number of the 17 Intermodule Connector selected SN Attach the Intermod Conn to the DOWNhole end of the Gamma Module Insure that the threaded ring connection is snug and NOT over torqued Note 6 PINS point UPhole and 4 PINS point DOWNhole Attach the Intermod Conn and Gamma Module assembly to the Uphole end of the Pulser module Insure that the threaded ring connection is snug and NOT over torqued Note 6 PINS point UPhole and 4 PINS point DOWNhole Record the serial number of the Survey Electronics selected SN E
160. afety personnel to identify and eliminate potential sources of electrical and physical damage to the batteries Conditions that can short circuit recharge over discharge puncture crush or overheat the batteries must be avoided and all personnel involved in the handling should be properly trained Testing Physical dimensioning should be performed with all plastic callipers and no electrical tests other than open circuit voltage checks should be performed without first consulting the battery manufacturer Short circuit and load tests can degrade battery performance If batteries are to be tested at elevated temperatures the test chambers must have over temperature protection Note Abuse testing should not be performed without first consulting the battery manufacturer 137 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual SAFE TRANSPORTATION All lithium thionyl chloride batteries with a lithium content of greater than 0 5 grams are restricted and they are subject to DOT 49 CFR 172 101 and International Air Transport Association IATA shipping regulations Those batteries that contain less than 0 5 grams of lithium are unrestricted and they can be shipped by any means ref U S DOT 173 185 1 and IATA section 4 5 A45 Because the shipping regulations are very complex shippers of lithium batteries are urged to obtain copies of the 49 CFR DOT regulations and IATA regulations These regulations also explain how the paperwork is to be filled
161. alculate the DAO angle in degrees using the measured values 19 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Program doesn t start Try uninstalling the program and reinstalling from the CD If the program prompts you to install Java you must install it Java is required to run this program on your computer Problem Program starts but won t connect to the receiver Connecting to the receiver window is displayed Verify that the Ethernet cable is a compatible cable same type provided with the product and it is fully plugged in at both ends Verify that the receiver is on and operational start up screen is no longer being displayed Force Windows to renew its Ethernet IP by the following steps Go to Control Panel Click on Network Connections Right click on Local Area Connection and click Disable Right click on Local Area Connection and click Enable Make sure that you do not have a software firewall set up to restrict program access to the internet The Local Area Connection must also be enabled The BTR Interface must be given access to communicate over the Ethernet port or it will not work Allow the program to try and connect to the receiver for up to two minutes If this still doesn t work try disabling the wireless network card if it is present on your machine If the connection has still not been made close the program wait 15 seconds and then restart the program
162. amp DRILL COLLAR CONNECTIONS AND TORQUE GUIDE Drill Collar Connections Connection Recommended Torque Size amp ft Ibs Type 4 Full Hole 4 Full Hole 4 v5 H 90 4 v5 H 90 624 2 5 90 31 400 34 500 2 13 16 5 90 28 000 30 800 5 90 25 700 28200 PIN 734 2 6 734 2 13 16 6 734 3 67s REG PIN 6 REG 44 700 49100 PIN 734 2 6 90 734 2 13 16 6 H 90 734 3 6 H 90 PIN 6 H 90 47 000 51700 PIN 8 2 6 REG 8 2 13 16 6 8 3 67s REG 6 REG 44 700 49 100 PIN 8 2 6 H 90 8 2 13 16 6 H 90 8 3 6 90 6 H 90 44 000 51 700 PIN 51 Chapter 5 Operations Manual inches Size amp e 9 3 7 83 600 92 E 7 REG 78 900 86 700 953 2940 154m Box EEZ 7 H 90 BOX 7 H 90 93 100 102 400 9 3 7 90 90 700 99 800 94 3 7 REG 80800 88900 BOX 94 3 7 8 6 80800 88 800 BOX 7 REG 77 900 85 700 7 REG 73 200 80 500 ALWAYS convert Torque to line pull Convert Tong Length to decimal feet Single Line Pull Algorithm Effective Tong Arm Length gt 50 inches 12 12 inches 4 2 Example 6 3 4 ID X 2 13 16 OD 4 IF Rec Trq 30 400 33 400 Ft lbs 33 400 4 2 7 950 ft Ibs Line Pull Lenath Tona Arm Fo
163. an mud compensator housing with isopropyl alcohol 7 8 5 Install 1 O ring type AS 125 VITON 75D to the bottom position on the mud compensator housing 7 8 6 Install 1 O ring type AS 125 VITON 75D to the top position on the mud compensator housing 7 8 7 Apply silicone lubricant to the small radius inside the mud compensator housing and to the 2 O rings just installed 7 8 8 Twist and push the mud compensator housing over the membrane support assembly until the assembly reaches the bottom of the housing 7 8 9 Clean excess lubricant from the mud compensator housin 15 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 8 10 Clean the coil housing PLUG END with isopropyl alcohol 7 8 11 Install the coil housing on top of the oil fill housing 7 8 12 Apply a dot of Loctite 243 to the threads of each of 6 screws type 6 32 PHL 74 FLT 7 8 13 Install the 6 screws 34 of the way into the coil housing 7 8 14 Tighten the 6 screws to finger tight in a cross pattern 7 8 15 Verify that the coil housing sits directly on top of the oil fill housing 7 8 16 Tighten the 6 screws in a cross pattern to hand tight 7 9 Install Pressure Bulkhead 7 9 1 Clean the oil fill plug 7 9 2 Clean the pressure bulkhead 7 9 3 Install 1 O ring type AS 006 VITON 70D to oil fill plug 7 9 4 Apply silicone lubricant to the oil fill plug O ring 7 9 5 Install the oil fill plug into the side of the pressure bulkhead at the down hole end
164. and after each job 217 Chapter 5 Operations Manual Accelerometers 1 Is the g total 1 0000 0 0004 Yes accelerometers are good No go to Step 2 2 Are any of the accelerometer readings remaining the same regardless of the orientation Yes That particular accelerometer is damaged No Possible loss of calibration go to Step 3 Magnetometers 3 Is the MAGF value equal to the prescribed value in the Site Environment Settings in the range of 0 0035 Gauss Yes Magnetometers are good No go to Step 4 4 Was the tool rolled in a non magnetic environment Yes Remove the unit from the barrel for inspection or return the module for inspection at your shop or the manufacturer s No Reroll the unit in a cleaner environment go to Step 1 If there are any problems with the system i e failed roll test failed continuity test or failed flow simulation test the system should be returned to TENSOR Inc for inspection evaluation and re calibration Removing the system from the barrel will nullify the calibration and cause inaccuracies in the directional measurements Proper calibration cannot be obtained without the complete survey system contained in the barrel 18 Chapter 5 Operations Manual Continuity Check for Interconnect Module Bow Spring Fin Centralizer The Interconnect Module Centralizer is a simple wire way for the bus lines through the tool If one of these components is susp
165. and quickly walk away from the rig and have the tool slowly and steadily lowered to the ground You will need assistance to insure that the tool does not contact the ground with excess force or contact the rig structure Sidewall impacts on the tool can cause severe damage j Gently lay the tool down and disconnect the bale assembly from the pickup line and the tool k Return to the rig floor and break the set screws on the Muleshoe for removal Remove the Muleshoe sleeve as soon as possible It is best to do this when the UBHO is just out of the hole Three people will then carry the MWD tool to a secure place Inspect and break down the tool and perform maintenance on the parts 48 Chapter 5 Operations Manual Insert pin from top when preparing to Pickup tool to the rig floor and load into the NMDC N Figure 1 Load Pin from the bottom when unloading tool from NMDC and preparing to lower to the ground Note if Pin is broken secure device used as pin to prevent cup from expanding and dropping tool Order replacement bail assembly ASAP Figure 2 49 Chapter 5 Operations Manual Note Position on rig to Pick up and Laydown MWD tool Do not pickup or laydown MWD tool through V door and down ramp Always pickup and laydown MWD at position on rig as indicated in sketch Note Pickup and lay down lt Carrying Tool w 3 Personnel 1 50 Chapter 5 Operations Manual DRILL PIPE
166. aracter when it begins to execute 3 Download the 2nd stage bootloader and receive back acknowledge character when it begins to execute 4 Download the application software firmware Variations of the above sequence are possible based on the command line used to invoke qProg 11 For example a page zero RAM program can be loaded into the 68HC11 and executed using the command line options BO B1 and B2 See the following section about the command line for more information Before using qProg 11 with a new processor board the processor board must be defined by creating a target ID and specification See the section on configuration for specific information Installation of qProg 11 Program qProg 11 is customarily installed on a hard disk drive in the c BootLoad directory and is by default set up to run in this directory qProg 11 can be installed in any directory however certain path data and batch files may require minor modifications Copy the distribution files to the hard disk as follows assuming the source disk is inserted in drive b and the destination is the c bootload directory md c bootload if directory does not exist xcopy b c bootload v s If installed in a directory named in the DOS PATH statement the program can be executed from anywhere on the disk If not installed in such a directory the full path to qProg11 exe or batch files can be used to invoke the program Configuration qProg 11 is designed t
167. arameter is used to calculate the Weight On Bit WOB which is logged into the database This parameter is only used if the hookload sensor is utilized in conjunction with the depth encoder The Data Logger assigns this value when the slips are automatically removed due to the hookload weight exceeding the threshold weight defined earlier When the slips are removed the hookload weight will be averaged for 5 seconds then assigned as the Reference Hookload Once drilling commences any deviation from the Reference Hookload would be considered Weight On Bit WOB Sent via WITS or generated internally by using the hookload sensor and the slips in out detection algorithms See Ref Hkld above Gamma Received from the tool and logged into the database Gamma API Calculated internally by applying the API Calibration Factor and the Collar Attenuation Factor to the raw Gamma counts received from the tool This data is logged into the database for plotting Pressure Not implemented yet Temperature Received from the tool and logged into the database for plotting Logging Status Displays the status of logging If the slips are out then logging is enabled If the slips are in then logging is suspended and data is not written into the database Tool Data data received from the tool Database File The database file currently being used for logging and surveying 2 3 3 Functions Descriptions for the function
168. as follows Memory specification ID for target referenced by the target ID structure Number of pages 0x01 if not a paged memory Page size in bytes Low inclusive address of the memory High inclusive address of the memory Number of check characters or 0 Check character type or 0 1 for checksum Address of 1st check character Disable Enable character by default 0 or 1 Fill character value The gPrgt1 11D dat file can be edited using any ASCII type editor Target IDs are modified or new targets added by simply making modifications or additions to the target ID and Memory specification lists See the qPrg111D dat file itself for more information on the file format list termination etc The file must reside in the same directory as the 11 file When defining a new target it may be necessary to create new versions of the 1 and 2nd stage bootloaders as well as the HC11 config register programming file As an aid the following source files are provided and can be used as templates for the new files Boot11_1 asm Example 1st stage bootloader BT80 2 2 asm Example 2nd stage bootloader Cnfg XX asm Example HC11 Cnfg Register programmer 56 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Command Line The following command line is used to execute the qProg 11 utility qProg11 target id filename ext s1 s2 sn where i target id is the target identification string and
169. as the time necessary to transmit the data The decision is up to the operator and the end user of the data It can be concluded that the difference in resolution and the resultant accuracy of the Toolface data word is minimal for the decreased Toolface update time The resolution of Survey Data Words and Logging Data words is of utmost importance That is why it is so important to insure that the required number of bits is used to transmit the Data Word 182 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Pulse Width Update Time 600 1 500 2 000 3 000 183 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Survey Data Selection for Transmission The following two pages illustrate with empirical data obtained from Compass Flow Simulation Test Fixture the potential times elapsed for different types of survey configurations and Toolface logging configurations Category A configuration Inc 12 P Azm 12 P aTFA 6 P DipA 12 P MagF 12 P Temp 8 P BatV 8 P Grav 12 P Category B configuration Inc 12 P Azm 12 P aTFA 6 P TmpW BatW MagW P Toolface Logging Sequence aTFA 6 P XX 8 XX denotes the number of repetitions before starting the string over Table 5 Category A Survey Duration Comparison USE Time Time Time Total Mag Field Bo Dynamic Toolface 18 Gamma Update Rate Gamma Pts Foot YO Ft Hr ROP Gamma Pts Foot Ft ROP 184 Chapter
170. ays the received shocks per second values on a horizontal graph The newest values are inserted at the right side of the graph and the older values will scroll to the left There are two types of graphs to display bar graph and area fill The bar graph separates the shocks into 6 levels of damage risk The lowest level is a short dark green bar and as the damage risk increases the shock bars get taller and more red The other option to display the data is using an area fill graph This will show a line graph from each previous shock value to the next value and it will fill the underneath area with a gradient fill As the shocks get larger they will show more red and when they get smaller they will become more green 11 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software STORED FILES Up to five different types of files are stored on the hard drive The five types have the extension prc svy ftr and raw These are all stored inside subfolder of the History folder If the job name was entered all of the data from that job will be stored in the job name folder Otherwise each subfolder is labeled by the day the files started being logged All files are named with the date and time when they are created The format of the name before the extension is YYYY MM DD HH MM SS The file types are explained below This is a copy of the configuration file stored into the receiver It is useful to verify the configuration w
171. back on recommended data acquisition positions Box colors indicate proper green or improper red positioning Top box Stability status Second box Azimuth status Third box High Side status Bottom box Inclination status The two images above show an attempted data shot in the east orientation The image at left shows some boxes in red indicating that the tool is not ready to acquire data Though the tool is stable and the inclination is correct the azimuth and High Side are incorrect The user then rotates the tool towards the east orientation The blue azimuth arc rotates to indicate east and the azimuth box turns green indicating proper azimuth positioning for data acquisition Next the user rotates the tool until the High Side lies within the green pie section The High Side box turns green The image at right shows all four boxes green indicating favorable conditions for acquiring data To acquire the data click the Acquire button Sensor Displays The main display provides the user with all relevant sensor information in one window composed of two columns Sensor Derived Data shows information calculated from the acquired data 75 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Sensor Acquired Data display shows critical sensor values Sensor Derived Data Sensor Acquired Data Total Acceleration 1 004 G Accelerometer X 0 5656 G Total Magnetic Field 0 676 Gauss Accelerometer Y 0 8297 G D
172. backing up the database If the user chooses to backup the database a copy of the database will be created in a subfolder in the C DigiDrill directory The name of this folder will be the name of the database with a BAK extension appended on to it The copy of the database file will be created in this directory and the name will be the original database file name with a date and time stamp appended to the end Example If the name of the database is entitled Shop Test MDB The name of the backup folder will be Shop Test bak And the name of the database backup in that folder would be Shop Test200601151258 mdb 129 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software The 200601151258 is in computer recognizable format consisting of the year month day hour and minute in that order The survey editor is displayed with all the surveys stored in the database along with the calculated closure information By right clicking on any survey in the list the user will be presented with a popup menu of functions to select from Surveys can be added deleted or edited After each edit function is completed the curvature calculations will be executed and the closure information displayed will be updated 107582 115825 111 912 39 5112 666 51 23 1221 92 011 11248 80 11248 69 11277 124727 2576 IRighi ckck ten for edi menu LL 2 4 3 Survey Report The survey report will appear in a viewer that is capable of eithe
173. bits should be set to 13 or higher These values transmitted are in pounds per square inch PSI Example GV1 13Parity This can be added to the Survey Sequence or Toolface Sequence 2 Transmission Sequences Survey Sequences Survey Sequence 1 Inc i2 Azm 12 12 Grav i2 MagF 12 BatV 6 Temp 9 Survey Sequence 2 Inc 12 Azm 12 Dip 12 Grav 12 MagF 12 Bat2 BatV 6 Temp 9 Survey Sequence 3 Inc 12 Azm 12 12 Grav 12 MagF 12 Bat2 BatV 6 Temp 9 Survey Sequence 4 Inc 12 Azm 12 Dip 12 Grav 12 MagF 12 Bat2 BatV 6 Temp 9 Tool Face Logging Sequences Tool Face Logging Sequence 1 60 6 BatV 6 Bat2 60 aTFA 6 Temp 6 Bat2 Tool Face Logging Sequence 2 6O aTFA 6 BatV 6 2 60 aTFA 6 Temp 6 Bat2 Tool Logaing Sequence 3 60 6 BatV 6 Bat2 60 6 Temp 6 Bat2 Tool Face Logging Sequence 4 6O aTFA 6 BatV 6 2 60 aTFA 6 Temp 6 Bat2 Tool face Logging Sequences Tool face sequences should all be the same in all the sequence numbers Copy and Paste the sequence Annular pressure abbreviation is GV1 with the minimum bits set to 13 or higher These values are transmitted in pounds per square inch PSI Example GV1 13Parity This can be added to the Survey Sequence or Toolface Sequence 34 Chapter 5 Operations Manual 3 Mode Control Settings 3 Mode Settings Current Mode Number 7
174. buttons are Slips Out Enable Logging Available only when not using the hookload sensor for automatic slips detection Pressing this button will enable depth tracking and data will be logged into the database The button will be re labeled to Slips In Disable Logging then pressing this button again will disable depth tracking and suspend logging into the database Edit Surveys Will bring up the survey editor for adding deleting or making edits to the surveys that have been entered into the database Survey Report Generates a survey report for printing or exporting to PDF Plot Surveys Generates horizontal and vertical plots of the survey data entered into the database using standard minimum radius of curvature calculations Edit Log Allows the user to adjust the gamma data depths logged into the database GeoLogPlot Opens the GeoLogPlot application for plotting the data logged into the database Export LAS Opens the LASBuilder application for exporting the data logged into the database to an industry standard LAS file Start Surveying Displays the main surveying screen from which all operations are normally performed More on this in the next section This diagnostics screen will not be closed and both screens will be accessible to the user The tool will be automatically started if it has not been done prior to pressing this button Start Tool Initializes the COM port for the tool a
175. by the capacitors in the Pulser driver The capacitors discharge to the stepper motor When the stepper motor is de energized the return springs drive the shaft and servo poppet back to the closed position 85 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual MECHANICAL ASSEMBLY NOTE In the following it should be noted that the single biggest difference between the standard Tensor style and the latest version of the Compass Pulser is that the disassembly of the oil fill section is done from the bottom rather than the top Significant changes that have been incorporated include 1 The poppet tip on the end of the servo assembly has been a headache from day one This component has gone through a number of changes from the original version Included were a The original tip was subject to erosion and if this was not a failure mode the screw was soldered in and this would either fall out or break off b We then went to a high grade carbide tip with a shoulder on the ID We used a 6 32 screw to attach the tip to the ball screw shaft The head of the screw tended to erode so we moved it further back This helped but then there were still issues with the screw breaking off a We then went to the current design with a shrink fit carbide tip inside a steel body The first version used a high carbon steel that was subject to corrosion in certain muds Short term we went to a nickel coating that solved most of the problems b The latest batch of tip
176. ce is received Missed Decode This sound is played every time a transmitted value is not decoded properly Warnings These options allow the user to configure the warning settings used to calculate if the received data is within the valid expected range for your location The nominal values and tolerance limits are retrieved from the configuration file currently being used You may override these values if they were not correct for the location Compare received data against valid data ranges This enables the warning flag calculation from the decoded transmission data Override configuration values Selecting this will allow the user to use a custom set of tolerance limits instead of the configuration values Dip Angle Dip angle degrees and tolerance Magnetic Field Magnetic field gauss and tolerance Gravity Field Gravity field and tolerance Temperature Maximum Maximum temperature or before warning is set Battery Low Voltage Lowest Battery Voltage volts before warning is set 16 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software WITS This section deals the with WITS Wellsite Information Transfer Specification serial output options The WITS data will come out of the serial port from your computer If you don t have a serial port located on the computer you can purchase a USB to serial adapter to interface with other devices Enable WITS Output
177. ce system from EM receiver Unplug scope for transducer cable Monitor scope for signal Check if you have drilled onto another formation Adjust Gain on Receiver to amplify signal Adjust High Low Window to narrow the signal Run off UPS power supply to see if signal cleans up Inspect all cable connections clean and secure or move if necessary Place antenna cable as far away from the rig as possible Check signal off bottom Check grounding around rig Always monitor the scope to see if there is a signal uu 41 Chapter 5 Operations Manual TROUBLESHOOTING DOWNHOLE TOOL Problem No communication Tool transmitting but low output voltage across gap Problem No Detection Poor Detection Troubleshooting Picking up Tools Resolution Check cables Assuming battery or connection Unplug sensor and batteries Check alignment of battery pins to key and inspect alignment and condition of pins on driver coupler Source another battery and harness no barrel Plug stave directly into the driver ensuring contact if there is no activity change out the transmitter Check connection of fluke leads to the 1 ohm resistor and to body of gap sub shortened resistor or short will reduce output voltage Check to ensure the upper and lower end of Gap Sub is not shorted through the rig Either the top must not be touching blocks etc or the lower end hanging free from the Monel is in the stump Di
178. creen directions to install the software onto your hard drive You must read and agree to the user license before the installation can occur If your computer does not have a java runtime environment you will be prompted to install one This is necessary for the program to run correctly The installation will provide a link to the program from both the desktop and the start menu Installed locations The program files will be installed in the directory C Program Files Bench Tree Group BTR Interface This option is changeable during installation but the default location is listed here for A link to the main program is installed on the desktop and the start menu icon 4 is and is labelled BTR Interface access the start menu links click on the id then click on A Programs click on Bench Tree Group and the links will be displayed to Ram If you wish to uninstall this program at any time the uninstall link is located in the Bench Group links directory Uninstalling will not delete any of your saved files Only the program files during the uninstall process Connecting to the receiver Using a standard Ethernet cable connect your computer to the BTR Turn the receiver on Open the program and it will connect to the receiver within a minute and begin displaying data The progress bar displayed will show you the amount of time it may take to connect to the receiver Once a connection has been established this window
179. d This will allow for extended use Downhole provided the other parts of the pulser are operational When new wipers are installed the area between the wipers should be packed with a Silicon Lubricant to prevent solids from entering the area between the wipers and causing damage 11 Chapter 5 Operations Manual Condition of Wear Sleeve The Wear Sleeve provides a smooth surface for the wipers to slide against and should remain free of debris The surface should be smooth and free of pitting Condition of Main Spring The Main Spring is made of steel and should endure a lifetime in excess of 2000 pulsing hours It is perfectly matched to account for the forces involved in the pulser so this should be reordered from the manufacturer Condition of Pulser Helix End O ring and Poppet Housing The pulser helix end is very important to the orientation of the probe in the MWD collar It endures extreme conditions of wear and abuse when repeatedly retrieved and landed in the mule shoe This piece should be inspected every time it retrieved from DOWNhole The abrasion ring needs constant attention to insure that the tool is not being subject to excess vibration DOWNhole This will cause excess wear on the reverse helix in the mule shoe and the helix end of the pulser As the abrasion ring is worn down many events could occur that may cause unique operational abnormalities in the probe Condition of Screen Housing and Screens Insure
180. d NOT over torqued Note 6 PINS point UPhole and 4 PINS point DOWNhole SECURE the VENT PLUGS on the Battery Number 2 Module E Chapter 5 Operations Manual Attach the Number 1 Battery Module and 4 Intermod Conn to the Uphole end of the Number 2 Battery Module Insure that the threaded ring connection is snug and NOT over torqued Note 6 PINS point UPhole and 4 PINS point DOWNhole Record the serial number of the Spear Point and Mode Plug Assembly selected S N Attach the 5 Intermod Conn to the Spear Point Assembly and place this module to the side for attachment later Insure that the threaded ring connection is snug and NOT over torqued Note 6 PINS point UPhole and 4 PINS point DOWNhole No Pulses Look at these possible causes for no pulses at the surface during the surface test 1 Is there power to the Drillers Remote Terminal DRT 2 Is the Transducer connected properly to the DRT 3 Are all valves open to the Transducer 4 Is the mud line on the manifold clear to the transducer 5 Is the Pumps On threshold low enough to activate the processor in the DRT to look for pulses PUMPS ON 6 Is the standpipe pressure accurately measured and displayed on the DRT x50 PSI Different transducers used in the industry have different settings that may or may not activate at low pressures The presence of mud pressure and no pulses indicates that the tool is not creating any pulses or they are being ab
181. d set screws to lock the sleeve in place first Pick up tool string and seat the tool string in the collar Pull the BHA up to the UBHO Sub and replace the solid set screws with the ported set screws one at a time This will prevent any flow from coming back to surface if the ported set screws are used The Transducer is located inside the barrel above the helix end The Pressure Stinger is screwed on to the helix end with blue Loctite Make sure all o rings are installed on the Pressure Stinger outside 210 o ring x 4 and 115 o ring on threads Make sure wear shoulder is not worn down If it is it will not line up the ported hole on the Pressure Stinger to the ported holes on the Muleshoe sleeve Slide the pressure test sleeve over the Muleshoe and use the hydraulic pump to apply pressure Configuration of the annular pressure can be setup in the Survey Sequence or Toolface Sequence The variable used for annular pressure is GV1 the minimum bits that should be used is 13 For example GV1 13 Parity Inc Grav and MagF should be added to the Toolface Logging Sequence The Toolface should be added to the survey sequence Tap test the tool and watch GV1 come up with the pressure reading The re sync option Mode 4 3 Amps should be run for underbalanced situations For situations when the tool will not turn off because the well is flowing the tool will automatically shut off after 16 minutes and look for sync again Annu
182. d user manual Multilanguage support 72 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Main Display The main display is the only window that gives the user information about the status of the MWD tool This display was designed to give the user all relevant information about the current roll test and the MWD tool When MWDRoll32 is started you will notice that the display consists of six subsections each designed to give the user particular information Dared Dala Seram Totsl Acceleration 1 24 Acoskrometer X 0 S554 5 Total Magnetic Find 0676 Y 05258 G DoAnge 549 Accelescnetei Z 00005 6 Hg sde 2143 X 0 6208 Asmuh Ange 2634 7 Magretometer 0 2303 inch ston Angle 88 86 2 0 0259 Magnet Toollace 633 Bey 2935 Vols 15 3 Tevpwakae 22 User Instructions Feedback Fiol 22 has established commurscation w h the HWD tool and there is no opened teat Cunentty open a previous roll best a nee lost quit the pogan and use the help functions The six subsections are as follows Guidance Rose Designed as an alternative to the alohanumeric displays this display gives a graphical view of the three dimensional orientation of the MWD tool Sensor Derived Data This display gives the user real time critical information tha
183. der Size Sync Window Factor 0 00 Header Check Parity Number of Sync Pulses Sync 1111 Down Link Control Disable Down Link Type ModeNumber v Down Link Command Time Period Inclination Threshold 5 0 Inclination Evaluation Survey v Internal Pulse Widths 2 250 0 375 0 500 0 600 0 800 1 000 1 200 1 500 2 000 3 000 Edit Wid Receive Delay Time 10 seconds Transmit Delay Time 15 seconds When you click close a screen will pop up saying The values you have set for TxDt and RxDt may prevent sync decoding you either need to increase TxDt by 10 Sec or decrease RxDt by 10 sec Do you wish to make these changes now Click NO For Underbalanced Wells re sync option mode 4 the Receive Delay time must be 15 seconds apart from Transmit Delay time Downlink Commands only enable if the operator has experience with Downlinking To prevent the tool from downlinking accidentally set the Command Time Period to the maximum setting of 90 seconds This keeps the driller from accidentally downlinking the tool during connections Make sure Sync Word Type Format is set to 1111 not set to 3111 because the triple wide pulse uses a different frequency and will not sync up 298 Chapter 5 Operations Manual 2 Transmission Sequences Survey Sequences Survey Sequence should be the same on all sequence numbers Copy and paste the sequence Annular pressure abbreviation is GV1 the minimum
184. drilling the 0 01005 meters performs 8 io 00 01 10 100 Ra Rm exceptionally as a conventional LWD resistivity tool In the de graph at left the 4 75 dia inch diameter tool is de shown capable of very accurate measurements in a 6 5 inch diameter hole whatever the mud resistivity Even in severe washouts up to 12 inches in diameter the tool retains acceptable accuracy A complete log is saved in the GRT internal memory and can be subsequently downloaded through a high speed link to a PC when the is retrieved from the well Click to see actual log of a GTI Catoosa test well It is not necessary to remove the tool from the BHA to Pseudo Geometrical Factor download data Furthermore the GRT RURxo 100 Rxo Rt 100 50 100 Invasion Diameter inches can include an internal Gamma Ray tool standard or directional providing directional capability that is unique in the _ industry The GRT can be provided as a stand alone tool or part of a complete LWD resistivity system including a surface display display software and data communications control electronics A mud Pulser can be mounted above or below due to the full 10 wire bus passing through the tool The GRT is available compatible with Tensor type systems and can be readily integrated into other industry standard tool strings A built in ad Chapter 6 Resistivity GRT Muleshoe helix at the
185. ds Hole Drill Collar Job County Comments Depth Rate Amplitude Length Size Size Weight Vis Size Pipe No ST Closed Area _ Leo wo 15 saw we 7 a oso ars 200 s 15 im e we 7 a os ars 20 s 15 vm we e a oso ars Ok zo 15 saw we 6 ars 22 nos wor we 6 ____ 278 22 ox so or zo s 15 em w 22 wr 230 w 15 raw we w 5 oss 278 22 ox or zm 42 15 we a8 6 5 jose ars 278 22 Ok ____ oo 46 15 imn we e 5 ose as 22 ok soo wor 220 15 we we 5 ost 22 or zo os 15 em wo 6 5 ose 22 mo wor zs 15 12m we te 5 ose ars 22 homas OK sooo wor zo 22 15 im we 5 jose em 278 22 oc wor zo a 15
186. dule Compass 150 C Description Directional Module Compass 150 Directional Sensor Compass 150 Directional Sensor Compass 175 C Hot Hole Directional Interface Compass 175 C Hot Hole Description Housing Interconnect Intermodule End Housing Sensor Thread Protector Male Temp Tab B Temp Tab C Bulkhead Retainer Top 90 Degree Split Shell Bulkhead Retainer Bottom 45 Degree Sensor End Pigtail Electronics Snubber Electronics Transorb AS 124 O Ring Viton AS 127 O Ring Viton AS 217 O Ring Viton AS 218 O Ring Viton 160 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Quantity 2 00 2 00 1 00 2 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 2 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 2 00 2 00 4 00 2 00 Non Serialized Part Part Number AS 220 SC 013 SC 015 SC 016 033 049 052 059 Product Line MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Description AS 220 O Ring Viton Screw 6 32 x 1 2 SHCS SS Screw 4 40 x 1 4 SHCS SS Screw 6 32 x 3 8 SHCS SS Screw 10 32 x 3 8 Fillister Brass Shim MDM Connector Brass Screw 10 32 x 3 8 SHCS 55 Screw 2 56 x 1 4 Pan Head SS 161 Quantity 4 00 4 00 4 00 2 00 4 00 8 00 8 00 4 00 EIE Y 10190 E
187. e this is the braided communications cable This is essential as the pulser needs to be pulsing during the oil fill process Oil Fill portion of Pulser Though unimpressive the Tapping Block is almost essential for a good oil fill You will go through a few 74 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Some important pointers when setting your system up the shop or elsewhere as follows 1 The sight tube that goes from the main valves to the top of the reservoir is more important than one would first think This tube will allow the air coming out of the Pulser to go to the top of the reservoir without having to go through the oil As you will see from experience when a bottle is newly filled it can take a few hours to get the air out of the reservoir and oil it contains By routing the air out of the Pulser to the top of the bottle we are minimizing the aeration of the oil 2 The tubing that is used is called Polywire and will not collapse with vacuum This 3 8 tubing is used throughout the system The exception is right at the oil fill plug where the design dictates the use of 74 tubing Here we usually use very heavy walled clear tubing that again will not collapse with the vacuum This short portion of clear tubing also lets us more easily see the bubbles as they come out of the Pulser 3 The height of the oil reservoir is also critical During the oil fill process the Technician must be able to raise the Pulser to
188. e Last Changed 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 000 000 010 0 00 0 00 010 7 20 2006 1 58 7720 2006 1 58 7 20 2006 1 58 7 20 2006 1 58 7 20 2006 1 58 7 20 2006 1 58 7 20 2005 1 58 7 20 2006 1 58 7 20 2006 1 58 3 20 2005 1 58 7 20 2005 1 58 7120 2006 1 58 7 20 2008 1 58 7 20 2005 1 58 7 20 2006 1 58 7 20 2006 1 58 7120 2006 1 58 7 20 2006 1 58 3 23 2006 50 DE the survey you wish to delete Then press the del key on the keyboard and the survey will be removed 143 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 5 4 Real Time Log Editing The Gamma ROP WOB and Temperature logs are considered real time logs The editors for each of these types of data works the same way and their use has been condensed in this manual by side The real time log editor allows editing of both the curve and raw tabular data side Data can be edited by modifying the data contained in the grid to the left including adding or removing data points or by dragging the point to the proper location in the right side plot Depth 1148881 Ganmalcg R PAWOB Survey 1147002 45 00 1147023 00 11470 45 1147066 45 1147087 1147108 4800 114712 1147151 1147172 1147184 11472 15 49 00 1147238 1147257 1147278 11473 1147321 1147343 1147384 1147385 48 00 4800 4800 48 DO 5 4 1 Adding points to a real time log To add
189. e and Date 8 15 00 3 17 21 88 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Roll Test Data North Shot il Bad High Side Inclination Azimuth Magnetic Ange Magnetic Gravity Shot Toolface 7 Gauss 5 1 35780 90 00 0 80 171 30 58 50 0 49 1 00 2 4460 90 00 0 80 224 20 58 50 0 48 1 00 8120 90 00 0 80 270 80 58 50 0 49 1 00 4 13030 90 10 0 80 310 50 58 50 0 49 1 00 5 17580 90 00 0 90 355 30 58 50 0 49 1 00 5 22270 90 00 0 90 4210 59 50 0 49 1 00 7 266 40 69 90 0 90 8580 58 50 0 48 1 00 31330 89 90 0 80 132 90 58 50 0 49 1 00 Minimum 24 30 3000 150 60 41 10 53 50 0433 1 002 Max lm um 357 50 20 1858 60 355 10 53 60 0494 1 003 Spread 313 20 020 0 00 315 00 810 0001 0 001 East Shot Bad High Side Inclination Azimuth Magnetic Dip Angle Magnetic Field Gravity Shot 7 Toolface 7 Gauss 3 35830 90 30 90 50 147 90 58 60 0 49 1 00 18 4580 90 30 80 60 195 40 58 60 0 48 1 00 ti 8750 90 30 80 60 237 10 58 60 0 49 1 00 12 13200 90 30 80 50 281 60 58 60 0 48 1 00 13 17960 90 30 80 60 328 20 58 50 0 49 1 00 14 228590 90 20 80 60 1840 58 50 0 49 1 00 15 27030 90 20 80 60 59880 58 50 0 48 1 00 16 Mo 31540 90 20 90 50 104 90 59 50 0 49 1 00 Minimum 25 50 9020 90 50 12840 53 50 0433 1 002 Spread 312 50 0310 0 10 31050 810 0001 0 000 89 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Shot Bad High Side Inclination Azimuth Magnetic Dip Ang
190. e areas 7 10 67 Set the multimeter to measure Ohms 7 10 68 Place the multimeter black clip on the black wires connection 7 10 69 Place the multimeter red clip on the brown wires connection 7 10 70 Verify that the meter reading is between 13 and 15 Ohms 7 10 71 Write the reading on the Tensor Pulser Check List 7 10 72 Move the multimeter red clip to the red wires 7 10 73 Verify that the meter reading is between 500 and 600 Ohms 7 10 74 Remove the multimeter red clip from the red wires 7 10 75 Rub the multimeter red clip on the wire channel 7 10 76 Verify that the meter reading is 0 0 Ohms 7 10 77 Move the multimeter black clip to the brown wires and repeat the previous 2 steps 7 10 78 Move the multimeter black clip to the red wires and repeat the same 2 steps 7 10 79 When all test points are valid slide the heat shrink tubing over the solder points of each wire 30 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 10 80 Heat and shrink the tubing evenly with the hot air gun 7 10 81 Power off the solder iron 7 10 82 Install the wave spring SSR 0112 on the shoulder of the solenoid retainer with the wires routed through the center of the spring Note The wave spring has a split so you can open it and wrap it around the wire 7 10 83 Start the tapered end of the ring RET 1 250 SPIRAL SS in one of the alignment pin grooves 7 10 84 Push down on the F4 connector and insert the remainder of the spring clip int
191. e as soon as practical In addition notify the office once all of our company personnel have arrived or if someone is missing and the contact phone numbers at the site should be given to the coordinator The job is expected to be set up and equipment tested as soon as possible upon arrival 1 Confirm hole size to be drilled and the services required Directional EM Gamma 2 Conduct a quick inventory to determine if all of the required subs and tubulars are present 3 Confirm the non magnetic drill collar for MWD fin selection 4 Unpack and proceed to conduct an inventory of EM MWD specific equipment 5 Notify the Directional Driller of the services to be run i e Gamma and the tool mode that will be run 6 Review and verify the Declination Dip angle Magnetic fields with the DD and well plots supplied 7 Review drilling program to check for conductive resistive formations and their depth If possible obtain offset well log with resistivity data Battery life and power level transmission are the key items to consider Maximum power setting will allow only 2 3 days of drilling and will consume upwards of 1 000 00 per day in battery costs It is imperative that the EM MWD operator selects power levels and power shifts properly to provide good detection while minimizing battery costs We have seen that 1 watt of power can be detected at depths up to 1500m 5000ft RIG and ENVIROMENTAL NOISE Rotary Noise Top D
192. e hot tip Inspect cord before use 5 1 8 Inspect all cords for nicks or frays before use 5 1 9 Whenever you work with chemicals read the MSDS and follow the PPE guidelines Cil Fill Procedure 6 0 TOOLS EQUIPMENT and MATERIAL 6 1 Tools and Equipment and or Equivalent 6 1 1 Snubber Shock Pigtail Connector 6 1 2 Vacuum Pump 6 1 3 Flat Blade Screwdriver 6 1 4 Pulser Test Box 6 1 5 System Gauge 6 1 6 Rubber Mallet 6 1 7 Permanent Marker 6 1 8 60cc Syringe with Oil Fill Adapter 6 1 9 Slave Plug 6 1 10 Table Top Chain Vice 6 1 11 Small Blocks of Wood 6 1 12 Slave Nut Washer and O Ring 6 1 13 Thread Protector Slaves x2 43 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 6 1 14 Air Pressure with Hose 6 2 Materials 6 2 1 Alcohol 6 2 2 Cloth Large Rags 7 0 PROCEDURE 7 1 Perform the Pulser Oil Fill Vacuum Test 7 1 1 Verify valve positions at the start of the test are as follows Valve A Closed Valve B Closed Valve C Open Valve D Closed 7 1 2 Connect the slave cable to the MDM connector head on the assembly 7 1 3 Power on the vacuum pump 7 1 4 Open vacuum valve A Vacuum ATMOSPHERE Valve Exhibit 1 Oil Fill Stand 44 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 1 5 Partially close atmosphere valve C 1 8 turn This valve is open at beginning of test 7 1 6 After 3 seconds power off the vacuum pump 7 1 7 Open the oil SILICONE 50CS reserve valve D
193. e the drill pipe out to the annulus This produces a decrease in pressure that can be seen at surface Line codes are used to represent the digital information in form of pulses Continuous Wave Continuous wave tools gradually close and open the valve to generate sinusoidal pressure fluctuations within the drilling fluid Any digital modulation scheme with a continuous phase can be used to impose the information on a carrier signal The most widely used at least in high data applications such as offshore modulation scheme is continuous phase modulation When under balanced drilling is used mud pulse telemetry can become unusable This is because usually in order to reduce the equivalent density of the drilling mud a compressible gas is injected into the mud This causes high signal attenuation which drastically reduces the ability of the mud to transmit pulsed data In this case it is necessary to use methods different from mud pulse telemetry such as electromagnetic waves propagating through the formation or wired drill pipe telemetry Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Downhole Sensor Compass utilizes 3 main sensor packages including GE Microtesla and Applied Physics these standard electronic instruments are proven in downhole survey systems ranging from wireline steering tools to MWD systems The sensor package contains 3 Axis Magnetic Sensor 3 Axis Accelerometers and Temperature sensors capable of detecting the surrounding
194. e the last Pulser was serviced This guide is not meant to be used by someone not familiar with the QDT Pulser Prior to starting to work on a tool a Pulser Inspection report should be available and a physical inspection of the tool should be done This would include 1 Note the condition of the outer tubes noting any damage or erosion to the tool 2 Check the compensator membrane with a ball driver to see if there is still a good oil fill If the membrane is hard not swollen or collapsed on the carrier 3 Remove the screens from the screen housing and note the condition of the bellows and 4 Put the Pulser on the Pulser Test Box and check the activation of the EFS and if the tool is pulsing 5 Check on the job report and note the hours on the tool and any reports of a failure If there was a failure there should be a failure report Once the preliminary inspection has been completed the Pulser can be disassembled 55 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual DISASSEMBLY OF PULSER Step 1 Remove the lower end of the Pulser including the Helix End and the Poppet Housing Note any cuttings alongside the shaft in the Poppet Housing Note the condition of the Polypaks on the Piston Cap Note any wear on the Piston Cap itself and inspect the erosion sleeve for wear Step 2 With all of the modules in the MWD it is imperative that the tool be disassembled from the top end Remove the Interconnect Housing using your Gearwrenchs This w
195. e the volt peak Set the Sec Div knob to M500ms found on the bottom The baseline position can be adjusted using the Vertical Position knob Set to the middle of the screen for a better view Make sure the peak on the Oscilloscope is above 1V Do not gain above 10V peak Tool working with good signal QMWD PC BENCHTREE SET UP Open the QMWDPC Benchtree software Once the tool is transmitting and it is visible on the Oscilloscope adjust the HIPL and the to correspond with the pulse amplitude on the software If the pulses are above the 640psi scale adjust the PTG to a decimal value to attenuate the signal to greater than one to gain the signal PTFS can also be adjusted to either attenuate or gain the signal FBWF like on a mud pulse tool will also help to filter out noise Adjust it like you would for a mud pulse tool Start with FBWF 0 5 and adjust accordingly Operator preference will determine the pulse height to run GAMMA SETUP Make sure the Gamma computer also has the ground prong removed If there is a ground loop problem the SAI pressure will read zero when the Qbus cable is plugged in Make sure the Wits computer also has the ground prong removed 292 Chapter 5 Operations Manual CONFIGURATION SET UP 1 Telemetry Transmission Options MWD Configuration 1 Telemetry Transmission Options Receive Delay Time 10 Survey Header Size d Transmit Delay Time 15 Tool Face Hea
196. e tool becomes detached from the wireline then it will fall back down the drillstring This will generally cause severe damage to the tool and the drillstring components in which it seats and will require the drillstring to be pulled out of the hole to replace the failed components thus resulting in a greater total cost then pulling out of the hole in the first place The wireline gear might also fail to latch onto the tool or in the case of a severe failure might bring only a portion of the tool to the surface This would require the drillstring to be pulled out of the hole to replace the failed components thus making the wireline operation a waste of time 32 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation BASIC EM TRANSMISSION THEORY Measuring the potential voltage across a gap Multimeter The EM Signal always tries to return to the opposite side of the Gap Sub Asthe EM Signal travels up the Drill Pipe it leaks off through the surrounding formations and returns to the opposite side of the Gap Sub The objective is to get enough signal to the surface so that it can be detected by the Surface Receiver COMPASS EM Designed to be compatible with the positive mud pulse tool Uses a pulse wave low frequency 1 2 Hz more efficient on batteries Variable power selection Low Voltage EM 1 3 5 amp 8 amps High Voltage EM 1 2 5 amp 4 amps Ease of operation 33 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation FORMATIONS 2 20
197. e top of the spear point with the pin fully inserted into the latch device from the top of the slots Refer to Figure 1 Insure the lifting bale is secure d The pick up line air hoist or cathead should be passed through the loop of the bale assembly connecting to the two cable slings and tied with a double knot with the hook latched to the line e Instruct the hoist operator to follow your instructions and begin picking up the tool in a steady smooth and continuous action Use the poppet tip protector provided and do not drag the tool on the ground Insure that the tool does not contact the rig structure by holding the lower end off the ground and pulling the tool away from the rig structure Walk the tool in to the rig as the top of the tool is lifted to vertical Have someone keep the tool away from the rig structure by keeping it pushed away with open hands f Carefully guide the tool over the railing towards the NMDC Pay attention to the pickup cable position in the derrick to avoid tangles g Remove the poppet protector from the bottom of the tool h With the tool suspended away from the collar tool joint test the Main Signal Poppet again by depressing it upward into the Poppet housing several times 1 Perform another tap test on the rig floor Refer to Tap Test Procedure j Apply a generous amount of lubricant DC 111 or pipe dope to the lower helix end and the o ring and abrasion ring k Carefully align the MWD
198. easured and is used to determine the resistivity of the formation This tool as been put together to be fully retrievable and Tensor compatible Key Requirements Key components that are required to run a job but do not include the Tensor compatible mud pulse system e 2Resistivity Receiver 2 Resistivity Transmitter e 2 Pony Sub 4 Resistivity Subs 4 Chapter 6 Resistivity GRT The tool string is set up according to Resistivity BHA Diagram Bow spring style interconnects must run with this tool because they are the electrical contact with the BHA Proper measurement must also be ensured so that the interconnects touch the BHA in the correct spot It is also very important that the blades on all the centralizer have adequate tension so they make good electrical contact to the BHA It is very important that the second bottom centralizer makes contact once landed between the four insulator rings as drawn in the Resistivity BHA Diagram It is also very important that the second from the top centralizer makes contact once landed between the four insulator rings of the top two subs as drawn in the Resistivity BHA Diagram The very bottom interconnect should also never land above the bottom insulator ring on RES SUB 1 The third interconnect from the bottom should never go below the very top insulator ring on RES SUB 2 The interconnect between the Gamma probe and Receiver 2 should always land bellow the insulators on RES 5083 The interc
199. eck slips and master bushings before damage occurs to the tube Do not stop the downward movement of the drill stem with the slips This can cause crushing or necking down of the drill pipe tube The drill pipe can also be damaged by allowing the slips to ride on the pipe during trips out of the hole Always use back up tongs to make and break connections and rotate breaks when tripping Good rig practices will help eliminate time consuming trips in the future looking for washouts or fishing for drill pipe lost in the hole 56 Chapter 5 Operations Manual 57 Chapter 5 Operations Manual CHAPTER 6 RESISTIVITY A GRT Resistivity B Gen Il Resistivity GEOSTEERING RESISTIVITY TOOL Most MWD Resistivity tools are of the Wave Propagation type and can accurately measure the average rock formation resistivity However this type of tool may be difficult to use in horizontal drilling because it requires complex interpretation of phase and attenuation logs to see an adjacent bed boundary It is easy to mistake curve separations due to other effects such as anisotropy or invasion resulting in drilling through a bed boundary and then having to backtrack CBG Corporation has invented and patented US patent 26 064 210 and UK patent 2 353 596 a method for measuring resistivity as a vector quantity For example up to one meter before mistakenly drilling out of a reservoir advance indication of the distance and directio
200. ected of having a short or broken connection then it should be checked for continuity using an Ohm meter Lay the module in a flat and secure position and make note of the Uphole 6 pin connector end and the DOWNhole 4 pin connector end Insure that all of the switches on the Breakout Box PN 203140 are in the Break position Insert the leads of the Breakout Box into the appropriate ends of the Interconnect module With the leads of the test meter in the proper sockets black in COM red in 0 insert the black lead into the black sockets and the red lead into the red sockets of the Breakout Box and check the module for continuity B1 R1 B2 R2 B10 R10 as instructed by the chart below and record the results on a copy of the blank form supplied The value of the measurements should be 0 50 50 11 It is best to use a test meter with an auto ranging feature and a digital readout This will make the comparison of the results more accurate Please note that different meters are calibrated differently and may result in variations of the results listed in the example The technician should not be alarmed with slight differences 5 1096 range in the readings Gross differences should be noted and only then should the system be returned for further evaluation or broken down for rebuild To check the unit for shorts place the black meter lead into the Bus 1 black socket of the Breakout Box and the red meter lead in
201. ed in labelled drums containing Vermiculite or other non flammable cushioning material such as sand or Sodium Carbonate These materials should be disposed of as previously discussed under Safe Disposal in the Lithium Battery Safety Manual OR If liquid nitrogen is available the battery should be placed in liquid nitrogen or dry ice with a pair of tongs Once frozen the battery must be dissected and the components neutralized in a soda ash water bath Unused or partially used Lithium must be set aside to hydrolyze If the battery is thawed and not dissected the battery will return to its original state of being hot short circuited and may explode If the battery vents or explodes it should be handled with the procedure for vented or exploding batteries PROCEDURE FOR EXPLODING BATTERIES If a battery explodes all personnel should be evacuated from the area The area should be vented to the outside until the pungent odor is no longer detectable If the expelled material is on fire it should be treated as described below in the procedure for a Lithium fire After the residue has cooled it can be absorbed with Sodium Carbonate and placed in plastic bags All bags should be placed in a sealed and labelled drum with Vermiculite or other non flammable cushioning material such as sand or Sodium Carbonate to cushion the s These materials should be disposed as previously described under Safe Disposal in the Lithium Battery Safety Manual 141
202. ed or opened roll test 76 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Header Information Display Located below the sensor displays the Header Information display shows the information entered in the Header Information dialog Once again this display presents the user with all relevant header information in one window Header Information Unique Test ID 100 Site Location Tensor Oil Rig Operator Name John Doe Nearest City Round Rock Tool Serial Number 2461 State Province TX Tool Bias Multiplier 0 44444 ZIP Postal Code 78927 Start Date amp Time 8 16 99 8 42 12 Country USA Miscellaneous Notes Display Located to the left of the header information display and below the Guidance Rose the Miscellaneous Notes display shows any notes entered into the Header Information dialog m Miscellaneous Notes Mone 2 User Instructions Feedback Display The bottommost display gives the user information about the current status of MWDRoll32 At all times the user can check this display to see what is happening and what can be done m User Instructions Feedback M WDRoll32 has established communication with the MWD tool and there is an opened roll test Currently you may edit header information and data print or export reports start data acquisition and use the help functions The two buttons to the right Acquire and Skip are used when acquiring data in Int
203. eet maintenance and audit programs to ensure product compatibility and reliability 2 Chapter 1 Introduction B OTHER ACCESSORIES B 1 GAMMA Technical Data Sheet Gamma ray tools record naturally occurring gamma rays in the formations adjacent to the wellbore This nuclear measurement indicates the radioactive content of the formations Effective in any environment gamma ray tools are the standard device used for the correlation of logs in cased and open holes Gamma ray tools use super sensitive hermetically sealed Sodium lodide Scintillator crystal ruggedized high temperature Photomultiplier for maximum log quality A Application Standard Module Logging MWD Focused Module Geosteer MWD Mechanical Diameter 1 875 1 30 Length make up 34 05 13 6 Weight 15 0 Ib 3 0 bl Operating Temp 77 to 350 F 77 to 350 F End Connectors 200 10 Pin GE MDM 15 Pin Material BeCu Pressure 18 000 PSI 18 000 PSI Performance Sensitivity 1 7 Counts per API 0 6 Counts per API Accuracy 5 to 300 5 to 300 F 10 to 350 F 10 to 350 F Resolution Survival Temp 6 8 400 6 8 400 Heat Cool 5 F Minute 5 F Minute Vibration 3 axis 50 300 Hz Random 306 30 306 30 G Sh
204. efinition String 1 SSq2 Survey Sequence Definition String 2 SSq3 Survey Sequence Definition String 3 SSq4 Survey Sequence Definition String 4 StWt String Weight Threshold SuDT Directional Survey Delay Time SuWd Survey Word Data Block T TFO Toolface Offset TFS Toolface display type Switch in qDRT Time Date and Time Stamp YYMMDDHHMMSS TLWd Toolface Logging Word Data Block TmpT High Temperature Threshold TSN1 Toolface Logging Sequence Number for Telemetry Mode 1 5 2 Toolface Logging Sequence Number for Telemetry Mode 2 TSNS Toolface Logging Sequence Number for Telemetry Mode 3 TSN4 Toolface Logging Sequence Number for Telemetry Mode 4 TSq1 Toolface Logging Sequence Definition String 1 TSq2 Toolface Logging Sequence Definition String 2 TSq3 Toolface Logging Sequence Definition String 3 TSq4 Toolface Logging Sequence Definition String 4 TVD True Vertical Depth TxDT Telemetry Transmit Delay Time from flow on V VChk Non Volatile Variable Check Function diagnostic Ver Software Firmware Version Function information 53 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software ZazD Clear azimuth data display command qDRT Zdia Zero the Diagnostics Data Block Command ZGaD Clear gamma data display command in qDRT ZInD Clear inclination display command in qDRT ZMbD Clear message box command in qDRT ZReD Clear resistivity data display command in qDRT ZTFD Clear toolface data display command
205. eing tested for calibration are listed on the left side of the results table If the data acquired for that data type is within range of the maximum limits then a green check will appear on the right side of that row If the data is out of the acceptable range then a red x will appear to the right side of the table Any data marked as Bad will not be used in the calculations for these results You may view the results of any previous roll test without being connected to the receiver or the tool by clicking on the File menu of the main window and then clicking on the View Previous Test Result This will display the result page for that particular test Editing Test Data If a roll test is currently open you may choose to view all of test data in the edit data window You can view this window by clicking on the Roll Test menu and then click on the Edit Test Data item This will display all of the data in a table You can mark any of these data as bad by clicking the check box in the bad column of the table You must click on the button to save any edits that you have made of the data marked as bad will not be used in the test results calculation 34 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Editing Test Header Information At any time you may edit the currently opened roll test s header information by clicking on the Roll Test menu and then the Edit Header Data item This will show you the same header dialog w
206. ench so the handle is below your waist and then push the handle down to tighten Torque the connection to a minimum 75 Ib ft 7 10 15 Insert a flat blade screwdriver into the membrane screen housing to engage the test tip Rotate the test tip so the screws are visible in 1 of the screen housing windows 7 10 16 Tighten the screws with a 5 64 hex head driver to hand tight 7 10 17 Push the screwdriver against the servo poppet Verify that the servopoppet moves and is aligned 20 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 10 18 See the serial number log for the next serial number 7 10 19 Pound the serial number for this tool onto the pressure bulkhead flat area with a mallet and 4 steel stamp set Note Verify the direction of each stamp to avoid stamping any numerals upside down 7 10 20 Repeat the 2 steps above to pound the tool serial number into the other side of the pressure bulkhead 7 10 21 Verify that the thickness of the washer type FLAT 46 SS 960 is between 025 and 030 7 10 22 Gently remove the following solenoid wires from the housing Red Brown Black 21 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 10 23 Run these 3 solenoid wires along the wire way channel and insert them back into the housing through center entry hole 7 10 24 Remove the masking tape and clean the tube with isopropyl alcohol 7 10 25 Apply 1 72 wraps of 77 wide Kapton tape around the exit groove Hold the
207. er handling and storage resulting in such problems as overheating and short circuiting cause damage to batteries The common safety practices have been outlined below safety precautions to take with regard to all aspects of battery storage and handling Storage 1 Shelf Batteries should be stored in their original shipping boxes if possible to keep them isolated from each other preventing external short circuits Do not store batteries loosely and do not place batteries on metal surfaces Temperatures and Environment Batteries should be stored in a cool dry well ventilated area with an optimal storage temperature range of 0 25LiC If prolonged storage is anticipated batteries should be protected against excessive humidity This will prevent moisture from forming an electrical pathway between the feed through terminal and battery cover which can lead to severe galvanic corrosion of the feed through pin thus compromising the hermeticity of the battery Hazard Consideration Lithium battery storage areas should be clearly marked and provided with Lith X fire extinguishing material Batteries might burst if subjected to excessive heating In case of fire only Lith X fire extinguisher should be used as water will cause exposed lithium to ignite Signs should clearly state WATER IS NOT TO BE USED IN CASE OF FIRE INCOMING INSPECTION The proposed flow of batteries throughout the facility should be thoroughly reviewed by plant s
208. er to receive WITS depth data both the Use Depth Encoder and Use Hookload check boxes should be unchecked and the Enable WITS should be checked as illustrated below Toot Settings Survey Setings help the COM ports Devica Manager North Relerence Tool Type MWD 5 Too Lou 2 Tote Pot 2 Smeg 4 4 visi Correction 288 f Toctizce Off Use Depth Encoder Depth Dun Concer cottace Offset Use Hootload Hockloed Fori a Servey To B dept Garra Settings Use Calibration Gschground Counts Collar AterumtionFacet 125 Hot Courts OF net Bit 34 00 API Calibrator _ Prav Mast gt the default configuration depth tracking and ROP WOB is performed by the WITS system and is received by the Data Logger The Data Logger application also has the ability to acquire its telemetry data from WITS or a tool which publishes data via the WITS protocol By default telemetry is not collected from WITS but can be turned on via the Configure WITS dialog If the Data Logger is receiving telemetry data directly from the tool and the WITS system is not publishing its own telemetry data the Data Logger will send telemetry data back to the WITS system for distribution among all other compute
209. eractive mode When in this mode the display indicates the required orientation and the number of data shots to perform The user observes the Guidance Rose or Sensor Derived Data display to determine whether a data shot can be made If a shot can be made the user can click the Acquire button to save the data and proceed to the next shot However the user may choose instead to click the Skip button to proceed to the next shot without saving data from the current shot 77 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Default Mode Until the user starts or opens roll test MWDRoll32 displays only current MWD sensor data While an experienced user might be able to determine whether the tool has a problem simply by visual inspection of the data roll tests allow the user to determine the tool status with certainty and precision Starting a New Roll Test Starting a new roll test involves three basic steps 1 Click the Start New Roll Test item from the File menu The Header Information dialog will appear 2 Enter all information and click the OK button The Roll Test Options dialog will appear 3 Select the desired options and click the OK button MWDRoll32 enters into data acquisition mode Depending on the options selected data will be acquired in Interactive or Remote mode For more information on how to acquire data see the Acquiring Data help Tool Orientation Important follow the tool orientation instructions displa
210. es the Carrier and the Compensation Membrane The Compensator Membrane is held in place by Tie Wire with two bands with a double wrap on each end 63 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 5 6 The next step is to insert the springs and Spacers into the Wire Tube The normal configuration is to drop in a Short Spacer in followed by a spring the Long Spacer a spring and then a Short Spacer The last Short Spacer will be protruding from the Wire Tube 64 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 The Coil Housing is next attached This is held in place with five Phillips screws and the Coil Housing must be held in place depressing the springs while the Phillips screws are put in place Loctite should be applied to the screws before they are put in place Step 8 The Solenoid is next attached This is done using three Phillips Screws and again Loctite should be applied to the screws This is done with the Pulser in the upright position and the wide leg must fit into the wide slot in the Coil Housing Step 9 With the Pulser still in the upright position the fine bladed screw driver is inserted into the center hole in the top of the Solenoid and the Solenoid Shaft is screwed into the Spring Shaft Step 10 The next step would be to tighten the Solenoid Shaft to the Spring Tube This is done using a small Ball Driver that is inserted into the hole in the Solenoid Shaft Tighten until you get a
211. es used and operational modes used PULSER The pulser consists of an oil filled pulser section and an electronic Pulser Driver Section 13 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation OIL FILLED SECTION The pulser oil filled section contains the solenoid module which is comprised of two individual solenoids the pull in solenoid and the holding solenoid When energized the pull in solenoid retracts a plunger that is connected by an assembly of rods and shafts to the servo poppet The holding solenoid energizes simultaneously as the pull in solenoid retracts the assembly back The pull in solenoid requires the largest energy charge supplied by the capacitors in the driver but only for 80 milliseconds Energy is then discharged continuously to the holding solenoid for the remainder of the pulse length To sustain this position the holding solenoid requires a minimal amount of current The cessation of current to the holding solenoid then releases the clapper that was being held by the magnetic forces created by the holding solenoid This completes the pulse cycle required for data transmission The servo poppet and shafts are held in the up or open position by the force applied to the Holding Coil While energized a clapper maintains contact to the non magnetic front face of the Holding Coil The retractions of the servo poppet initiate mud flow through the servo orifice and into the pulser plenum below This maneuver and resulting mudfl
212. ess step to follow the requirements of the flow chart or documentation identified on the flow chart 4 2 It is the responsibility of the person completing each process step to identify deficiencies as they occur in the process Each individual is to initiate or insure initiation of a Nonconformance Report NCR when a defect occurs in the product at any point during the manufacturing process in accordance with SOP 290 15 1 4 3 It is the responsibility of the Quality Assurance department to ensure the Manufacturing Procedures meet the quality requirements for the product line and to qualify all QC Inspection in Accordance with SOP C 5250 3 5 0 SAFETY 5 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 5 1 Special attention must be paid around moving parts to prevent pinching crushing or cutting injuries All tools and equipment must only be used in accordance with the manufacturer instructions Operators must be trained on proper operating instructions 5 2 When soldering care should be taken to prevent burns from the iron tip Inspect cord base and stand before use Soldering should be performed in well ventilated area or a fume extractor should be used Operator must wash hands thoroughly and clean all work surfaces well after completion If working with lead solder the operator must complete Lead Safety Awareness Training EHS 470 Rubber latex or nitrile gloves should be worn 5 3 All work on energized equipment including inspection te
213. est Box to 3 Turn the Pulser rate switch upper left to off 4 Using an ohm meter attach the black contact to the ground line see the picture below 5 Set the ohm meter to read volts DC 6 A reading of 0 25 v should be observed This means the switch is turned off 70 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 on the Pulser or driver if referring to the picture above and the voltage reading should change to about 5 volts This means the switch is turning on 8 When you stop tapping or inducing vibration the voltage reading should return to about 0 25 volts E Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual OF THE OIL FILL OIL FILL PROCEDURES Important cannot overstress the importance of the oil fill to the performance of this MWD The only people who have been successful with the tool are those who have taken the time to understand the importance of the oil fill why it s important and how it can best be done History When this MWD came onto the market the first place it was run was in Canada with Ryan Canada has some of the most MWD friendly drilling conditions that exist in the world The holes especially those that the tool was used in are shallow the muds close to water or at least have very low solids and are not hot The tool worked in Canada fairly well for a number of years once the problems with tolerances and the settings on the vacuum switch were somewhat reso
214. etween 180 and 180 between 180L and 180R or between 0 and 360 degrees Temperature Units Select the temperature type to display Fahrenheit Celsius Decimal Precision Select the number of decimal place resolution digits to show for each data type Generic Variables This preferences section shows the generic variable names alternate display name and also the decode routing The descriptions below go into more detail for each section Variable This column lists the default generic variable names These cannot be changed but may be overridden using the alternate display names 14 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Alt Display Optional name to display instead of the standard Allows for a more descriptive name to be presented to the operator and also stored to the logged files Decode Routing If a generic variable data value represents one of the standard transmitted data types it may be routed to the standard display windows If no special routing is selected the value will be decoded stored and shown on the decoded data history windows only Miscellaneous This section allows you to view and change miscellaneous settings Force IP to change to desired value Select this to option to override the default IP to the selected value This is usually used when the BTR Interface s IP is in conflict with another network card on the computer Show pressure transducer error window If this op
215. eviously started roll test click on the File menu and then click on the Open Roll Test item If you do not have any previously started roll tests with the current tool then you will be prompted to import the roll tests from an old roll test database If you already have roll test data in the database then you will be shown a screen of all the available tests in the database Clicking once on the data in the table will show you the rest of the test information in the panel on the bottom of the window Click on the open button to open your selected test 482 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Acquiring Roll Test Data After you have opened a roll test you will be given the option to acquire directional data from the tool and store it into the database You may begin the acquisition process by clicking on the Roll Test menu and then clicking the Start Acquisition item This will prompt you with an acquisition options You will first need to select the method of data acquisition Choose Manual to let the operator decide when to acquire the data for each data shot The Automatic option will automatically store the data when the tool is in the correct direction and the data has been stable for multiple readings Choose the Timed option to acquire data on a fixed interval This is useful when the user is not close to the computer You may also choose to acquire data from any of the following orientations North South and Ea
216. f Operation Battery Pack Compass uses high energy Lithium Thionyl Chloride double D size batteries in a stack of eight with 150 C 3029 temperature rating The cells are diode protected to prevent reverse power charges and are protected by a 5 Amp fuse on the power line The battery pack will run an MWD system for over 150 hours at a standard pulse rate with a Tensor Pulser and 80 hours with a gamma probe added With an upgraded Compass pulser a battery pack will operate the MWD system for over 450 hours and over 300 hours with an added gamma probe The design of the system allows for the addition of a second battery pack that will be activated when the power of the first battery drops to a predetermined level to then activate the power draw on the second battery This allows the operator to place the batteries in various positions in the MWD tool design This option allows the users to determine the optimum position of the directional module determined by magnetic spacing requirements The use of flexible finned intermodule connectors allows multiple design options on the MWD system with the standards being to place the pulser on the bottom required and the gamma and directional module located at the optimum positions Pulsers Compass maintains three types of pulsers in the MWD inventory The original and most commonly used is the GE Tensor solenoid activated pulser In early 2005 Compass began switching over to the Compass stepper
217. f Time Enter the time in seconds the user needs to proceed to the MWD tool location before testing actually starts Interval Time Enter the time in seconds between each automatic data acquisition Note MWDRoll32 will automatically record data at the end of each interval whether the tool is properly positioned or not Orientations By default MWDRoll32 acquires data for all four orientations unless the user chooses to acquire data from fewer than four For example if after a roll test is completed the data from one of the four orientations is discovered to be bad the user is able to re acquire data for that one orientation only Starting the test Once all options in the Roll Test Options dialog have been set the user may start the test by clicking the OK button To find out how to acquire data see the Acquiring Data help Acquiring Data Once a roll test has been started see Starting a New Roll Test data acquisition begins The method used to acquire data depends on the user s selection of Interactive or Remote mode 84 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Interactive Mode Data Acquisition 1 Position the tool in the orientation specified in the User Instructions Feedback display Place the MWD tool flat set inclination to 90 and set the azimuth to reflect the orientation For North set the azimuth to 0 For East set the azimuth to 90 For South set the azimuth to 180 For Vertical
218. f previous messages easier The Clear Display button clears the main message windows The Exit button quits qTalk W32 Other commands Logging qTalk W32 Messages to a File Playing Back a qTalk Log File Changing the BAUD Rate Checking Node Status Node Status Window This screen identifies all on line nodes on the qBus and displays any warnings or faults that each node may have This screen is the equivalent to sending the message qdwr However instead of showing the fault and warning register values this screen displays a brief description relating to each warning or fault bit set in the registers 41 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Label Address Fault wW arning Conditions No Reported Warnings or Faults No Reported Warnings or Faults Initialization Fault Changing the BAUD Rate To change the baud rate start qTalk and then hold down the lt Alt gt key and type the letter b This key combination brings up the qW32Srvr BAUD Rate dialog box Select one of the BAUD rates or type your own and click on 38400 C othe 42 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Clear the Status Window Click the Clear Messages button on the main qW32Srvr dialog to clear all warning and error messages from the Status window Q Server polling COMT STOP Node Status MWD System Clear Messages Logging qTalk W32 Messages to a File To start
219. f transmitting data up to ten times faster than mud pulse telemetry These tools incorporate an electrical insulator in the drillstring To transmit data the tool generates an altered voltage difference between the top part the main drillstring above the insulator and the bottom part the drill bit and other tools located below the insulator of the MWD tool On surface a wire is attached to the wellhead which makes contact with the drillpipe at the surface A second wire is attached to a rod driven into the ground some distance away The wellhead and the ground rod form the two electrodes of a dipole antenna The voltage difference between the two electrodes is the receiver signal that is decoded by a computer An electromagnetic telemetry system for transmitting data from a downhole assembly which is operationally attached to a drill string to a telemetry receiver system The data are typically responses of one or more sensors disposed within the downhole assembly A downhole transmitter induces a signal current within the drill string The signal current is modulated to represent the transmitted data Induced signal current is measured directly with the telemetry receiver system The telemetry receiver system includes a transformer that surrounds the path of the current and an electromagnetic current receiver The transformer preferably comprises a toroid that responds directly to the induced signal current Output from the transformer is inp
220. facturing Procedures meet the quality requirements for the product line and to qualify all QC Inspection in Accordance with SOP C 5250 3 4 1 5Where a measurement is taken for product acceptance and for the control of quality related activities the IM amp TE inspection measuring and test equipment device shall be subject to calibration The Operator shall check the calibration sticker to ensure the calibration of the device has not passed its expiration date 5 0 SAFETY 5 1 Special attention must be paid around moving parts to prevent pinching crushing or cutting injuries All tools and equipment must only be used in accordance with the manufacturer instructions Operators must be trained on proper operating instructions 5 1 2 All work on energized equipment including inspection testing and adjustment requires the following 5 1 3 Conductive articles of jewelry and clothing such as watchbands bracelets rings and necklaces shall not be worn while performing electrical work 42 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 5 1 4 Non conductive no metal frame safety glasses with side shields shall be worn at all times when working on inspecting or testing electrical equipments components 5 1 5 Only tools specifically designed for electrical work shall be used 5 1 6 Power supplies cords and switches shall be inspected for damage before use 5 1 7 When using the wire heat stripper care should be taken to prevent burns from th
221. fe handling and use of lithium batteries Abuse In general the conditions that cause damage to batteries and jeopardize safety are summarized on the label of each These conditions include Short Circuit Charging Forced Over discharge Excessive heating or incineration Crush puncture or disassembly Very rough handling or high shock and vibration could result in damage NOT DESIGNED FOR CHARGING OR RECHARGING PRODUCT NAME Lithium Oxyhalide Primary Battery MWD CHEMISTRY SYSTEM Lithium Thionyl Chloride CHEMICAL FORMULAS Li SOCI2 TOXIC CAUSTIC OR IRRITANT CONTENT Important Note battery container should not be opened or incinerated since the following ingredients contained within could be harmful under some circumstances if exposed In case of accidental ingestion of a cell or its contents obtain prompt medical advice 142 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual MATERIALS Lithium is included in this section due to its vigorous reaction with water forming a caustic hydroxide Lithium Li CAS 7439 93 2 Thionyl Chloride SOCI2 CAS st 7719 09 7 STORAGE AND DISPOSAL TIPS STORAGE Store in a cool place but prevent condensation on the batteries Elevated temperatures can result in shortened battery life FIRE If batteries are directly involved in a fire DO NOT USE WATER CO2 DRY CHEMICAL OR HALOGEN EXTINGUISHERS A Lith X graphite base fire extinguisher or material is the only recommended
222. fic node address number Following any of these command lines the operator can enter a label that relates to a specific function in that particular node Alternatively the operator can enter a label that relates to all nodes If a particular node does not respond to an inquiry that node probably does not use that particular command or function related to that label To exit Host mode press the F4 key or type Once out of Host mode the PC returns to displaying ongoing communications Scrolling Previous Commands The qTalk program allows the operator to recall up to 10 previously invoked commands Press the up arrow to scroll backward or the down arrow _ to scroll forward The operator can alter particular labels to perform troubleshooting or testing functions Enter the command code of 10 to alter labels To check the capability level enter the label CLev after the command line followed by a To change the capability level follow the instructions below Note Be very careful when altering labels Do not alter labels indiscriminately Command Code CCod 10 allows the operator to enter commands change label values and switch positions Enter this command after the command line followed by an exclamation point Example gt CCod 10 Note Extreme Care must be taken when in this operating mode Soft Keys The soft keys on the right side of the screen allow the operator to manipulate the operation of qTalk Ho
223. fication before it overwrites an existing file ST Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Storing Configuration to the receiver tool Before uploading a configuration to the BTR or a tool you must have the file currently opened in this program If you have not saved the file before uploading you will be prompted to save the file before the upload process can take place You must also have the BTR powered on and connected to the BTR with an Ethernet cable To start the upload process click on the Load Store menu and then click on the Store to item You may select to either store the configuration file to the tool or BTR only or to both simultaneously Retrieve Configuration from the receiver tool After the BTR is powered on and connected to the computer via the Ethernet cable you may use this program to load the configuration from the BTR First click on the Load Store menu and then select the Load from item Select a hardware type and the configuration file will be loaded into the program for you to view You will notice the title of the program will change to Current receiver configuration or Current tool configuration after this process is complete 22 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software TOOL COMMUNICATIONS You may send and receive messages directly to the tool using the Tool Communications window To access this window click on the Communications menu and then click on To
224. figuration file to open Choose the MWD configuration file you wish to use or click Cancel to use default settings The program will then display the configuration variable names and values on the right pane The left pane of the program contains links to the section titles of similar variables Clicking on a title on the left pane will display the related section of variables on the right pane Editing Variables You may edit any of the variables by changing the values to the right of the name Pressing enter after changing a value will confirm the validity of the change If the entered value is invalid or out of range the program will prompt you with an error message You will be given the option to have the previous value automatically reloaded or you can re enter the value yourself Once a variable field has been selected information about the variable units and valid ranges will appear on the bottom bar of the program You will not be allowed to save a file if it contains an invalid variable entry This prevents anyone from loading an invalid configuration file onto the receiver or the tool If you need help inputting a valid Survey or Tool Face Logging sequence please refer to the help section in this document entitled Editing Sequences After modifying a file you can save the file by selecting the File menu and then clicking on Save or Save As You may also use the Control S shortcut to save a file The program will always prompt you for veri
225. firm the non magnetic drill collar for MWD fin selection Unpack and proceed to conduct an inventory of MWD equipment Notify the Directional Driller of the services to be run i e D amp or Gamma Review and verify the Declination Dip angle Magnetic fields with the well plots o gro SURFACE GEAR AND SOFTWARE TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES Grounding It is ALWAYS required that all units be grounded properly Insure that the Safe Area Interface SAI is always attached to a grounding cable firmly secured to the lug on the upper right hand portion of the box Also insure that the case of the Drillers Remote Terminal DRT is secured to a separate ground Some locations run on very poor ground circuits and if this is the case then it may be necessary to operate from a separate power source such as a generator Intermittent Display screen on the DRT may be and is usually a result of improper grounding All cable connections on the system must be dry and free from dirt and other debris If any connections become wet or contaminated then they must be changed out with another set The connections must be dried with isopropyl alcohol or solvent then as a precaution packed with silicon grease dirt or contamination to enter the connection Caution Intermittent Display 1 Chapter 5 Operations Manual System Power It is STRONGLY recommended that an Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS be placed between all surface equipment a
226. ft corner of the screen 3 Click the Settings item 4 Click Control Panel item The Control Panel window opens 5 Click the Display icon The Display Properties window opens 6 Click the Settings tab at the top of the Display Properties window 7 Verify that the Colors field is set to at least 256 colors or 8 bit Ideally it should be set to either 65536 Colors 16 Bit or High Color 8 Click OK The Display Properties window closes 9 Close the Control Panel window 10 Re start Windows 11 Re start MWDRoIl32 MWDRoll32 does not fit within the Windows desktop and some items are not visible This problem is due to the resolution of the video adapter To correct your PC screen resolution setting 1 Close MWDRoll32 2 Click the Windows Start button on the lower left corner of the screen 3 Click the Settings item 4 Click Control Panel item The Control Panel window opens 5 Click the Display icon The Display Properties window opens 6 Click the Settings tab at the top of the Display Properties window 7 Verify that the Screen Area field is set to at least 640 x 480 Ideally it should be set to 1024 x 768 8 Click OK The Display Properties window closes 9 Close the Control Panel window 10 Re start Windows 11 Re start MWDRoll382 87 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software After a print the print preview pane displays oddly After sending a report to the printer MWDRoll32 does not refresh the print preview w
227. ftware 3 2 Adding A Curve To A Track To add a data curve to a track Click on the track the curve should be added to and the track will be highlighted Open the database file selection form by either Text Label Add Curve o Rightclick in the track area and the popup menu will appear Select the Add Curve item on the popup menu o Click the green button on the toolbar ARARA o Use the pull down menu item Edit Curve A dd 134 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Open Log File ub 12 Ame Fies cl ype Daban Fika f mdb gt Lance f Ux Use the Add Curve Data From Database form to select the curve data to add to the track highlighted The description of each section of this form are Displays the job information stored in the database The logged data stored in the database are listed here Select one of the items listed to be added to the track Select the start and end depth of the data to add The remainder of the data will be This will enable jb TZA De mm filtering which can be M further adjusted later Fukt ARUM FUP 10041 1 16 Use this to review the mausa surveys stored in the database Measured Depth curves have no depth excluded from the track es ms corrections TVD tnid 07 5
228. g Interconnect Housing Interconnect Housing Note Disassembly of the battery module must always start at the uphole end 116 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 2 0 Tools Required A Spanner Wrench E Wooden Dowel B 3 32 Hex Driver F Loctite 242 Blue C 1 8 Hex Driver G Kapton Tape D 14 Hex Driver H 17 8 Gearench 117 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 3 0 Disassembly Uphole End 31 Remove the Safety Plug from the side of the battery housing near the Uphole end with a Hex driver 3 2 Unscrew the Uphole End Plug protector with the Spanner Wrench 118 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 3 3 Using two Gearenches break the connection between the Interconnect Housing and the Intermodule end Remove the Interconnect Housing exposing the Bulkhead Retainer 3 4 Remove the two screws holding the Bulkhead Retainer to the Intermodule End with a 3 32 Hex driver 119 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 3 5 Push the 6 Connector through the Bulkhead Retainer using the Wooden Dowell and remove the bulkhead retainer 3 6 The6 Pin Connector and wires are now exposed The Intermodule End may now be removed 120 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 37 Loosen the Uphole Intermodule End using two Gearenches Unscrew the Intermodule End 3 8 Remove the Uphole Intermodule End dE 21 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 4
229. g more negative while the other atom becomes more positive See dipole dipole attractions e Instantaneous dipoles These occur due to chance when electrons happen to be more concentrated in one place than another in a molecule creating a temporary dipole See instantaneous dipole e Induced dipoles These occur when one molecule with a permanent dipole repels another molecule s electrons inducing a dipole moment in that molecule See induced dipole attraction 20 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation The definition of an induced dipole given in the previous sentence is too restrictive and misleading An induced dipole of any polarizable charge distribution p remember that a molecule has a charge distribution is caused by an electric field external to p This field may for instance originate from an ion or polar molecule in the vicinity of p or may be macroscopic e g a molecule between the plates of a charged capacitor The size of the induced dipole is equal to the product of the strength of the external field and the dipole polarizability of Typical gas phase values of some chemical compounds in debye units carbon dioxide 0 carbon monoxide 0 112 ozone 0 53 phosgene 1 17 water vapor 1 85 hydrogen cyanide 2 98 cyanamide 4 27 potassium bromide 10 41 These values can be obtained from measurement of the dielectric constant When the symmetry of a molecule cancels out a net dipole moment the value is set at 0 The
230. g to the right hand grip rule with a magnitude equal to the current in the loop times the area of the loop In addition to current loops the electron among other fundamental particles is said to have a magnetic dipole moment This is because it generates a magnetic field which is identical to that generated by a very small current loop However to the best of our knowledge the electron s magnetic moment is not due to a current loop but is instead an intrinsic property of the electron It is also possible that the electron has an electric dipole moment although this has not yet been observed 17 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Contour plot of an electrical dipole with equipotential surfaces indicated A permanent magnet such as a bar magnet owes its magnetism to the intrinsic magnetic dipole moment of the electron The two ends of a bar magnet are referred to as poles not to be confused with monopoles and are labeled north and south The dipole moment of the bar magnet points from its magnetic south to its magnetic north pole confusingly the north and south convention for magnetic dipoles is the opposite of that used to describe the Earth s geographic and magnetic poles so that the Earth s geomagnetic north pole is the south pole of its dipole moment This should not be difficult to remember it simply means that the north pole of a bar magnet is the one which points north if used as a compass The only known mechan
231. ge Reservoir Brass Valves Brass Fittings Ave WN H Notes There are a large number of oil fill units currently in use that use a small ID tubing that will collapse with vacuum This makes a good oil fill difficult Vacuum Pressure Gauge Reservoir with End Caps Sight Air Escape Line Utilizing Polywire Pulser Line Control Valves Air amp Vacuum Lines 73 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual EQUIPMENT amp PROCEDURES The system shown on the bottom of the previous page is as was mentioned not complete On this page is the Oil Fill System as set up in Compass Tech Shop On the picture below have indicated those items that are required in addition to the basic kit Included are 1 The vacuum pump 2 A Pulser test box complete with cables 3 A communications to go from the oil fill portion of the Pulser to the driver The driver used in this case can be either EFS or Mechanical vacuum 4 A block of wood on which to tap the Oil Fill portion of the Pulser 5 Ground supports or V blocks on which to rest the tool The oil fill system remounted on a larger peg board This is a shop set up that accomodates the needed tools This is the vacuum pump This one is mounted on the bench and above and left is a switch to turn the pump on and off recommended This is the Pulser Test Box The Test Box is hooked to the Pulser via the driver and communications cable Though hard to se
232. ge to the battery which may result in loss of capacity seal leakage and or explosion DO NOT SOLDER to the case Batteries should not be subjected to excessive mechanical shock amp vibration 143 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual HANDLING AND INSPECTION GUIDELINES The most frequent forms of abuse can easily be identified and controlled in the workplace All spirally wound batteries are internally protected against the hazards associated with short circuits This is accomplished by incorporating a fast acting fuse under the terminal cap It is our experience that inadvertent short circuits resulting in open fuses are the largest single cause of field failures Batteries with open fuses characterized by zero voltage should be disposed of or returned to the manufacturer for rework Never attempt to remove the terminal cap or replace the internal fuse Problems associated with shorting as well as other hazardous conditions can be greatly reduced by observing the following guidelines Y Cover all metal work surfaces with an insulating material Y The work area should be clean and free of sharp objects that could puncture the insulating sleeve on the battery Y Never remove the shrink wrap from a battery pack Y All persons handling batteries should remove jewellery items such as rings wristwatches pendants etc that could be exposed to the battery terminals Y f batteries are removed from their original packages for inspection
233. gh 1199 are reserved for the qFIO error codes 61 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Open error codes start at 1100 gt gt gt gt 1100 General or undefined file error 1101 DOS did not open a file for read 1102 DOS did not open a file for write 1103 DOS did not open a file for append 1104 DOS did not could not open an existing file for Read Write 1105 DOS did not open a new or destroy existing file for Read Write 1106 DOS did not could not open an existing or new file for Read Write Read file error codes start at 1120 gt gt gt gt 1120 General or undefined read error Write file error codes start at 1140 gt gt gt gt 1140 General or undefined write error Miscellaneous file error codes start at 1160 gt gt gt gt 1160 Operator disallowed writing to an existing file c Terminal I O error return codes The error codes from 1200 through 1299 are reserved for the qFIO input error codes The error codes from 1300 through 1399 are reserved for the output error codes Terminal input error codes start at 1200 gt gt gt gt 1200 General or undefined input error 1201 An input string exceed the max size that could be processed Terminal output error codes start at 1300 gt gt gt gt 1300 General or undefined input error d Prog 11 specific error codes qProg 11 specific error codes start at 20001 gt gt gt gt 20001 Memory allocation error 20002 Source file read err
234. gher energy level to a lower one The waves emitted from a source are oscillatory and are described in terms of frequency of oscillation The method of generating an electromagnetic wave depends on the frequency used as do the techniques of transmitting the energy to another location and utilizing it when it has been received Communication of information to a distant point is generally accomplished through the use of electromagnetic energy as a carrier The illustration shows the configuration of the electric and magnetic fields about a short vertical antenna in which flows a sinusoidal current The picture applies either to an antenna in free space in which case the illustration shows only the upper half of the fields or to an antenna projecting above the surface of a highly conducting plane surface In the latter case the conducting plane represents to a first approximation the surface of the Earth The fields have symmetry about the axis through the antenna For pictorial simplicity only selected portions of the fields are shown in this illustration The magnetic field is circular about the antenna is perpendicular at every point to the direction of the electric field and is proportional in intensity to the magnitude of the electric field as in a plane wave All parts of the wave travel radially outward from the antenna with the velocity equal to that of a plane wave in the same medium Often it is desired to concentrate the radiated energy
235. good flex in the Ball Driver when it is held at the end Once tightened you should check for a gap between the shoulder on the Solenoid Shaft and the Clapper If there is a space you will hear a double click effect when the tool is pulsing Very often this can be reduced through the use of a Belleville Washer on top of the Spring Shaft 65 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 11 Lay the Pulser down on a couple of tool blocks for the next couple of steps Installing the bellows is the next step Install the Tie Wire on the upper end of the Bellows using Tie Wire Pliers Step 12 Installing the Tie Wire on the lower or small end of the Bellows is the next step This should be done with the Bellows Shaft retracted The easiest way to do this is by inserting a screwdriver between the Clapper and the Coil Housing This should position the Bellows Shaft such that the end of the bellows matches the shoulder on the lower end of the Bellows Shaft Install Tie Wire using the Tie Wire Pliers Step 13 The next step is to install the Servo Poppet Assembly By backing off the two upper screws as much as possible the Servo Poppet Assembly can normally be installed as a single unit Once in place remove the screwdriver between the Coil Housing and the Clapper This will align the Servo Poppet Assembly and hold it in place The gap has to be set so only lightly tighten the two Screws 66 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual BOM EL
236. gs at least 72 meter and spaced no more than 5 meters apart the cable All cables shall be run in a neat and tidy manner out of harm s way The Rig Floor Display RFD is generally mounted in the Dog House The rig floor junction box if used is also located in the Dog House The RFD has a graphical and digital readout The computer decodes the conditioned signal applies offset and magnetic declination to the survey sends calculated data to the RFD and records a log of detection activity The Uninterrupted Power Supply UPS conditions the rig power to provide a steady output to the surface computers and receiver Models may vary but the standard 650 KVA should allow the system to run 45 to 60 minutes on battery reserve Ensure the proper power supply cable heavy duty is used as light service cords may fail 26 Chapter 5 Operations Manual Compass Directional EM Surface Configuration Power Cord Antenna Rod Make sure all the power cords do not have a third ground prong If the ground line is present in the power cord then you will not see pressure pumps on the software when the transducer pigtail cable is connected to the surface equipment Any ground prong can cause a ground loop Have all cables plugged in before powering up the FI Receiver 27 Chapter 5 Operations Manual CABLE SETUP The BOP cable should be connected to the BOP on the rig and run back to the Receiver
237. h labels 1 Menus 2 Toolbar 3 Optional Tool Type Selector 4 Shortcut Pane 5 Variable Definition Pane 6 Information and Status Bar 7 Connection Status to BTR 29 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Program will not load store anything from the receiver First check the bottom right hand corner of the program and check the status of the connection to the BTR If the value does not say Connected then there is a problem with your Ethernet connection to the BTR Make sure the BTR is powered on and that the Ethernet cable is firmly inserted into the computer and BTR You may try closing the program and re opening it if you are still having problems 30 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software FILE GRAPHER Version 1 1 8 Installing the software This software is packaged in the MWD Software Installation CD It is installed after running the automatic install from the CD If you have any questions on the installation refer to the installation section in the beginning of the manual Starting the Program This program can be started from the Start Menu under the folder Bench Tree Group Click on the File Grapher name to begin the program After the program loads you may open up any of the recorded btraw and ftr files to view them displayed on a graph of pump pressure versus time Using the Program You may open up a raw file by clicking on the File menu and then click on
238. he Roll Test Options dialog pictured below opens Test Options Test Operating Mode nteractive Lab mode C Remote Rig mode Interactive Mode Options Remote Mode T pos Manual Data Acquisition Time 50 Automatic Data Acquisition 30 Seconds Orientations North 8 Data Sets South 8 Data Sets v East 8 Data Sets Vertical 2 Data Sets Cancel Help Test Operating Mode In the Roll Test Options dialog the user first selects an operating mode Interactive mode allows the user to manually acquire data as each orientation becomes ready This selection may be convenient when the test is conducted near the computer Remote mode allows automatic data acquisition at timed intervals This selection may be convenient when the test is conducted far from the computer 83 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Interactive Mode Options When selecting Interactive mode the user must set the interactive mode options The default selection is manual data acquisition Manual Data Acquisition requires the user to click either the Acquire or Skip button for each tool position Automatic Data Acquisition automatically acquires the data after allowing the user a set interval of time to properly position the tool in each orientation Remote Mode Options When selecting Remote mode the user must set remote mode options Hold Of
239. he atmosphere known as the Kennelly Heaviside layer or ionosphere can act as a reflector When an electromagnetic wave is introduced into the interior of a hollow metallic pipe of suitably large cross sectional dimensions the energy is guided along the interior of the pipe with comparatively little loss The most common cross sectional shapes are the rectangle and the circle The cross sectional dimensions of the tube must be greater than a certain fraction of the wavelength otherwise the wave will not propagate in the tube For this reason hollow waveguides are commonly used only at wavelengths of 10 cm or less frequencies of 3000 MHz or higher A dielectric rod can also be used as a waveguide a system of material boundaries in the form of a solid dielectric rod or dielectric filled tubular conductor capable of guiding high frequency electromagnetic waves such a rod if of insufficient cross sectional dimensions can contain the electromagnetic wave by the phenomenon of total reflection at the surface 30 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Electromagnetic energy can be propagated in a simple mode along two parallel conductors Such a wave guiding system is termed a transmission line Three common forms are the coaxial cable two wire line and parallel strip line As the wave propagates along the line it is accompanied by currents which flow longitudinally in the conductors These currents can be regarded as satisfying the boundary condition
240. he following steps to load the programs to the PC in the DOS mode using the supplied floppy disks 1 Insert the qMWD PC Disk 1 of 2 Diskette into drive or B 2 Type a install a c Enters The directory QMWD qMWD_PC will be created on the C drive if it does not already exist The qGMWD PCTM programs and files will load into this directory If the directory already exists then a backup directory will be created to save the old programs 3 After the files are loaded from Disk 1 of 2 the installation procedure will prompt you to install the second of the two qMWD PC diskettes The 64 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software QMWDCnfgTM and qDirK IOTM programs and files will also be loaded into the c qMWD QmWD_PC directory all PC programs are now normally loaded on a single directory 4 Run these programs through the qMWD PC qMWDCnfg and the qDirK IO batch files while the qGMWDqMWD directory Enter these batch files completely as displayed to insure that the batch file is executed correctly Some Menu programs activate complete utilization of the batch files REMEMBER these routines cannot be activated through windows yet Installing qProg 11TM 1 Insert the qProg 11 Diskette into drive 2 Unless it already exists create a c Bootload directory on the c drive by typing cd lt Enter gt md bootload lt gt 3 Switch to the c Bootload directory by typing cd bootload Enter
241. he pressure will now no longer affect the QMWDPC Benchtree software because the tool will only see vibration You will see the pressure in the QMWDPC Benchtree software until the tool stops transmitting then pumps will read off for 8 sec and pumps on will start counting again MANUAL amp Auto Front Back 30 Chapter 5 Operations Manual OSCILLOSCOPE SET UP The Oscilloscope is used for monitoring and troubleshooting It will not interfere with the operation of the system The signal on the Oscilloscope corresponds to the pulses on the QMWD PC Benchtree software The view can be adjusted by scaling on the Oscilloscope Turn the Oscilloscope on power button on top to view the Main Menu screen Make sure the base line is running across the screen If it is not press the RUN STOP button on the top right hand corner Press the CH1 button where the BNC cable is connected on the front of the Oscilloscope On the screen set the following by pressing the button next to the screen Coupling DC BW Limit Off GOMhz Volts Div Coarse Probe 1X Invert Off ARARSA zs Chapter 5 Operations Manual Where the cable is connected press the 1 Menu button Vertical scaling is adjusted using the Volts Div knob You can see it in the lower left corner Set CH1 to 1 or 2V This represents each square on the Oscilloscope as 1 or 2 volts You can count the number of squares to determin
242. he required pulse length period This maintains the servo poppet in the open position allowing the creation of the pulse by the lower end of the pulser De energizing the holding coil releases the clapper from the lower solenoid housing and causes the servo poppet to be forced back down and closes the servo orifice and completes the generation of the mud pulse The Compass pulser is designed to drop in place of the GE Tensor pulser and therefore operates similar to the design The Compass pulser also consists of an oil filled pulser end and an electronic driver section similar to the GE Tensor system However the COMPASS pulser uses a stepper motor as the driver to actuate the servo poppet in the creation of the mud pulse A stepper motor is designed to rotate in steps around as energy is pulsed to it during operation A small capacitor stores energy to be sent to the motor in measured sequences and amounts These energy transmissions allow the motor to rotate precisely The energy transmissions are controlled by a small processor to ensure the exact timing and amount of rotation This control allows the mechanism to rotate the shaft connected to the servo poppet an exact amount to allow the servo poppet to open at a precise measure and allow flow through the servo orifice The stepper motor is then reversed with the same precise actuation to close and complete the pulse sequence The lower end of both pulsers is comprised
243. hen reviewing the data at a future time This is the main history file It stores all of the data sent from the receiver It includes timestamps for all of the data and it will store everything in this file while this program is open This file may be created for each day or every run in the preferences window This file will contain all of the received survey data The data will be stored in tab delimited columns Each column will have a header of the data type in that column Should the received survey data contain different information than the previous survey a new line with the data headers will appear in the file Each of the header lines will always be preceded by an empty line You may view this data in any text editing software or import it into a data sheet program btraw This file records the voltage reading from the pressure transducer These files are necessary to review any problems you may be having with the receiver pumps or the tool They are separated into files each time the pumps are established as being on You may stop recording this from the preferences window if you uncheck the Save Pressure Files to Disk This file can be viewed in the Bench Tree File Grapher program ftr This file contains the filtered output from the BTR in PSI units The data is recorded at 10 Hz to represent the pressure pulses This is most useful when analyzing the raw files for pump behavior and the effects on
244. hing OM package The Electronics Strongback contains the power supply that controls the power throughout the probe and the microprocessor that contains all of the firmware to operate the probe and all of the calibration data for the OM package These three units operate in unison to make up the Directional Module The integrity of the system must be maintained to assure survey accuracy and continued quality service Technicians in the shop and operators in the field should regularly perform the MWDRoll procedure see the following pages MWDRoll procedure is included 151 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual in this manual and the Operations Manual The results of the MWDRoll procedure will test the calibration integrity of the module to insure that the system is providing accurate survey data and performance It will also indicate whether any of the six sensors in the module may be defective or failed Ideally the test should be run before and after each run in the hole The maintenance technician should also maintain a file on each module and perform a roll test in the shop prior to shipping the tool out to each job In addition to the MWDRoll test all technicians should conduct a Ringout test see the following pages when the system returns to the shop This test will inform the technician of any developing problems with the electrical integrity of the module In case of any concerns with the data from the Ringout test
245. housing socket 7 10 40 Finish installing the screws in a cross pattern to hand tight 7 10 41 Loosen the 2 mounting screws on the servo poppet with 1 2 turn 7 10 42 Engage the test tip with the screwdriver 7 10 43 Pre set the up hole end of the clapper gap to 1 10 with a 1 10 gauge 7 10 44 Rotate the screwdriver counter clockwise until you feel the clapper grip the gauge 7 10 45 Slowly rotate the screwdriver counter clockwise until the servo poppet screws sit squarely in the nearest window 7 10 46 Tighten the servo poppet screws to finger tight 7 10 47 Push the test tip to manually move the clapper 7 10 48 Power on the solder iron 7 10 49 Measure 2 of the orange wire cut and discard excess 7 10 50 Bend the orange wire in half 24 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 10 51 Slide 1 section of heat shrink tubing 3 16 diameter onto the doubled over orange wired completely covering it 7 10 52 Heat and shrink the tubing evenly with the hot air gun 7 10 53 Clip the excess heat shrink tubing 7 10 54 Remove any flakes of potting material from the top of the F4 connector 7 10 55 Insert the solenoid wires through either window in the solenoid retainer 7 10 56 Measure 3 of each wire cut and discard the excess 25 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 10 57 Prepare the solenoid wires for soldering with hooked ends 7 10 58 Group the wires into 3 bundles according to the 3
246. ibed by spherical harmonics but they look very different A circular polarized dipole is described as a superposition of two linear dipoles The EM tool generates voltage differences between the drillstring sections in the pattern of very low frequency 2 12Hz waves The data is imposed on the waves through digital modulation Modulation A technique employed in telecommunications transmission systems whereby an electromagnetic signal the modulating signal is encoded into one or more of the characteristics of another signal the carrier signal to produce a third signal the modulated signal whose properties are matched to the characteristics of the medium over which it is to be transmitted The encoding preserves the original modulating signal in that it can be recovered from the modulated signal at the receiver by the process of demodulation The main purpose of modulation is to overcome any inherent incompatibilities between the electromagnetic properties of the modulating signal and those of the transmission medium Of primary importance in this respect is the spectral distribution of power in the modulating signal relative to the passband of the medium Modulation provides the means for shifting the power of the modulating signal to a part of the frequency spectrum where the medium s transmission characteristics such as its attenuation interference and noise level are favorable Two forms of modulation are generally distinguished alth
247. ike to have positive pressure in the system personally like a little pressure My process is as follows a When done with the oil fill put the Pulser on the ground supports pressure the system up to 30 PSI again and hold it for a few seconds b then release the pressure and let it bleed back down to 0 PSI C The next step is to remove the oil fill plug d Within about 5 seconds of removing the plug during which hang up the Pulser fill line like to have the plug in place You will get a little leakage during this time e The last step is to use a ball driver dull point and feel the tautness of the compensator membrane like to be able to feel a nice spongy resistance when it is pressed on gently f Attach the driver to the oil fill section install the pressure barrel bulkhead etc 9 Perform a test of the activation on the flow switch as previously explained h Mark on the outer tube the date the fill was done i Complete the Maintenance Report for that particular Pulser and file by asset number Green tag the Pulser put on the Ready rack or into the appropriate Kit Hopefully you have been able to stay with me through this long dialog think that if you took the time to read this once and you have done a few oil fills on your own you will appreciate the time spent on this important aspect of servicing the tool If this process or your version that accomplishes the same results in a few good run
248. ill ONLY function properly when operating from the DOS Only mode In Windows 95 perform the following steps to boot the DOS system without starting the Windows system Note This procedure will NOT work on Windows 98 Windows NT or Windows 2000 1 Select Shut Down 2 Click Restart the Computer 3 Click Yes 4 Wait for the beep and the Starting Windows indication 5 Press the F8 key within 1 second from the beep 6 Select Command Prompt Only and press the Enter key CAUTION The HLOC HLSC control parameter values are determined and set in the qMPRx D3 program at the factory for DRT units ordered with and licensed for Depth Tracking capability If upgrading from versions PRIOR to V01 40 please be sure to record these values before proceeding with the upgrade procedure and re enter them at the conclusion of the procedure IF LOST please contact GE Power Systems ask for repair maintenance and request the values of these parameters Please have the unit serial number readily available These steps are not required for updating systems containing 01 40 or later Connecting the System Hardware Components Setup the system as you normally would with the Driller s Remote Terminal DRT configured to the Safe Area Supply Box SASB and the Survey Electronics module configured to the Programming Cable Connect a PC containing the correct version of qMWD software to the qBus cab
249. ill expose the Bulkhead which is held in place with two socket cap screws Step 3 Remove the screws and set the castle effects on top of each other This will give you the desired space to free the 10 pin connector from the bulkhead With the castles on top of each other a large ball driver can be used to apply pressure to the 10 pin connector Make sure the pressure is applied to the socket portion of the connector and not the pins to avoid damage to the pins Once removed set the Bulkhead aside and remove the Split Shells and set these aside 56 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Again using the Gearwrenches remove the Interhousing Module and set aside Step 5 Using the Gearwrenches break and remove the Driver Barrel and set aside At this point the Pulser Driver will be exposed Step 6 Remove the four socket cap screws holding the Pulser Driver on the Snubber Shock and set the Driver aside Inspect the Snubber Shock for any wear The Snubber Shock is critical as this is the component that protects the Pulser Driver from vibration The molding should be such that the brass pin does not make contact with the body of the Snubber Shock Step 7 Using the Gearwrench break the rest of the connections on the tool Once this is done the oil fill portion of the tool will be ready for disassembly Before taking the oil fill portion of the tool into the Tech Shop remove the Top Oil Fill plug and drain the oi
250. ime you change the tool programming you are required to unplug the transducer cable SASP Surface System Program the Remote Terminal first without the tool connected Unplug the two main cables to program and high side of the tool string Reconnect the main cables to tap test the tool When in operation make sure the rig floor display is electrically isolated from the rig or electrical interference from the rig may interfere with the operation This can be done by using a nonconductive case to hang the rig floor display on the rig CABLING Antenna Cable 600 or 200m Cable 300 or 100m e Transducer cable ISOLATION SUB GAP SUB 22 Chapter 5 Operations Manual The Isolation Sub is connected on top the UBHO Sub in the BHA assembly An Isolation Sub ohm measurement should be performed before picking up tools This is done by putting the Isolation Sub on wooden blocks for insulation from ground and measuring across the gap with a multimeter set to ohms This prevents any false reading from whatever the sub is lying on A measurement of greater than 1000 ohms should be seen If the reading is less clear away any debris around the isolation area inside and out and measure again It is normal to see the resistance climb slowly to an open circuit If the sub still reads under 1000 ohms do not run it Visually inspect the annular washer for any cracks or pitting If cracks are observed do not run the gap sub If pitt
251. imple cases is the length between the measurement electrodes divided by the area In the general case the resistivity is the electric field divided by the current density and depends on the frequency of the applied signal A log of the resistivity of the formation expressed in ohm m The resistivity can take a wide range of values and therefore for convenience is usually presented on a logarithmic scale from for example 0 2 to 2000 ohm m The resistivity log is fundamental in formation evaluation because hydrocarbons do not conduct electricity while all formation waters do Therefore a large difference exists between the resistivity of rocks filled with hydrocarbons and those filled with formation water Clay minerals and a few other minerals such as pyrite also conduct electricity and reduce the difference Some measurement devices such as induction and propagation resistivity logs may respond more directly to conductivity but are presented in resistivity 9 Chapter 1 Introduction B 3 PRESSURE WHILE DRILLING ANNULAR PRESSURE Annular pressure requires the Pressure Stinger and pressure Muleshoe sleeve The Muleshoe sleeve is seated into the UBHO Sub and is oriented to the high side of the mud motor Modified set screws with a ported hole in the middle are used to tighten up the Muleshoe sleeve to the UBHO Sub An alternate method is to use a UBHO Sub that is ported When setting the Muleshoe sleeve to the high side use soli
252. in Fle Edt Help VD ma 3 2 1 Changing The Curve Scale E Change Scde 7 v Filler Enabled Filter Settings Properties Right click the curve description in the title block of the track and select Change Scale Delete Curve 250 Enter the Lower Limit left side value and the Upper Limit Lower livit 5 right side value and press OK Upos limit fis Cancel 137 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 3 2 2 Adjusting The Curve Filtering To adjust the filtering of the curve either right click the curve description in the title block of the track and select Filter Settings in the popup menu or click on the funnel icon located in the toolbar above 1 1 494 8 CXS This will produce the filter settings form with slider to adjust the ls amount of filtering to apply I 3 2 3 Curve Properties Curve Properties xj To adjust the curve color and line width right click the curve description in the title block of the track and select Properties in the popup menu that appears Cancel 138 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 3 2 4 Changing Plot Scaling The depth scaling of the entire plot can be adjusted by either using the pull down selector in the toolbar or by clicking the zoom in and out icons also located on the toolbar File Edit Help amp Select the desired depth sca
253. inal Mode by pressing Shift F9 Set the Baud Rate to 9600 by pressing F6 Baud softkey Switch to Second Menu by pressing F10 Next Menu 10 Idle the qBus by pressing F5 Idle Press rapidly 3 4 times minimum 11 Invoke the Chat Mode by pressing F7 12 At the prompt enter the Link address by typing 09 The node selected will return a command prompt 13 Invoke Boot Mode by typing CCod 11 Boot and pressing the Enter key If successful then the target processor will NOT return a prompt 14 Exit qTalk by pressing F1 DO NOT PRESS ANY OTHER KEYS Insure that you are in directory CAqMWD qDRT D3 then proceed to the next step in these instructions 15 Load the qMIX 11 Operating Parameters Receiver Operating Parameters and the qMWD Receiver Program by typing ProgAll and pressing the Enter key 16 Turn the system power Off and then On again 7 8 9 Loading Software To The qMWD Transmitter MPTx Node 20 1 Switch to the C qMWD qMPTx directory The data in this file will load into the processor used for the encoding routines in the qMWD transmitter 2 Run qTalk by typing qTalk2 c qTalk should b in your path 3 Press F4 to invoke the Host Mode 4 Press Shift F5 to interrogate all nodes on the network Be sure that nodes MPRx05 MPTx20 and 09 all respond if they are connected Should one of these nodes not respond check all of the connections and repeat this step Note You
254. indow To view the print preview window again 1 Click the Close button 2 Click the File menu 3 Click the Print Export Report item Bug Reporting Please contact GE Power Systems if you find a recurring problem in MWDRoll32 First make sure you can reproduce the problem then email the following details to william ryer ps ge com Your name and email address for correspondence Description of the recurring problem including any relevant information Steps needed to reproduce the problem Details of the computer system running MWDRoll32 Any additional information Please include as many details as possible in your email Magnetic Declination and other Magnetic Information The declination and other magnetic information for your geographic location can be found on the Internet site for the National Geophysical Data Center of NOAA The address is www ngdc noaa gov seg potfld geomag html Click the heading Magnetic Declination Enter your latitude and longitude to obtain the declination and other information For assistance in determining your correct latitude and longitude click the link on this web page to either the U S Gazetteer or the Getty Thesaurus MWD Electronics Calibration Test SN 2004 Created on 08 18 00 Roll Test Header Unique Test Identifier 254 Notes Software Test Operator Name SAM Site Location Mag2 Tool Serial Number 2004 City Austin Tool Bias Multiplier State Province TEXAS Start Dat
255. indow that you filled out to create this roll test Correct any data that you want to change and then click on the button to save the data Printing Test Results You may print any of the test results while viewing the test results page by clicking on the File menu and then clicking on Print You will be given the option to choose your printer from the new window that is displayed You may also print the results of a currently open roll test by clicking on the Roll Test menu in the main window and then clicking on the Print Test item This will send the results straight to the printer without having to view the results page Viewing Data Scatter Plots While viewing the test results from a roll test you can also show the acquired data on graphical plots To show the graphical plot window select Show Scatter Plots from the File menu This will open a new window showing five different graphs The top three graphs Dip Angle Magnetic Field and Gravity will have data from all three azimuth directions plotted on the same graph The bottom two graphs Azimuth and Inclination will display the data from individual azimuth directions on each graph Click on the tabs to change the displayed direction data The white areas in each graph represent the maximum valid spread of the data for each measurement type If the data is out of range it will be displayed in the grey area and the background of the graph will turn light red The numbers on the
256. indows qTalk contains one small single line window above three large main windows The single line Message contents window allows the operator to choose messages to send to the systems selecting from numerous hard coded options or entering mnemonics as listed at the end of this chapter The upper large window Heceived Messages displays all messages sent and received in a constantly scrolling fashion The operator can pause the scrolling by clicking the Pause button The middle large window Sent Messages records all messages sent by the PC either from the program QDTW3z2 or those issued by the operator via the Message 40 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Contents window The lower large window Responses records all responses from the respective nodes that respond to queries sent from the PC As long as the qServer is booted these messages and responses will be saved in the scrolling fashion F Off AvQF 0 3 Of E AvOF F DTTT 960619124206 D4EP Ret 34 Pups AvOF E SRI 20026 gt ave 7 Dip GrvT Te __ The operator can send queries or commands to particular node addresses by selecting destination labels or destination addresses The operator can perform most commands with the wild card selection and the open label The Pause button pauses the scrolling of messages making inspection o
257. information about the formation which is being drilled Formation properties Many MWD tools either on their own or in conjunction with separate Logging While Drilling tools can take measurements of formation properties At the surface these measurements are assembled into a log similar to one obtained by wireline logging LWD Logging While Drilling tools are able to measure a suite of geological characteristics including density porosity resistivity pseudo caliper inclination at the drill bit ABI magnetic resonance and formation pressure The MWD tool allows these measurements to be taken and evaluated while the well is being drilled This makes it possible to perform Geosteering or Directional Drilling based on measured formation properties rather than simply drilling into a preset target Most MWD tools contain an internal Gamma Ray sensor to measure natural Gamma Ray values This is because these sensors are compact inexpensive reliable and can take measurements through unmodified drill collars Other measurements often require separate Logging While Drilling tools which communicate with the MWD tools downhole through internal wires 11 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation DOWNHOLE SENSOR PROCESSOR MODULE Compass Tensor MWD Directional Modules are modular assemblies used in downhole drilling applications where minimal power supply is available while providing accurate and stable survey measurements The assembl
258. ing has occurred talk to your MWD coordinator for confirmation of running it Never torque the Isolation area of the sub Make sure the tool gap lines up within 6 inches of the Isolation Gap Sub To measure the distance of the tool alignment Measure the inner shoulder of the UBHO Sub e g 27 Measure Muleshoe sleeve up to the wear cuff e g 14 Subtract the distance 27 14 13 Measure the length of the face of the Gap Sub to the gap area e g 20 Add the distance of gap from top of Muleshoe sleeve 13 20 33 The Transmitter tool gap is 30 from the wear shoulder Subtract distance tool gap sits from Gap Sub 33 30 3 NS lt lt lt 4 6 228 Chapter 5 Operations Manual TOOL SPACING ISOLATION SUB GAP SUB ALIGNMENT IS KEY e 6 0 alignment Arc over currents through mud Gap Sub With Correct Alignment EM Transmitter Arc Over Insulated Tool Gap Arc Over Life Insulated Gap Arc Over Arc Over Arc Over Incorrect Alignment Degrades Signal amp Wastes Battery Sub With Incorrect Alignment EM Transmitter Insulated Gap Arc Over Arc Over Arc Over from misalignment Arc Over Arc Over 24 Arc Over Insulated Tool Gap 1 Arc Over from misalignment Chapter 5 Operations Manual ARRIVING ON LOCATION Once on location introduce yourself to the company representativ
259. into a narrow beam This can be done either by the addition of more antenna elements or by placing a large reflector generally parabolic in shape behind the antenna The production of a narrow beam requires an antenna array or alternatively a reflector that is large in width and height compared with a wavelength The very narrow and concentrated beam that can be achieved by a laser is made possible by the extremely short wavelength of the radiation as compared with the cross sectional dimensions of the radiating system 29 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation EI radial micis A inn m i o 2 lt hie 9 w s SU NN PS ie ae Absolute permeability of the medium permittivity of the medium y wavelength gt Configuration of electric and magnetic fields about a short vertical antenna E electric field intensity H magnetic field intensity absolute permeability of the medium permittivity of the medium y wavelength The ground is a reasonably good but not perfect conductor hence the actual propagation over the surface of the Earth will show a more rapid decrease of field strength than that for a perfect conductor Irregularities and obstructions may interfere long range transmission the spherical shape of the Earth is important Inhomogeneities in the atmosphere refract the wave somewhat For long range transmission the ionized region high in t
260. ion Picking casing and coring points Uranium U Count rates are time dependent and are thus less accurate at high ROP s The drill collar absorbs gamma rays differently than the housing of a wireline gamma ray tool making exact comparisons of wireline and MWD gamma ray logs difficult Drill cuttings and drilling fluids with high potassium K content can have effects on the MWD gamma probe 5 Chapter 1 Introduction MWD GAMMA TOOL LAYOUT Option 1 Gamma Tool configuration should be run in the vertical hole sections and through the curves 6 Option 2 Gamma Tool configuration should be run in the through the lower curved section and in the lateral sections Magnetic Spacing is an extremely important factor to consider when designing the gamma tool configuration Check all magnetic spacing charts to insure the proper spacing from the motor and from the upper drill string Chapter 1 Introduction 2 RESISTIVITY Technical Data Sheet Platform Compass Mud Pulse Platform 89mm or 3 72 Collar Sizes 121mm or 4 24 165mm or 6 72 203mm or 8 Data Real time as well as memory Resistivity curves with option of gamma inclination and ROP as requested Curves Resistivity curves are not bore hole compensated 1 Frequency 2 Depths of investigation Measurements up to 2000 ohms The platform is the Compass Mud Pulse which is fully Applications retrievable This sa
261. ion and the tool should not be run until the cause is identified and remedied NOTE Poor readings are often caused by dirty connections between the tool and break out box Clean and re check before tearing tool down TOOL HOUSING 146 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual BATTERY CONTINUITY CHECK 1 Hook up break out boxto both ends of battery with switches in the BREAK position 2 Check for continuity with the Fluke meter on and leads in Black plug 1 and Red plug 1 3 A reading of less than 1 0 Ohms should be observed and an audible beep heard 4 Move the red lead to red plug 2 and the black lead to black plug 3 again check for less than 1 0 Ohms 5 Do not check between Red plug 3 and Black plug 2as the battery will be seen there NOTE To facilitate running 2 batteries line 2 and 3 are switched internally in the battery 6 Continue checking between red plug 4 and black plug 4 and so on to plug 10 NOTE All readings should be less than 1 0 Ohms and an audible beep should be heard if using the diode check position on the Fluke meter If an Open is observed in any of these checks the tool should not be run until the cause is identified and remedied Make sure the connection between battery and break out boxis clean and a good connection 15 made 147 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual BATTERY VOLTAGE CHECK OUT PROCEDURE 1 Install break out boxin the top of the battery with all switches in the b
262. ip Angle 54 9 Accelerometer 2 0 0024 G High Side 214 3 Magnetometer X 0 6313 Gauss Azimuth Angle 264 4 Magnetometer Y 0 2386 Gauss Inclination Angle 89 86 Magnetometer 2 0 0364 Gauss Magnetic Toolface 69 3 Battery 29 95 Volts Timeout Update 15 1 Temperature 22 C Sensor Derived Data Total Acceleration The overall acceleration due to gravity Total Magnetic Field The overall magnetic field Dip Angle The angle between the tool and the earth s surface High Side The angle calculated from the gravitational tool face Azimuth Angle The horizontal angle of the tool Inclination Angle The angle with respect to vertical Magnetic Tool Face The angle calculated from the magnetic tool face Timeout Update The number to the left of the slash indicates the time before communications will timeout The number to the right of the slash indicates the last refresh interval Sensor Acquired Data Accelerometer X Y amp Z Displays corrected gravity values from the accelerometer sensor of the MWD tool Magnetometer X Y amp Z Displays corrected magnetic field values from the magnetometer sensor of the MWD tool Battery Displays battery power in volts Temperature Displays the temperature of the tool in degrees Celsius Header Information and Miscellaneous Notes Display The Header Information and Miscellaneous Notes displays present the user with information pertaining to the start
263. isms for the creation of magnetic dipoles are by current loops or quantum mechanical spin since the existence of magnetic monopoles has never been experimentally demonstrated 18 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Real time evolution of the electric field of an oscillating electric dipole The dipole is located at 60 60 in the graph oscillating at 1 rad s 0 16 Hz in the vertical direction A physical dipole consists of two equal and opposite point charges literally two poles Its field at large distances i e distances large in comparison to the separation of the poles depends almost entirely on the dipole moment as defined above A point electric dipole is the limit obtained by letting the separation tend to 0 while keeping the dipole moment fixed The field of a point dipole has a particularly simple form and the order 1 term in the multipole expansion is precisely the point dipole field Although there are no known magnetic monopoles in nature there are magnetic dipoles in the form of the quantum mechanical spin associated with particles such as electrons although the accurate description of such effects falls outside of classical electromagnetism A theoretical magnetic point dipole has a magnetic field of the exact same form as the electric field of an electric point dipole A very small current carrying loop is approximately a magnetic point dipole the magnetic dipole moment of such a loop is the product
264. itch Attach the test box and as illustrated in Test Setup Diagram and set the switch to a corresponding resistor value Tap the flow switch to activate the flow switch and continue tapping the tool long enough for it to go through the full sequence to the point the tool would have pulsed up the resistivity value After this point the resistivity value will be stored in the directional modules memory At this point you can stop tapping the tool and plug the programming cable into the tool and query the generic value you programmed into the tool If you sent up GV2 you must divide the value by 13 4 to get the resistor value If you sent up GV3 then the value should match within plus or minus 1 5 ohms You can then repeat this process with different resistor values to verify multiple readings 8 Chapter 6 Resistivity GRT Theory of Operation The resistivity tool emits an electromagnetic signal from two poles and a voltage is measured at the receiving end Current is measured at the transmitting end to derive resistance Refer to the illustration labelled Electromagnetic Current Flow An internal calculation for resistivity is calculated by multiplying the resistance reading with 13 40580417 The operation of the tool is as follows Once the flow is turned on a 30 second timer begins counting down If the flow turns off before the timer is done counting down it rests until flow is turned on again Once flow has been turned on for a continuous
265. ization of the tool within the ID of the non magnetic drill collar 4 The use of the centralizers also provides side wall shock and vibration absorption to protect the tool These devices filter out the low frequency vibration energy transmitted through the BHA from the action of the bit and motor and rotational forces encountered during drilling Drill Collars UBHO Compass utilizes non magnetic drill collars of different OD sizes and different ID sizes dependent upon the size of the hole being drilled and the amount of fluid flow required for the drilling The size of the ID of the collar is extremely important to prevent severe erosion of the MWD tool in the extreme fluid velocities experienced in the hole during drilling The UBHO Universal Bottom Hole Orientation sub is connected to the lower end of the non magnetic drill collar and contains the muleshoe sleeve with the signal orifice Prior to attaching the UBHO to the collar the muleshoe sleeve is inserted into the UBHO and rotated to align the key with the maximum bend on the mud motor The muleshoe sleeve is then anchored in the UBHO with three set screws to insure that the MWD tool aligns with the mud motor The muleshoe sleeve also contains the interchangeable main signal orifice These orifices are interchangeable to different ID sizes dependent upon the flow expected downhole The Compass MWD system is the most versatile MWD system in use today when it comes to collar selection
266. k the drilling depth of the well and track the addition of joints of drill pipe as drilling progresses 9 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation HEAVE SENSOR The heave sensor is a depth adjusting device that measures the movement of floating rigs caused by tides and rough seas It compensates the depth measurement for the movement of the rig floor The use of these sensors individually or in combination with each other allow the operator to maintain accurate measurements on the rig site in relation to the data being gathered by the MWD system All of the data gathered from the system can be stored on the PC using the available GE Power Systems software programs This data can then be used to create reports for survey calculations and formation evaluation These reports include survey calculations well plots and formation log plots Directional Information MWD tools are generally capable of taking directional surveys in real time The tool uses accelerometers and magnetometers to measure the inclination and azimuth of the wellbore at that location and they then transmit that information to the surface With a series of surveys at appropriate intervals anywhere from every 30ft ie 10m to every 500 ft the location of the wellbore can be calculated MWD tools are extremely complex pieces of high tech electronics By itself this information allows operators to prove that their well does not cross into areas that they are not auth
267. l The Top Oil fill plug consists of the housing pigtail female Bebro and the snubber shock Step 8 Remove the Solenoid Housing and again drain any remaining oil At this point the solenoid will be exposed Wipe any remaining oil off of the tool and remove any loose Kapton Tape 87 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 9 Stand the Pulser on the bench and remove the retaining ring that is holding the Male Bebro in place This will free up the Male Bebro and it can be pulled loose Be cautious that the wires are not stretched excessively You may have to untwist the Solenoid wires in order to loosen the Male Bebro Leave the Male Bebro hanging on the wires attached to the Solenoid Step 10 It will now be necessary to remove the Solenoid Prior to doing this it will necessary to remove the Servo Poppet Assembly This will allow the Solenoid Shaft to drop down and expose a hole in the Shaft that is used to break the Solenoid Shaft free from the Spring Shaft Lay the Pulser down on tool stands to remove the Servo Poppet Assembly The assembly can be removed most easily by removing the top two screws in the Poppet Assembly This will allow the back shell of the Poppet Assembly to drop off Pushing the Clapper on the Solenoid back or inserting a screw driver will allow the Servo Poppet Assembly to be easily removed and set aside 58 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 11 Set the Pulser in the u
268. l guide to seat the MWD tool into a specific orientation to measure the toolface orientation with reference to the toolface of the MWD probe The software design also allows the operator to measure any offset of the muleshoe to the toolface of the bottom hole assembly Second the muleshoe contains the main orifice into which the pulser main signal poppet projects to create the pressure pulse Five different orifice sizes are used in the 6 gt and 4 3 muleshoe sleeves 1 28 1 35 1 40 1 50 and 1 60 OD The gt muleshoe sleeve has three options for orifice sizes 1 21 1 23 and 1 25 OD The main orifices are easily changed on the job site to accommodate the various flow rates that may be encountered through the course of a job Muleshoe subs are specially designed and cut to receive and anchor the muleshoe sleeves The subs are designed to match the mating threads of the collars being used We strongly recommend cutting the subs from a non magnetic material to insure adequate spacing from the magnetometers in the MWD tool 5 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation B TOOL Electromagnetic telemetry EM Tool EM Telemetry is a method of transmitting data from a measurement while drilling MWD assembly that resides just above an oil well drill bit The MWD assembly may contain various measuring instruments such as a Gamma Ray Tool Resistivity Tool Directional Survey Instrument or others EM Telemetry is capable o
269. lar Pressure optional E g GV1 13P Mode 4 Re Sync option Add Inc AZM screws prior to landing tool Replace with ported set screws once tool is seated Vibration Monitoring optional e 0 35g e GV6 Z axis bit bounce e GV7 x y axis pipe whirl lateral vibration 10 Chapter 1 Introduction 11 Chapter 1 Introduction 2 THEORY OPERATION A MUD PULSE B EM C THEORY OF CODING amp DECODING A PULSE This is the most common method of data transmission used by MWD Measurement While Drilling tools Downhole a valve is operated to restrict the flow of the drilling mud slurry according to the digital information to be transmitted This creates pressure fluctuations representing the information The pressure fluctuations propagate within the drilling fluid towards surface where they are received from pressure sensors On surface the received pressure signals are processed by computers to reconstructs the transmitted information The technology is available in three varieties positive pulse negative pulse and continuous wave Positive Pulse Positive Pulse tools briefly close and open the valve to restrict the mud flow within the drill pipe This produces an increase in pressure that can be seen at surface Line codes are used to represent the digital information in form of pulses Negative Pulse Negative pulse tools briefly open and close the valve to release mud from insid
270. lates data including INC and AZM etc The Centralizer Interconnect Assembly provides electrical connection between each module and contact to the drill string Bow springs should be tight so they make good contact to the drill collar Poor contact can cause weak or no signal The Gamma Module can be added to the tool string above the Transmitter Module and operated using the existing gamma software IMPORTANT Before starting make sure there are no shorts from any lines to the housing of all modules except for the Compass Transmitter This can be done by ringing out the modules with a break out box Since we are making a dipole antenna with the tool string the EM signal may interfere with the operation of the tool Assemble the tool string with the normal MWD setup procedure The Compass Transmitter Module is placed on the bottom of the tool string and should be assembled first Do not have the programming cable plugged in the tool string when tightening the tools or tap testing It will turn the transmitter on and will lock up the Qbus no communications and if the programming cable is shielded voltage may travel from the barrel to the surface equipment and may result in damage to the equipment Do not ground the SAI or any surface system Do not have the transducer cable connected to the FI Receiver when programming the tools Connect the transducer cable from the Receiver to the Surface system once all programming is complete Every t
271. ld be output to the display and that only one error output is possible NB The No Boot switch This prevents the program from attempting the transfer the bootloader programs to the target processor It is only used when the bootloader programs have already been transferred and are running This switch causes gProg 11 to proceed directly to programming the file filename exe specified on the command line This option is typically used when programming a processor with multiple files and prevents the need to repeatedly reset the processor in boot mode 58 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software BO The Boot Only switch This option is used when it is desired to load only the bootloader qProg 11 will terminate after the last boot stage is loaded after the 1st stage if the 2nd stage is not specified PC XX The Program Config switch This option is used to program the 68HC11 configuration register The processor must be in the Bootstrap mode See the section entitled Invoking Boot Mode If only is typed the default value specified for the target is programmed If PC XX is used the hex value XX is programmed B1 path filename ext The 1st stage bootloader override switch This switch causes qProg 1 1 to replace the default 1st stage bootloader with the file specified the file must be an s19 type file B2 path filename ext The 2nd stage bootloader override switch This switch causes qProg 1 1 to
272. le In this situation the downhole tool MPTx and the DRT with the integral MWD receiver MPRX are all connected to the system and can communicate through qTalk Note If you are using a Flow Simulation Box insure that the simulated flow control is set to Flow Off 66 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Loading Software qMWD Receiver MPRx Node 05 Switch to the C IqMWDIqMPRx D3 directory The data in this file will load into the processor used for the decoding routines in the qMWD receiver Run qTalk by typing qTalk2 If the string c is in your Path in the Autoexec bat file it will boot automatically Press F4 invoke the Host Mode Press Shift F5 to interrogate all nodes on the network Be sure that at least node MPRx05 responds For Versions BEFORE 01 40 record the variables HLOC and Query the labels via qTalk and reenter the values after upgrading the software version Invoking the Boot Mode for the qMWD Receiver MPRx05 Follow these instructions implicitly 1 Run qTalk by typing qTalk2 C qTalk should be in the path If it is not go to the qTalk directory CAqTalk and type qtalk2 2 Switch To Terminal Mode by pressing Shift F9 3 Set the Baud Rate to 9600 by pressing F6 Baud softkey 4 Switch to Second Menu by pressing F10 Next Menu 5 Idle the qBus by pressing F5 Idle Press rapidly 3 4 times minimum 6 Invoke the Chat Mode by pressing F7
273. le Shot 1 a Toolface 7 21 Gauss 17 357 50 30 10 180 60 177 90 50 60 0 40 18 Na 44 30 90 10 180 60 224 60 50 60 0 49 18 Na 85 60 20 20 18060 265 90 59 60 0 49 20 130 50 20 20 180 60 310 90 58 60 0 48 21 175 70 30 10 18060 356 10 50 60 0 49 22 220 80 90 10 18060 4110 50 60 0 48 23 271 00 20 00 18060 9140 58 60 0 48 24 318 30 30 00 180 60 138 60 50 50 0 40 Minimum 44 30 90 00 18060 41 10 5350 0493 Maximum 357 50 30 20 150 50 35510 0434 Spread 313 20 020 0 00 31500 2818 0001 Vertical Shot Bad High Side Inclination Azimuth Magnetic Dip Angle Magnetic Field Shot 9 e Toolface 7 e Gauss 25 12810 0 30 2130 155 70 50 60 0 48 26 12790 0 30 27 50 155 70 59 50 0 49 25 12810 0 30 2T 30 155 70 59 60 0 49 Spread 0 00 0 20 50 aio 2000 Roll Test Summary Specification Specification 5 4 Limit Minlrusm Maximum Spread Dip Angle 7 1 2 58 50 5080 0 10 Yos Magnetic Flaki Gauss 0007 0493 0 484 0 001 Yos Gravitational Feld 2 0012 1 001 1 003 0 002 Yos North East South Spread Spread Spread Inclination 0 2 0 20 0 10 0 20 You Azimuth 7 0 4 0 10 0 10 0 00 Yes 90 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Magnetic Fiekl Gravity 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 002 1 003 0 001 Gravity 1 00 1 00 Roll Test Specification Evaluation MWDRoll32 has determined that the MWD tool is calibrated and accurate enough to meet GE
274. libration is complete the current block height is displayed on this screen for verification 2 2 5 Hookload Calibration If selected the hookload sensor can be used to determine whether the slips or in or out at any point in time Without this option the user must manually insert and remove the slips in order to track bit and hole depths To properly use this method of automatic slips detection the hookload weights must be calibrated To calibrate the hookload sensor 120 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Set minimum V aightoxt 000 Count Owreng 2572 em With the block hanging without any drill string weight press the Set button and enter the weight measured on the drill floor weight indicator and the counts read on the depth encoder box 000 115 Owren 52578 Cancel Lift the drill string out of the slips press the Set button and enter the weight measured and the counts read on the depth encoder box Set Chrresheld weight value Thrashald waight X1 000 threshold weight the weight at which the Data Logger assumes that the slips have been inserted is automatically calculated The user can optionally override this calculation and enter their own Upon completion of calibration the current hookload is displayed on this screen for verification 21 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 2 2 6 WITS Setup In ord
275. ling from the pull down list Or use the zoom icons to x i d adjust the depth scaling 100 100 10 100 3 3 Adding Text Markers Text markers or comments can be added to the plot by simply right clicking the depth at which the text should be located and entering the text in the form that appears The text entered will appear in the right most track along with the survey data if used REET Text markers can be edited by using the pull down T menu item Edit Text Labels at the top of the window penso Ten Tecate o a Est At this time text markers are not stored and will have to be re entered for each plot operation 139 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software data on the header page of the plot can be edited by iei Bs p using the pull down menu item Edit Header RH Job Information Curve gt Couipment Text Lables Run Information There are 3 sections of the header Job Information which can be automatically included when adding a curve and edited afterwards Equipment Data for defining the equipment used for this job and run Run Information for data that identifies many aspects of the run The data entered will not be stored and must be re entered for each plot 4 LAS Builder The job information stored in the E uilder We Trpoc Select the database to read logging data fro
276. lkhead onto the solenoid housing to hand tight 7 11 11 Mark the oil fill plug and the solenoid housing with a permanent marker to identify the hand tight alignment position 7 12 Re check Clapper gap with 3 turn procedure 7 12 1 Lay the partially assembled unit on the test bench next to the Pulser Driver Assembly 201137 with the Driver Snubber Shock Assembly 201528 attached 7 12 2 Plug the male 4 pole connector assembly 201598 into the female 4 pole connector assembly 201599 7 12 3 Connect the 4 pin 6 socket connector on the driver snubber to its mate in the female connector assembly 7 12 4 Connect Pulser Test Unit 203100 to the other end of the driver The HOLD position on the Pulser Test Unit will energize the solenoid for further procedures Note At this point screws should be just loose enough to allow the base to turn on the shaft threads for position adjustment 7 12 5 Thread the base onto the shaft until it bottoms 7 12 6 Energize the solenoid If necessary use a small screwdriver to push the shaft up until the Clapper touches the solenoid housing 7 12 7 Unthread the assembly until the Poppet Tip bottoms out against the Servo Orifice Then re thread the assembly 3 turns plus an additional partial turn if needed to position the screw heads in the nearest window 7 13 Perform Pulser Oil fill Procedure B3 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 2 LOWER END SECTION Miest trot
277. logging to disk type Alt L while running the qTalk W32 window The default qTalk log file name is qW32Talk Log To turn logging off type lt Alt L gt again Care should be taken in generating a qTalk log as these logs tend to grow large very rapidly Notice the Logging windowpane next to the Sent Messages display Com 04EFREXx S Com 4 05 DTD DTTT 05 1 Com 04 KP ROS 31l Pwps Oft Av F 0 24 05 DTTT 909519143742 DTSR 200061 Con 04 KP RS Pup 32 Pups AvOF WComO4PPiro4 43 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Playing Back qTalk Log File To play back a qTalk W32 log file type Alt D from the qTalk window and select the desired log file The default qTalk log file name is qW32Talk Log Playback sends all logged messages to all 32 client programs at a steady rate Typing lt Alt D gt again turns off the playback feature COM Port Access the port used to communicate with the qBus nodes by clicking on the system menu icon the gray and black icon at the top left corner of the qW32Srvr Server window and then selecting the menu item COM Port You must know which COM Port is used to communicate with qBus nodes before you make the change In the case of notebook or laptop computers a PCMCIA card is generally used to communicate with qBus nodes Use the Win95
278. lses are transmitted most significant first In the above example we have chosen to use time slots time resolution intervals equal to one half the pulse width and have allowed for a full pulse width two slot pulse interference gap PIG or recovery time after each pulse These choices were mainly based on earlier modeling and experimental work Marsh Fraser and Holt SPE 17787 1988 One important feature of this method is that we have to find only the best single pulse in a window containing four or eight possible locations for the pulse This feature increases the robustness of the detection process at the expense of data rate and signal efficiency 41 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation 3 Synchronization of the Detection and Decoding Processes with the Transmitted Signals QDT uses either a triple wide pulse or four consecutive single wide pulses followed by three to eight single wide pulses to provide a method of synchronizing the surface equipment to the transmitted data sequences The surface receiver equipment functions by looking first for one received pulse matched to the shape of the triple wide pulse or four consecutive single wide pulses followed by establishing a time base derived from the received positions in time of the three or more single wide pulses The receiver also utilizes a tracking loop that removes clock drift by slowly adjusting the surface timing based on the average location in time of the received pulses
279. lue is received the new value will override the older value These are displayed for all values received since the last synchronization The information is displayed in four columns The first column displays the time the variable value was decoded The second column displays the variable name from the transmission sequence The third column shows the transmitted value The last column shows the quality of the pulses transmitted for that variable The value can be between 1 and 100 with the higher values indicated a better quality If the quality is below a certain threshold the data values will be red to alert the MWD operator of a possible problem View Change Variables Window This window displays variables from the receiver with their current values If you wish to change any of these fill in the box to the right of name and press Enter or click on the Change to button If the value was stored correctly in the receiver it will appear next to the variable name If an incorrect value was entered you will be prompted that the value could not be stored and the correct value range will be displayed These values are separated into two sections The first section contains the basic variables which deal with the pump pressure and pulse heights These can be changed during transmissions without requiring a re synchronization The advanced variables should be changed before synchronization to ensure the correct values are decoded The bottom two value
280. lved In areas with deeper drilling high temperatures and high solids muds getting the tool to work was a hit and miss situation The old vacuum switch got blamed for most of the problems and with the introduction of the EFS the manufacturer thought they had solved the problem Unfortunately this did not turn out to be the case although at shallower depths the failure rate did drop significantly However with depth the tool continues to experience failures These failures and those with the Vacuum switch can almost all be attributed to a bad oil fill Those who have not identified the problem with the oil fill including the manufacturer continue to have problems with reliability ZI Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual The following procedure is the basics is based on using the kit that normally send out with a new purchase or lease The kit is fully assembled on a peg board to speed up the process of getting started This pre assembly is done to minimize the time from receipt of tools till you have an operating Tech Facility Shown below and to the right is an Oil Fill kit typical of what is shipped to the field Not shown are the vacuum pump and a means of pressuring the system It should be noted that there are operators out there doing very well without the pressure part of the package If set up properly a gravity feed is sufficient to get good oil fill Features Pre assembled Polywire Tubing Large 3 8 ID Tubing Lar
281. lypak 7 14 31 Apply Loctite 620 to the outside of the wear sleeve liberally 7 14 32 Apply silicone lubricant to the inside of the housing at the seat of the wear sleeve 7 14 33 Apply silicone lubricant to the O rings on the helix end 37 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 14 34 Install the main spring into the housing 7 14 35 Push and rotate the assembly into the housing until it is fully connected 7 14 36 Place the assembly in a tabletop chain vice with the chain over the middle section 7 14 37 Connect a gear wrench to the poppet housing to hold it in position 7 14 38 Connect a steering tool gear wrench to the helix end to tighten it into position 7 14 39 With the steering tool gear wrench below your waist push the wrench down to tighten Torque this connection to 75 Ib ft 7 14 40 Push the helix end to actuate the spring in and out 7 14 41 Release the setting on the torque wrench to minimum value 7 15 Perform Pulser Force Test Vacuum 7 16 Install Ceramic Tip 7 16 1 Install the pigtail to the solenoid housing 7 16 2 Connect the pulser test cable to the MDM connector on the pigtail 38 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 16 3 Turn the poppet screws 1 of a turn to release the torque of the hand tight procedure 7 16 4 Power on the pulser test box 7 16 5 Set the on time knob to the position to keep the pulser in the hold position 7 16 6 Verify that the p
282. m database is displayed here end EM Der Data logged into the database is listed here Select each data to be included by checking the box on an the left of the data zh Filtering can be used to smooth the data being exported LAS Builder will begin exporting gt at the start depth defined and stop Omer c Umm mE rap exporting when the end depth is puoi m reme Mel reached V The depths of the LAS file can be corrected using the LAS Builder will step the depths entries by survey data stored in the database Measured Depth does this amount Typically the data should be not correct the depths and outputs the LAS data depths stepped by no more that 1 foot intervals as stored in the database This instructs the LAS Builder to produce null values for gaps in data that are larger than this amount Gaps less than this value are filled in using data interpolation 140 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 4 1 File Contents The resulting contents of the LAS file generated by LAS Builder File wittan version Information VERS CMS LOG ASCII STANDARD VERSION 2 0 OME LINE DEPTH STEP INFORMATION Start and end depths and the depth stepping rate are defined in the well information block y name here the well nave WELL FIELD apt 1234 T MBER API 1234 0 SIDE TRACK vo 900
283. m select a previously configured Filename MWD file containing the proper variables to satisfy the tools DOWNhole environment and STORE the configuration to BOTH the DOWNhole Tool and the Driller s Remote Terminal In an attempt to change the configuration of a tool that is pulsing the system may not accept the STORE on the first attempt so try again by storing to BOTH systems until the configuration is accepted Name of Configuration File MWD Align the key slot on the Helix in a straight up position and Zero the Toolface Offset Angle GTFA CORR Print the configuration from the PC and assign a FJILENAME PRN to the printout Down LOAD the configuration from the Surface Receiver and print the configuration and assign a file name Rx PRN to the printout Down LOAD the configuration from the DOWNhole Tool and print the configuration and assign a file name to the printout Compare the three printouts of the configuration on a light table for any discrepancies Insure that the configuration stored to both the tool and the surface receiver the same Then continue Remove the programming plug from the tool and unplug the cable from the SAI Attach the Spear Point Assembly with the third Intermod Conn to the uphole end of the Directional Module Insure that the threaded ring connection is snug and NOT over torqued Note 6 PINS point UPhole and 4 PINS point DOWNhole The DOWNhole tool is now ready to be lo
284. m depth encoder the Begin button and the pompie sc they Begin Calibration Cost _ When to begin calibration of the drum encoder press the Begin Calibration button to proceed The calibration can be canceled at any of the steps following by pressing the Cancel button Lower the block all the wey to the floor and enter the counts Cancel Lower the block all the way to the drill floor and enter the counts read on the depth tracking box block to end of the fret lever Blackheightetendotleyed 125 Counts ol layer Cance Raise the block until the end of the first layer of the drum is reached then enter the block height and the counts read on the encoder box 19 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Dom tneoder Calbrstve Step 25 Raise fa block to end aftha second Inver Black height et end of leyer 428 Counts ctendotleyer2 2754 Em Raise the block until the end of the next layer of the drum is reached then enter the block height and the counts read on the encoder box Drum Encoder Calibration Step Raise te block to end ofthe fed lever Black height et end ot leyer3 57 5 Counts amp endotleyer3 5275 ems Raise the block until the end of the next layer of the drum is reached then enter the block height and the counts read on the encoder box When ca
285. me retrievability is available in the Gen II resistivity package 1 7 8 Used in monels and Probe O D resistivity collar from 3 5 9 5 Fully retrievable sensor package Maximum 150 C 302 F Temperature Tool Power High performance lithium Source batteries Field rebuildable collar Ideal for Collar remote locations including international operations Chapter 1 Introduction Dri Collar Mone Resistivity Subs Resistivity Subs Pony Collar 2 Resistivity Sub2 Resistivity sub1 Pony Collar 1 UBHO Sub Mud Motor Dru Bit Speer Point Transmitter 2 Insulator insulator Receiver 2 camma Battery 1 Directional Unit insulator Insulator Transmitter 1 Pulser Helix Set Screw 8 Chapter 1 Introduction 4 1101101010111 4 lt gt 1 2 EEE a Log c w Gamma RESISTIVITY The ability of a material to resist electrical conduction It is the inverse of conductivity and is measured in ohm m The resistivity is a property of the material whereas the resistance also depends on the volume measured The two are related by a system constant which in s
286. mits while pumps are on 1 Chapter 8 Tool Down Linking from EM to Mud Pulse Down linking cannot happen while tool is transmitting 1 You must pull high Kelly or at a safe place in the hole where pumps can be turned off for up to 8 minutes 2 The tool must complete the two minutes on time flow off after the pumps have been turned off One more minute must happen before tool can be initiated into the downlink sequence You will do this first part with the EM surface equipment first 3 Refer to the diagrams as and example Flow OH Flow Flow Flow Flow ON Flow 1xDLTP 2XDLTP 3xDLTP 4xDLTP 112 DLTP 1 2 DLTP MODE 1 MODE Mode 3 Mode 4 flow off 1 minute min Flow OFF 1 2 DLTP Once Purnps have been turned on leave on for one minute or until it switchs telemtry DLTP command time period 2 Chapter 8 Tool This is an example with the command time period set to 60 seconds Example DLTP 60 Seconds Flow Flow On Aam ins MODE1 MODE2 Mode3 4 flow off 1 Flow Off Flow Off Flow Off Flow Off minute min 60 Sec 120 Sec 180 240 Sec This Flow Off includes 1 30 Sec Once Pumps have been turned on minute after leave on for one minute or until it EM is done switchs telemtry Transmitting From this example after the pumps have been turned on then off then on then off you would leave the pumps off for 240 seconds then turn the pump
287. module End 201635 1 7 8 MWD Battery Barrel Housing 201650 1 7 8 MWD Housing Battery Vent Plug 201845 1 7 8 MWD Thread Protector Male 201505 Common MWD Bulkhead Retainer Top 90 Degree 201506 Common MWD Split Shell 201521 Common MWD Bulkhead Retainer Bottom 45 Degree 201617 Common MWD Snubber Assembly Battery 201645 Common MWD Battery Vent Plug 201991 Common MWD Pigtail Battery AS 011 Common MWD AS 011 O Ring Viton AS 016 Common MWD AS 016 O Ring Viton AS 124 Common MWD AS 124 O Ring Viton AS 127 Common MWD AS 127 O Ring Viton AS 217 Common MWD AS 217 O Ring Viton AS 218 Common MWD AS 218 O Ring Viton AS 220 Common MWD AS 220 O Ring Viton 013 MWD Screw 6 32 x 1 2 SHCS SS SC 014 Common MWD Screw 6 32 x 3 4 SHCS SS E Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 2 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 2 00 1 00 2 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 2 00 2 00 4 00 2 00 4 00 4 00 4 00 SECTION PULSER SOLENOID STYLE HOT HOLE B 1 MANUFACTURING PROCEDURE amp FUNCTIONAL TEST PULSER OIL FILL ASSEMBLY 1 0 SCOPE This document describes satisfactory requirements to manufacture Pulser Oilfilled Assembly EFS part number 201133 and identifies inspection points and or support documentation where required 2 0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS 2 1 SOP 290 15 1 Control of Nonconforming Product 2 2 GE SR QA Manual Section 13 2 3 SOP C 5250 3 Qualification of Inspection and Test Personnel 2 4 SOP 2022 P
288. mp On Time 11 19 59 7 15 5 0 5 1 3 59 53 11 20 24 11 20 24 Clear Clear All The default will display the Pump On Time on RUN base If you would like to display the Pump On time in daily base please click the Daily Button You can also set the New Run here If the run is the same as the old Run the operator can click cancel to exit this dialog box 106 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 22 Clicking 99 will open the following window to display the tool configuration data MWD Tool Confisuration Reader j Receiver and Decoder Settings 1 Current Pulse VVidth Model Setting Pulse Width s Survey Seq Tool Face Seq Survey Sequences BAT2 Inc 12 Panty Azm 12 DipA 12 e MagF 12 Parity Temp 8 e BatV 8 Grav 12 P 2 Inc 12 Parity 12 Temp 8 ECC BatV MagW Parity Inc 12 Parity 12 BatW TmpW Panty Inc 11 Parity Azm 10 Parity DipA 8 Parity MagF 8 Parity Temp 8 Parity BatVV Parity Tool Face Logging Sequences Sequence 1 5 8 8 8 5 8 8 8 Grav 12 Sequence 2 10 8 8 8 10 aTFA 8 P aTFA 8 P BatV 8 P Sequence 3 10 8 aTFA 8 P Temp 8 P 10 8 a TFA 8 P BatV 8 P Sequence 4 10 8 aTFA 8 P Temp 8 P 10
289. mup Time Surface Scale Factor 1 000000 Minimum Sampling Time 1 Maximum Sampling Time 3000 Auto Data Acquisition Auto Acquisition Update Time 10 Auto Output Format On Auto Output Format String ama G 7 Battery Low Voltage Threshold 21 0 Averaging Time 10 Full Scale 41 8 Pump Settings Pumps On Threshold 400 Pumps On Off Evaluation Time 5 Max Pressure Transducer PSI 5000 0 Pressure Transducer Gain ro000 9 Flow Settings Flow Detection Method Switch E Flow On Off Evaluation Time 5 B Invert Flow Switch 10 Pulse Detection Low Pulse Limit High Pulse Limit 150 Pulser Mud Pulse 8 Pump Settings Pump on Threshold set to 200 PSI Pressure Transducer Rating set to less than 5000 PSI Pressure Transducer Gain Set to 1 9 Flow Settings Flow On Off Evaluation Time Set to 5 second These values can be adjusted during drilling Do not turn INVF ON Once the Configuration is completed Run the Tool face Offset Program and high side the tool 10 Pulse detection set low pulse limit to 4 37 Chapter 5 Operations Manual TESTING Connect the transmitter test box to the isolation ring area on the Compass Transmitter Module The red clamp should be placed on the top of the transmitter body and the black clamp should be on the bottom of the transmitter body down hole end Note The isolation ring isolates the top transmitter body from the lower transmitter body Make sure that there
290. n 406095 Common 406096 Common 406097 Common 406098 Common 406099 Common 406100 Common 406112 Common 406117 Common 406118 Common 406119 Common 406120 Common 406121 Common 406122 Common 406124 Common 406125 Common 406140 Common 406142 Common 406144 Common 406145 Common 406149 Common 406153 Common Product Line MWD Product Line MWD MWD MWD Product Line MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD MWD Description Pulser System w Driver 150 C Compass Description BLDC Motor OS Motor Driver Compass 150 C Pulser System w Driver 150 C Compass Description Housing Interconnect Intermodule End Ring Anderton Internal Snap Ring Snap upper Polypac Small Screen Lrg Pulser Slots Plug Fill Compensation Membrane Servo Orifice Bulkhead Retainer Top 90 Degree Split Shell Snubber Assembly Battery MDM Connector 15pin Male Shaft Poppet Stub Assembly Pulser Shaft Housing Pulser Screen OS Housing Mud Compensator Membrane Support Housing Compass Pulser Motor Pressure Housing Ball Screw Mount Bearing Mount Motor Housing Transition Housing Compass Pulser Driver Pressure Servo Tip Assembly Pilot OS Ring Connector Retention Connector Bulkhead OS Gear Box OS Spacer Spring Sleeve Ceramic Spacer Bearing Sleeve Gearbo
291. n ohms per meter The resistance is multiplied with a geometric factor of approximately 13 4 to give you resistivity Resistance It is a unit in ohms It is calculated from the current and voltage Voltage It is a unit in volts It is the voltage of the received signal Current It is a unit in amps It is a measure of the current being emitted into the formation These four values are tagged to generic variables in the directional module GV2 Resistivity1 ohms meter Resistancel ohms GV4 Resistivity2 ohms meter GV5 Resistance2 ohms If an exact representation of what the resistivity tool is sending a minimum of 13 bits must be used An example of this for resistivity would be GV2 13 Parity Depending on the operation resistivity or resistance can be sent up Voltage and current are merely variables for trouble shooting and are not needed to make up a resistivity curve Tap Testing tool With fluid simulator test box Testing with a fluid simulator box enables you to test the resistivity tool in a dynamic state The tool string should consist of the complete resistivity tool and a directional module The pulser and batteries can be left off of the string at this time Complete programming the tool and connect the fluid simulator to the top of the directional module The q bus line must be turned off or you will get zeros for all the resistivity values Attach the resistivity test box as illustrated in Test Setup Diag
292. n or badly worn Step 17 You should now have the Screen Housing along with the Wire Tube sticking up Simply pulling on the Wire Tube should enable this assembly to be removed from the Screen Housing Step 18 You will now have the Screen Housing by itself The only thing left would be to remove the Servo Orifice There are set screws at the bottom of the lower holes that hold the Screens in place Once the set screws have been removed the orifice can be knocked out using the 3 8 ball driver from the lower end Inspect the seat for the Orifice for any erosion Step 19 Clean up all parts in preparation for re assembling the Pulser 61 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual ASSEMBLY OF PULSER Step 1 Re install the Servo Orifice 201392 and hold in place with the Set Screws inserted into the lower holes that hold the Screens on the Screen Housing 201120 201233 201163 CUm dl 2 ZZ mms 4 Zz 20132 eM Ip E 2 2 Wire Tube 201154 and Spring Tube Assembly 201141 amp 201542 Make sure that the Alignment Screws 201543 are seated into the holes in the Screen Housing 201542 62 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 3 Install the Spacer 201163 This is normally simply dropped place with the Screen Housing in the upright position Step 4 The next part to be attached is the Compensator Housing This includ
293. n to a nearby shale bed is available so that corrective action can be taken The addition of directional information to the resistivity reading provides a new enabling technology for geosteering at a price that is affordable for directional drilling companies APA S12 IF BOX TRANSMITTING ELECTROOE GEOSTEERING RESISTIVITY TOOL GRT NING ELECTRODES 4 3 12 IF PIN The GRT is an advanced imaging laterolog device incorporating four independent receiving electrodes to create an azimuthally sensitive resistivity measurement This capability allows the GRT to detect a nearby bed T determine whether it is conductive or resistive and ascertain its direction and distance In the diagram at left from a computer model the electric current density is higher in the upper conductive rock region e g a shale so the upper electrode receives a bigger current Unlike competing tools it is not necessary to rotate the GRT to obtain directionally sensitive resistivity measurements zj Chapter 6 Resistivity GRT Directional resistivity data from the GRT can be graphically presented on surface display patents pending in an enhanced version of the familiar compass rose drillers display typically employed directional drilling A continuously updated borehole image showing the distance and direction to conductive resistive anomalies enables the operator to intelligently direct the drilli
294. nce Definitions ES 20 atfa 6 p gama 7 p batv 8 p 20 atfa 6 p gama 7 bat2 temp 8 p 20 atfa 6 p gama p batv 8 p 20 atfa 6 p gama 7 p bat2 temp 8 p 20 atfa 6 p gama p batv 8 p 20 atfa 6 p gama 7 p bat2 temp 8 p 20 atfa 6 p gama p batv 8 p 20 atfa 6 p gama 7 p bat2 temp 8 p Label 1541 Edit String All toolface logging sequences should be the same Battery hours will consist of an EM portion and a Mud pulse portion 7 Chapter 8 PEM Tool If you are just running EM refer to the below charts 100 AH Batteries 50 AH per pack Amps 8 5 3 Pulses minute 0 25 38 60 97 50 0 375 62 97 153 30 Data 0 5 91 139 215 20 0 6 112 169 256 16 Assuming TLSQ 1 Pulse width 0 375 80 AH packs 40 AH per pack 8 5 3 0 25 30 48 77 Data Rate 0 375 50 77 122 0 5 73 111 172 0 6 89 135 205 Assuming TLSQ 1 Pulse width 0 375 Pulses minute 50 30 20 16 High Voltage Tool 28 V packs at 25 AH per pack for a total of 50 1 4 2 5 0 25 37 57 124 Data Rate 0 375 59 89 180 0 5 84 124 230 0 6 102 147 263 8 Assuming TLSQ 1 Pulse width 0 375 Chapter 8 PEM Tool Pulses minute 50 30 20 16 If you are running just mud pulse the tool will last approximately 750 hours between two 50 AH batteries total 100AH If you are running a combination of the two you will use this formula 1 Batter
295. nch or chisel 88 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Remove the set screws Remove the Locking Pin Using the Gearwrenchs to loosen the connection 89 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Remove the Ball screw housing and set aside Using the Gearwrenchs break the Stepper Motor Housing Remove and set the Motor Housing aside 90 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual At this point the Stepper Motor will be exposed Use a small Allen wrench Remove the four socket cap screws holding the bearing mount Set the Ball Screw Pulser Shaft Assembly aside 91 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual The gear housing Inspection Remove the screws in the legs of the gear housing that screw into the stepper motor 92 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual The set screw Lock Nut will need to be loosened using an Allen Wrench The screws on the shaft nut are loosened so it can be removed Use a screwdriver to gently pry off the Cap You can now access the gear box 93 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual remove the gear box Inspect the gear box for damaged gears This is the Stepper motor 94 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual These pictures illustrate all the current components of a Compass Pulser 95 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Replace the spacer and Drive Cap Ball Screw Pulser Shaft Assembly is rein
296. nd cutting Use only wooden or plastic O ring picks to guide the O rings over surfaces when installing or removing O rings Metal picks can scratch the sealing surfaces of the O ring grooves Use extreme caution when applying Loctite 243 or similar thread locking compounds Avoid applying liberal amounts on small threaded areas around electrical contacts Doing so may cause shorting problems It is advisable to apply an adequate amount of Loctite to a piece of paper allow it to dry to a paste and then apply it with a wooden Stick GE Power Systems authorizes only approved GE Silicon SF96 100 P N 201253 for use in the oil fill section of the pulser Silicon oil is a dimethylpolysiloxane or a clear water white silicone liquid with a viscosity of 100 centistokes This silicone oil was chosen for three reasons 1 The stable viscosity characteristics at higher temperatures are better suited for the use than hydrocarbon oils 2 The clear water white color allows contaminants to be more easily detected 3 Silicone oil is environmentally safe to handle and is disposable by normal means Refer to MSDS sheets All silicone oil extracted from a used pulser should be discarded Silicone oil is an expendable spare part by design and should not be salvaged for reuse This will prevent potential failures from impurities and oil that may have gone out of spec due to extreme temperature conditions Silicone oil is flammable Refer to MS
297. nd begins communications 125 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 2 4 Surveying and Logging All surveying and logging functions are performed in the Surveying screen The diagnostics screen will still be accessible for viewing detailed information however most operations should take place here Start Surveying Dwsbsreile C DgDWWRARRELLIEO md Log View CON Port Disgrostics Srt Survering 2 4 1 Surveying Screen Description The various sections of this screen are illustrated below This section displays all data received from the tool and depth tracking information MD 11441 00 3 38 04 inc 9240 tiw 2638 97 Azm 26860 27083 smear cos 263924 1 13 5 2639 24 126 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Depth tracking display Depths can also be reset by clicking on these displays Except when Automatic slips detection using WITS for depth status indicators Weight On Bit m Rate Of Penetration UPDATE flashes when data from the tool has been received xj Press this button to in order to enter a new survey into the database The survey entry form is shown to the right Survey 4 Last Survey Amn fis 1630 00 WS 12 28 Inclination 318 OL DON The last survey entered into the database 9200 coin 8832 and the
298. nd click on the name of the one you wish to view Check marks by each name will indicate all of the windows that are currently displayed If you would like to move everything back to how it was when you first started go to the Help menu and click on Reset Window Locations Whenever you exit the program the current window positions will be saved and used for the next time the program is started Compass Window The Compass window graphically displays the values of inclination azimuth and recent tool faces The inner five rings represent the recent tool faces The most recent tool face angle value is printed on the inside of the center ring The outermost full ring represents the azimuth Azimuth is shown starting at the top of the circle and the value increases clockwise The half ring on the left represents inclination starting at 0 degrees on the bottom and is displayed up to 180 degrees at the top The recent tool face azimuth and inclination values are displayed as a number with the timestamp below the number in this window too Pump Status and Pump Timers On the top right of the compass window the current pumps status is shown with the most recent on and off timers Each value will only display the current pump status time and the previous time for the other pump status The total on time represents the total amount of time the pumps have been on since the receiver has been running Warning Flags On the right side of the compass window
299. nd of the Top Bulkhead Retainer with the key on the 6 pin connector and carefully slide the retainer over the connector into place Insure that the connector key engages properly into the slot of the retainer 3 5 Rotate the Top Bulkhead Retainer to align the two screw holes and also align the tabs with the Top Bulkhead Retainer slots and the UpHole Intermodule End Secure the Top Bulkhead Retainer with two 4 40 X SCS screws 102010 and removable Loctite 243 in paste form Refer to Notes on Assembly Procedure 3 6 Install the remaining Interconnect Housing and make up all connections with the barrel wrenches to approximately 120 ft lb torque 3 7 Perform the MWDRoll test procedure Install two thread protectors with O rings 381611 installed and greased Note If the Directional Module fails to pass the roll test transmit the data to GE Power Systems Tensor MWD Technical Services GE Power Systems personnel will review the data to determine whether the module should be returned to the factory Should the Directional Module continue to fail the MWDRoll test procedure then it must be returned to the manufacturer for proper testing and re calibration 155 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual RING OUT SHEET RING OUT SHEET WYO gt 0 0 0 6 WYO gt 66 wyo 1 lt 0 8 WYO Wh lt 6 8 i Up pet uu WYO wie up lt 78 0 WYO lt 0 9 WYO 6 lt 0 9
300. nd power sources This practice will not only allow the system to run for a limited amount of time in the case of power outages but it will and should supply clean conditioned power to the system This will protect the valuable and expensive surface components from power fluctuations and spikes All systems should be operated with at least a power conditioner on line can resume No Reply Received from the Processor Transmitter This warning indicates that there is a communication breakdown between the PC to the DRT MPRx Node 05 or the DOWNhole Directional Module MPTx Node 20 remedy this problem the operator should 1 Check the Device addresses specified in the Setup Configuration Screen 2 Check the qBUS connection between the PC and the processors 3 Check whether the PC or the processors can be communicated with another PC running the qTalk program 4 Check to insure that the PC and processors are communicating on the same BAUD rate 5 Check to insure that the processors are in the qMIX mode as opposed to the qChat mode 6 the configurations be downloaded but not stored There may be a hardware problem 7 Do the component processors possess the same software that is running in the PC and vice versa 2 Chapter 5 Operations Manual Storing Configuration w Flow In this situation you will receive a message warning you that you must turn flow off and wait for the FEVT or the PEVT time
301. ne when the recording was started 31 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Pulse Width The pulse width of the recorded pulse data ftr only You may use the scrollbar on the bottom of the window to view different parts of the data The oldest data will be displayed on the left side of the graph and the newest data will be displayed on the right You may use the right mouse button on the graph to change some of the graphing values The top two options let you set either of the high and low PSI limits for the pressure line to that point on the graph The middle options let you change the graph scaling for the pulses The bottom option lets you Zoom Out and will extend the both high low PSI limits for pressure and pulses to show more surrounding data Program Layout ch Tree File Grapher 2006 07 16 18 31 17 btraw 18 32 08 General Values ressure Values Values Val P al Compression 1 1 High Value 2433 5 High Value 110 Start Time 18 31 17 Low Value 678 Low Value 0 Transducer Rating 10000 Pulse width 1 0 lt Raw File Viewer with labelled components 1 Menus 2 Pressure axis 3 Graphed pressure and pulses 4 Time axis 5 Configurable display values 32 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software CALIBRATION ROLL TEST Version 1 0 6 Installing the software This software is packaged in the MWD Software Installation CD It is installed after running the aut
302. ng Parameters by typing ProgqCtl pressing the Enter key and following the program instructions 2 Select GO 3 Select Continue 4 Load the qMWDTM Transmitter Operating Parameters by typing Progeep nb pressing the Enter key and following the program instructions Note Be sure to type the space between Progeep and nb Note nb means boot 5 Select GO 6 Load the qMWDTM Transmitter Program by typing Prog nb pressing the Enter key and following the program instructions Note Be sure to type the space between Progeep and nb 7 Select GO 8 Turn the System Power Off and then On Again For all Software Versions V01 30 and Later 1 Load the qMIX 11 Operating Parameters Receiver Operating Parameters and the qMWD Receiver Program by typing ProgAll and pressing the Enter key 2 Run qTalk by typing qTalk2 3 Invoke the Host Mode by pressing F4 4 Verify No Errors in DFR qDWR by pressing Shift F5 This procedure interrogates all network nodes for the qMIX register values All values for DFR and qDWR should be returned as a 0000 hex value 5 Check for Control Parameter Value Errors by pressing Shift F4 This procedure will cause all nodes to check for valid operating parameters using the VChk function refer to Appendix 1 All nodes should return VChk All Okay Note DO NOT cycle the power or reset the processor as the onscreen directions in the qProg 11 program may instruct
303. ng from operating correctly a warning icon will be displayed on the left side of the text The displayed information on the window is explained below Logging Enabled The user enabled logging status This value can be changed via the database menu Database Ready The database must exist and have a run open for this to be enabled Job Number The name or number of the current job Run Number The current open run number If there is no open run a number will not be displayed and logging will not be allowed File Location The location of the actual database on the hard drive Disk Used Current size of the database and also the remaining disk space on the selected drive Logged Data Lists the types of data stored to the database If nothing is being logged a warning flag will be displayed History Window The history window will display all of the received data It displays all of the decoded values as well as pump status with a time stamp This data is also stored in the History folder on your hard drive as a prc file The files stored on the hard drive are stored in a sub folder for each day and the name of the file is the date and time when the file was created 9 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Recently Decoded Data Window This window only displays the decoded values from the survey or tool face sequences that have been decoded from the recent transmission sequence If a newer va
304. ng process without having to study resistivity logs ADVANCED COST EFFECTIVE DESIGN State of the art techniques were applied in creating the GRT For example FEMLAB 3D Finite Element Analysis modeling was paraliel conductive bed used to optimize mechanical and electrical parameters A graph at right from the model of the GRT illustrates how the ratio ES of current received by a N paraliel resistive bed pair of electrodes can be used to distinguish a parallel conductive bed from a resistive bed and 10 20 30 40 50 determine the distance v eee Ce E ta to the boundary Current Ratio in Near to Far Receiving Electrode Benefiting from its innovative electronic and mechanical design the GRT provides accurate and reliable operation combined with low cost and serviceability Sophisticated self calibrating measurement circuitry ensures that stability and precision are maintained across the full range of operating conditions Should it be necessary to service or repair the GRT its rugged probe based construction makes disassembly and reassembly quick and easy The GRT does not employ any third party proprietary technology so there are no licensing fees required 2 Chapter 6 Resistivity GRT 08 1 06 1 04 021 0 0 LOGGING WHILE DRILLING Of course in addition to Borehole Correction Chart its application in 2 0 EE SS ee a mud resistivity 1 0 ohm meter directional
305. not bent 7 1 5 Apply a coating of Loctite 243 inside the hole for the dowel pin in the spring shaft plug 7 1 6 Place the shaft assembly in the wire tube 201154 and install the Dowel Pin 201144 201149 21 Da 2 RARA 01141 7222 777227 2 201144 7 1 7 Inspect the shaft verify that it slides freely Note The Dowel Pin must not protrude outside of the wire tube Move the shaft sideways against the wire tube to verify that it does not cause the Dowel Pin to protrude 7 1 8 Fasten the Position Spacer 201534 to the Flow Sensor Plug using Position Screws See Exhibit 7 2 7 1 9 Install 2 new O rings onto the Flow Sensor Note Always install new unused O rings Never put a used O ring back on an assembly If you remove an O ring for any reason discard it and replace it with a new unused O ring 7 1 10 Insert the Bellows Shaft into the uphole end of the Flow Sensor Plug and thread the wire tube in place using Loctite 243 9 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 2 Install Bellows 7 3 2 Apply Loctite 243 to the end of the screws 8 32 SCS 7 3 3 Install the screws into the pulser screen housing at the screen mounting holes over the orifice 7 3 4 Remove excess Loctite 7 3 5 Apply silicone lubricant to the O rings on the wire tube assembly 7 3 6 Align the dowel pin with the pinhole inside the pulser screen housing 7 3 7 Install the wire tube assembly into the pulser screen
306. nough In spite of obstacles compiled by the various companies Compass has stayed with the basic platform and built on it as well as some of our key suppliers Today Compass can take the basic Compass platform or other compatible Tensor tools and customize it or make add ons to give the customer the following capabilities Mud Pulse MWD package that can include the following Directional Module Standard electronics Fully GE compatible Fully digital Hot Hole electronics Pulsers Solenoid Stepper Hot Hole Top mount Wellbore monitoring tools Gamma Standard and Focused Resistivity Rotary bow spring interconnects for higher angle wells for additional flex or for use with EM to provide needed contacts Rotary connectors with integrated rubber fins are standard on monitor tools but with time will be standard on all tool configuration EM MWD package that can include the following Gap subs for all hole sizes EM Transmitters and Receivers High amp High volt PEM transmitters capable of both EM or Mud pulse es Chapter 1 Introduction As can be seen the Compass platform as described above gives customer one of the most versatile systems on the market This results in the ability to optimize usage on the fleet which in turn will lead to higher margins and minimal repairs When repairs are needed Compass or our key vendors will ensure quick turn around As needed Compass can also provide fl
307. nsducer in the standpipe The subsequent closing of the servo poppet causes the mechanisms to reverse their actions and move to the positions that allow uninterrupted flow through the signal orifice Flow Sensors The GE Tensor and the Compass pulsers employ electronic flow switches The state of flow for the tools is determined by the state of an accelerometer When the accelerometer is in an unexcited state the MWD would be in No Flow position and when the accelerometer is in an excited state the MWD would be in a Flow On position When the MWD tool is assembled the processor supplies power to the flow switch When the MWD tool is in the No Flow condition the voltage through the flow switch is less than 100 millivolts When the MWD is in a Flow On condition the voltage through the flow switch is 4 5 5 2 Volts This voltage change created by the change in the state of the accelerometer signals the processor of the changes in the flow state The tool will function according to the flow or no flow state 6 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Centralizers Interconnect Modules The centralizers serve several purposes 1 They provide wire ways between the modules that make up the MWD tool string 2 The provide flex points along the body of the MWD tool that allow the tool to bend when the drill collar bends around short radius boreholes 3 With the use of bow springs or flex finned centralizer inserts they provide central
308. o easily adapt to new and varied hardware This adaptation is accomplished through the use of an ASCII data file named qPrg1 11D dat qPrg111D dat is a standard ASCII file which provides all the information about the targets to be programmed The file is divided into two sections The first section consists of a list of target identification data structures each identified by a unique target ID The format of the structure is as follows 55 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Target ID 1 to 16 characters Target crystal frequency Hz determines baud rate for 1st stage path 1st stage bootloader program 519 file path 2nd stage bootloader program 519 file or null if 2nd stage not needed Baud rate for 2nd stage or zero path default program to load s19 file or null Baud rate to load program or zero if same as baud for last stage Memory Specification ID for target see format documentation to follow path HC11 Config Reg programming file s19 file or null Default configuration register value for the PC command line option The second section of the qPrg1 11D dat file is a list of memory specification data structures The memory specifications are referenced through the Memory Specification ID for target field in the target identification data structure defined above Multiple Targets can use the same memory specification data structure The format of this structure is
309. o its groove which is located inside the uphole end of the solenoid 7 10 85 Release the F4 connector 7 10 86 Verify that the wave spring resists by pushing it 7 10 87 Place the wire circles parallel to each other and twist the group of wires 2 or 3 times Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 10 89 Rotate the tool to verify the wires aren t sticking out of the opposite window 7 11 Install Solenoid Housing 7 11 1 Clean the solenoid housing using a clean cloth a long narrow shaft and the air gun 7 11 2 Apply silicone lubricant to the O rings on the oil fill housing 7 11 3 Place the tool in a vertical position with the oil fill housing above the screen housing 7 11 4 Twist the solenoid housing onto the oil fill housing until they are firmly connected Note At resistance firmly tap the top of the solenoid housing and continue to connect the housings together 7 11 5 Place the assembly in the tabletop chain vice resting on blocks of wood with the chain over the mud compensator housing 7 11 6 Connect a gear wrench to the solenoid to hold it in position 7 11 7 Connect a second gear wrench to the screen housing to tighten it into position 7 11 8 Place the second torque wrench so its handle is below your waist then push the handle down to tighten Torque the connection to 75 Ib ft E Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 11 9 Apply silicone lubricant to the pressure bulkhead O rings 7 11 10 Twist the bu
310. o use an intelligent slip in out detection algorithm for tracking bit and hole depth If this option is not checked then the user must manually insert and remove the slips for proper depth tracking 15 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Enable WITS This checkbox will instruct the Data Logger to operate in one of two modes If Use Depth Encoder is not checked then the Data Logger will receive depth tracking data from the WITS system using the selected WITS Port This is normally the method used fir WITS If the Use Depth Encoder is checked then the depth tracking is performed by the Data Logger and depth tracking equipment then transmitted out the selected WITS Port which can be shared by other applications or service companies This setup is optional for circumstances where data from the Data Logger is wanted by others at the well site In both cases the data received from the tool by the Data Logger is transmitted to the selected WITS Port for sharing with others 2 2 2 2 Survey Settings North Reference This is used to identify what type of north reference is to be used for surveying This will appear as a label on the Survey Report printout Total Magnetic Correction The total geomagnetic correction added to azimuth and magnetic toolface to either TRUE or GRID north Toolface Offset Used for steering tools this defines the offset of the directional sensors to the high side of the BHA Survey
311. ock Z axis 500 G 0 5 mS 500 G 0 5 mS Shock Y axis Input Voltage 1000 G 0 5 mS 22 30 Volts 1000 G 0 5 mS Input Current Pulse Chapter 1 Introduction 18 14 mA 5V to OV 2 0 5 microseconds 22 30 Volts 18 14 mA Maximum Voltage 31 5 Volts 31 5 Volts 5V to OV 2 0 5 microseconds Applications e Depth determination e Depth correlation within the well and between wells e Lithology identification e Qualitative evaluation of shaliness e Qualitative evaluation of radioactive mineral deposits GAMMA RAY e Gamma Ray Tool measures the naturally occurring gamma radiation in the formations e Most naturally occurring radiation comes from potassium which is contained in clay minerals Thus the gamma ray log is useful for distinguishing shales from non shales e Some gamma radiation comes from uranium which is most often found in formations through which water once flowed or thorium which is found in various clay minerals and potassium e The spectral gamma ray device differentiates these three sources of gamma radiation based on the energy distribution of the gamma rays striking the detector 4 Chapter 1 Introduction USES LIMITATIONS Distinguish shales from non shales Estimate clay content in sands and limestones Potassium Correlation of real time data with Thorium offset logs to determine geologic Th locat
312. oder but uncheck the Drum Encoder The next page of the startup wizard will display the Geolograph encoder calibration screen Beologiach Encode Calbisbon calbeate depth encode 1 Lower the black to the ilox then prece and enter the sctual height and a manusi count 2 the block toif s pon then press and the actual and 5 manua court Heg Count Low Hih 195 92 se Hog Court e Pie Dut To calibrate the Geolograph encoder Set how block height Black height 0 Count Current 72 Lower the block to the drill floor then press the Set button and enter the block height and the counts read on the depth encoder box in the entry form Ib Black Height as _ Count Orren 3818 ap Raise the block to its highest point then press the Set button and enter the block height and the counts read on the depth encoder box in the entry form Once calibration is complete the current block height will be displayed on this screenfor verification 18 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 2 2 4 2 Drum Encoder Calibration To use the drum encoder check Use Depth Encoder and also check the Drum Encoder box The next page of the startup wizard will display the drum encoder calibration screen Dan Encoder esteso chu
313. of each graph will display the time that the last data on that line was received The graphs are updated from left to right Each line will show about 10 15 pulses The data is updated at different rates depending on the pulse width of the current transmission Graphs will only display new data when the pumps are on The graph displaying the current data has a white background and the graphs with older data have a gray background After the graph line is fully displayed the graph will be moved up and a blank graph will be displayed for the current data If you wish to view older data scroll up using the scrollbar or a mouse wheel You may view up to 59 previous graphs You may also set the low pulse limit by right clicking on any of the displayed pulse graphs This will give you a popup menu option to either set the limit there or cancel that action 8 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Database Status Window The database status window is designed to provide the operator with a full overview of the current database logging status The background color of this window will be light blue if logging is currently active and light orange if there is an issue restricting logging from occurring There is a row of buttons on the bottom that can be used to control certain database features The database menu can also be accessed by right clicking on this window If any of the displayed fields have a problem which may restrict the database loggi
314. of the current flowing in the loop and the vector area of the loop Any configuration of charges or currents has a dipole moment which describes the dipole whose field is the best approximation at large distances to that of the given configuration This is simply one term in the multipole expansion when the charge monopole moment is 0 as it a ways is for the magnetic case since there are no magnetic monopoles the dipole term is the dominant one at large distances its field falls off in proportion to 1 as compared to 1 for the next quadrupole term and higher powers of 1 r for higher terms or 1 2 for the monopole term 19 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Molecular dipoles Many molecules have such dipole moments due to non uniform distributions of positive and negative charges on the various atoms For example Electric dipole field lines positive negative A molecule with a permanent dipole moment is called a polar molecule A molecule is polarized when it carries an induced dipole The physical chemist Peter J W Debye was the first scientist to study molecular dipoles extensively and dipole moments are consequently measured in units named debye in his honor With respect to molecules there are three types of dipoles e Permanent dipoles These occur when two atoms in a molecule have substantially different electronegativity one atom attracts electrons more than another becomin
315. oftware also allows for MWD memory dump data to be gathered and saved and used for gamma log enhancement by merging the stored gamma data with the surface gathered data to improve data density It also allows several parameters measured by the tool downhole to be analyzed to study tool performance and potential failures 8 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation SURFACE SENSORS PRESSURE TRANSDUCER The pressure transducer detects the pressure pulses created by the MWD downhole tool in the mud at the standpipe The analog signal is digitized filtered in the DRT MPU and decoded The data is then displayed on one of several menu driven screen displays HOOK LOAD SENSOR The hookload sensor is a transducer affixed to the drilling rig s hydraulic system It is used to measure the hook load or weight of the drilling assembly or drill string The software in the MPU of the DRT allows the operator to calibrate the sensors to match the measuring devices use on the rig DEPTH ENCODER The depth encoder attached to the Geolograph line measures the movement of the Kelly up and down In coordination with the hook load sensor the depth encoder allows the operator to track the drilling depth of the well and track the addition of joints of drill pipe DRAW WORKS ENCODER The draw works encoder is a depth measuring device attached to the hub of the draw works reel This device operates similarly to the Depth Encoder and allows the operator to trac
316. og 1 1 will then skip directly to the programming step by communicating with the 2nd stage bootloader already loaded 60 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Recovering From Problems The following points may be helpful in the event a programming problem occurs i When qProg 11 terminates a message is displayed indicating the condition at the time of termination When programming succeeds the message is Programming Complete If an error occurs the error message and an error number are displayed The error number definitions are as follows a Serial communication function I O error return codes The error codes from 1000 through 1099 are reserved for the qSIO error codes qSIORx codes start at 1000 gt gt gt gt 1000 General or undefined Rx error 1001 Character time out during Rx 1002 Receiver over run error 1003 Receiver framing error 1004 Receiver parity error 1005 Received break error 1006 Rx FIFO overflow 1007 Time out waiting for data reply qSIOTx codes start at 1030 gt gt gt gt 1030 General or undefined Rx error 1031 Character time out on data transmit 1032 Receiver over run error during Tx 1033 Receiver framing error during Tx 1034 Receiver parity error during Tx 1035 Received break error during Tx 1036 Tx FIFO underflow qSIO miscellaneous codes start at 1080 gt gt gt gt 1080 Error on data transfer verification b File I O error return codes The error codes from 1100 throu
317. ol Type in a message in the Text to Send box or select a pre defined message from the drop down box You may send the message by pressing Enter or clicking on the Send button ool Communications Tool Communications Clear Previous Communications Pause Transmissions Text to Send 15 50 05 15 50 06 15 50 09 15 50 09 15 50 14 15 50 15 A record of messages responses is shown in the large white portion of the window Messages sent from the MWD operator are colored green and responses from the tool are colored blue You may clear all the stored text in the text areas by clicking on the Clear Windows button If you wish to pause receiving data click on the Pause Transmissions button Partial list of tool Sent Messages and Received Responses invf InvF Off bat2 Bat2 batv BatV 11 37 Exit Communications Window communication commands CCod 11 CCod 23 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software This command must be sent before changing some values Bat2 Requests the battery 2 status BatV Requests the battery voltage level TFO Requests the Tool Face Offset Inct 4 Inct Set the Inclination Threshold to 4 and requests the IncT value SyTy Requests the Synchronization type HdCk Requests the header error checking type Bat2 Off Bat2 Turn Battery 2 off and verify Ver Request the firmware versions DSNs Request the tool serial numbers 24 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp
318. ollowing the bit count with a colon and then the character P for parity and E for ECC error checking If desired the whole word may be spelled out for either parity or ecc The words are not case sensitive Ex Azm 8 P This will send Azm in 8 bits and add an extra parity bit to the transmission for a total of 9 bits 25 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Looping A group of variables may be transmitted for a specified number of times before the next variables are transmitted in a sequence Loops may be of a specific amount between 1 and 255 or infinitely repeat In order to send a finite number of loops in a sequence first type the number of loops immediately followed by a left brace This will begin a finite loop Type in all variables names you wish to include in the loop using the standard transmission syntax and end the loop with a right brace Ex Azm 8 5 aTFA 6 Temp 6 This will send the Azm variable and then send the aTFA and Temp values five times To send an infinite loop do not put a number in front of the left brace Once an infinite loop is entered it will never be exited Any variables put after an infinite loop will never be reached The entire tool face logging sequence is an infinite loop by definition and it does not require surrounding braces around the whole variable sequence 26 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software CHANGING PREFERENCES The preferences window
319. olypak is facing downhole 7 14 15 Verify that the seal is squarely seated in the groove 7 14 16 Apply 4 dots of Loctite 243 to the Signal Shaft threads at 90 degree intervals for both low temp and high temp tools 7 14 17 Install the poppet end 1 1 122 outer diameter threading it into the signal shaft at the down hole end to hand tight 7 14 18 Repeat the 2 steps above for the up hole end of the signal shaft and the piston cap 7 14 19 Place the mounting fixture on the piston cap 7 14 20 Tighten the slave screws onto the piston cap mounting holes to fingertight 5 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 14 21 Connect a 77 drive ratchet wrench to the poppet end to hold it in position 7 14 22 Set a torque wrench to 75 Ib ft 7 14 23 Connect the torque wrench to the installation tool with the torque wrench handle below your waist 7 14 24 Pull the handle upward until you hear the double click 7 14 25 Remove the O ring from the polypak 7 14 26 Install the wiper to the outside or uphole groove of the piston cap with the wiper channel facing up hole 7 14 27 Apply silicone lubricant to the polypak and wiper liberally 7 14 28 Verify that the wear sleeve SIGNAL PISTON slides completely and smoothly over the main spring 36 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 14 29 Apply silicone lubricant to the inside of the wear sleeve liberally 7 14 30 Gently slide the wear sleeve over the wiper and the po
320. omatic install from the CD If you have any questions on the installation refer to the installation section in the beginning of this manual Starting the program The program icon will be installed onto the desktop after the MWD software installer is finished Double click the icon to begin the roll test program The computer must be hooked up to the receiver via an Ethernet cable and the tool must be connected to the receiver using the tool programming cable The receiver must be powered on for the program to connect to it There will be a connecting window displayed until the program is connected correctly to the receiver Using the program After the program is properly connected to the receiver and tool the user will see the tools information displayed in the different sections of the window The raw sensor data is displayed in the Sensor Acquired Data and the calculated values from the raw data are displayed in the Sensor Derived Data The Compass Rose window will display the current azimuth inclination and high side gravity tool face Starting a New Roll Test You may begin new roll test by clicking on the File menu and then clicking on New Roll Test This will prompt you with a window to fill out the basic roll test information for the new roll test This information is helpful for distinguishing between tests later on so please enter as much data as you can Opening a Previous Roll Test If you wish to open a pr
321. omed in out using the mouse This function will print he viewed plot on the printer 2 4 5 Real Time Log Display The Real Time log display can be adjusted without affecting database logging operations Using the toolbar buttons the display can be zoomed in or out and scrolled up or down and left to right Once the display is adjusted then right click on the depth axis on the left of the log then click on Tracking Enable This enables the log to automatically scroll keeping the most recent data in the view Last Survey 114400 ws 3804 INC 9240 2638 97 azm 26860 coim 27083 889442 cois 263924 113 263924 132 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 2 4 6 Log Depth Editor Surveying The log data depths can be moved by selecting the pull File Edit Help down menu Edit Gamma Depths Bi EE Ta n the editor form enter the start depth and end depth of the data 28 you wish to move then select new start depth and all data will be shifted to the new starting depth 130 Em 3 GeoLogPlot The GeoLogPlot application is used to extract logging data from the database and generate MWD plots on continuous paper printers Since this is a separate application from the Data Logger all logging functions will not be affected during this operation 133 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp So
322. onfidence on a need to know basis Your use of this document is strictly limited to a legitimate business purpose requiring the information contained therein Your use of this document constitutes acceptance of these terms NOTICE TO ALL qMWD USERS qTalk is still an available DOS system program It is needed to operate the BootLoad program and load the firmware to the individual processors 05 09 and 20 The same commands are still available and still apply At the end of this section you will find the directions for operating the DOS version of the qTalk program Following is a description of the new W32 qServer system that operates via the qNIC device attached to the qBus cable commonly called the dongle 39 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software INTRODUCTION qTalk System Utilities is the program used to communicate with the various nodes on the qTalk for Win95 version now contained in the qW32 Server program To access the qW32 Server simply place the mouse arrow on the qW32 Server Icon located on the Task Bar and click once The following window will appear Server polling 1 STOP Node Status MWD System Clear Messages Win32 qTalk display is entirely different from the previous DOS version and is more versatile By simply clicking on the qTalk button or pressing the q key the following window will appear qTalk W32 Window qTalk W32 is a limited version of qTalk for 32 bit w
323. onnect between Receiver2 and Transmitter2 should always land between the insulators of RES SUB3 and RES SUBA And the very top interconnect should never land on or below the insulators of RES SUB4 If any of these parameters are altered the resistivity tool will fail to operate normally To achieve these measurements selecting pony subs and a UBHO sub with the correct length will ensure these parameters are met Set Screw Resistivity Length Diagram UBHO Sub Pony Collar1 Drill Bit RES SUB1 RES SUB2 Pony Collar2 Drill Collar RES SUB3 RES SUB4 Monel 107 Set Screw to first Insulator I d 2 70 40 5 405 308 40 406 40 5 6469 gar sm 79 5 TI 69 69 T 69 69 3551 gam aar NL Helix PULSER Transmitter1 Receiver1 DIRECTIONAL UNIT BATTERY 2 BATTERY 4 GAMMA Receiver Transmitter2 INSULATOR INSULATOR 110 16 Helix to TX insulator 5 Chapter 6 Resistivity GRT Measurement Setup for Pony Collar 1 For the correct measurements please refer to Resistivity Length Diagram This diagram illustrates a typical set up of the BHA and the tool For the most part the tool lengths will be fixed and will be used as a reference The BHA lengths will not be fixed due to thread re cuts so pre job length measurements are necessary The Most important length of the BHA 15 from the UBHO set screw to the bottom insulator of resistivity sub 1 This length should be a maxim
324. oppet has backed off from the orifice 7 16 7 Remove the 2 screws holding the servo poppet 7 16 8 Loosen the 2 clamp screws on the servo poppet for a 1 8 gap at the clamp 7 16 9 Apply a dot of Loctite 243 to each of the visible screw threads 7 16 10 Apply a dot of Loctite 243 to the servo poppet shaft threads 7 16 11 Tighten the clamp screws to the end of the shaft to finger tight 39 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 16 12 Power off the pulser test box 7 16 13 Power on the pulser test box 7 16 14 Set the on time knob to 1 7 16 15 Set the off time knob to 2 7 16 16 Allow it to actuate for 2 minutes 7 16 17 Verify that the tip is flush against the orifice Rotate the tool to view the tip from each window 7 16 18 Verify that the shaft pulses while in alignment 7 16 19 Power off the pulser test box 7 16 20 Remove excess lubricant 7 21 Send to QC for inspection 7 22 Send the assembly to inventory or to the next assembly Refer to the manufacturing flow map or procedure 7 23 In case of conflicting instructions give precedence to documentation in the following order 1 Product Specification and Drawings and manufacturing instructions contained on them 2 Manufacturing Flow Chart 3 Manufacturing Procedures MPs 4 Process Instructions such as welding procedures Ps 1 5 and P P I s 5 Standard Operating Procedures SOPs 40 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual
325. or 20003 Source file record format error 20004 Source file character count error 20005 Source file character error 20006 Source file checksum error 20007 Missing memory definition error 20008 All pages full error 20009 Page boundary error 20010 Data overlay error 20011 Switch string format error 62 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 20012 Switch type error 20013 Missing file name error 20014 File open error 20015 Run string error 20016 Data acknowledge error 20017 Bootload error 20018 Check character type error 20019 Target ID match error 20020 Operator abort 20021 Page number error 20022 Device overlap error 20023 Data in page byte error ii If you forget to enter the No Boot switch when loading more than one file the program will stop and request operator direction Abort the program and try again using the nb switch In most cases this will work However since the first stage boot loader program is most likely transferred at a different baud rate than program files there is no guarantee iii If problems persist please call GE Power Systems and ask for assistance from Technical Services Please call from nearby the PC being used to program the target processor s so that we may talk you through the problem GE Power Systems Bill Ryer Customer Technical Service Tensor Systems Reuter Stokes 1840 Royston Lane Round Rock TEXAS 512 252 6188 phone 512 251 7396 fax 512 845 2892 cell
326. or housings This could deform the battery pack causing an internal short circuit or fracturing the glass to metal hermetic seal All ovens or environmental chambers used for testing batteries should be equipped with an over temperature controller to protect against excessive heat Do not connect batteries of different chemistries together Do not connect batteries of different size together Do not connect old and new batteries together Consult manufacturer before encapsulating batteries during discharge Batteries may exceed their maximum rated temperature if insulated 145 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual BATTERY INSULATION CHECK 1 Install break out boxin both ends of battery with all switches in the break position 2 Set Fluke meter to read ohms and install in red plugs 1 and 2 Check for a reading of OL Open 3 Move the red lead to red plug 4 then 5 and so on down to plug 10 and finally the housing NOTE Voltage will be seen across plugs 1 and 3 in this attitude and hooking an ohmeter at this point could potentially damage it TOOL 911 Lm BREAK 4 Move the black lead to red plug 2 again check for a complete open OL 5 Move the red lead to plug 3 and so on as in Step 3 6 Continue moving the black lead to the right and moving the red lead to the remaining plugs and the housing until all combinations have been covered 7 reading of anything but OL Open indicates a leak or poor insulat
327. orized to drill However due to the cost of MWD systems they are not generally used on wells intended to be vertical Instead the wells are surveyed after drilling through the use of Multishot Surveying Tools lowered into the drillstring on slickline or wireline The primary use of real time surveys is in Directional Drilling For the Directional Driller to steer the well towards a target zone he must know where the well is going and what the effects of his steering efforts are MWD tools also generally provide toolface measurements to aid in directional drilling using downhole mud motors with bent subs or bent housings For more information on the use of toolface measurements see Directional Drilling 10 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Drilling mechanics information MWD tools can also provide information about the conditions at the drill bit This may include Rotational speed of the drillstring Smoothness of that rotation Type and severity of any vibration downhole Downhole temperature Torque and Weight on Bit measured near the drill bit Mud flow volume Use of this information can allow the operator to drill the well more efficiently and to ensure that the MWD tool and any other downhole tools such as Mud Motors Rotary Steerable Systems and Logging While Drilling tools are operated within their technical specifications to prevent tool failure This information also is valuable to Geologists responsible for the well
328. ot N S E V U Bad A check box that allows the user to discard the data shot True False Gx Gy Gz The MWD accelerometer sensor s X Y and Z axis value G G Tot The total acceleration calculated by the accelerometer values G Hx Hy Hz The MWD magnetometer sensor s X Y and Z axis value Gauss H Tot The total magnetic field calculated by magnetometer values Gauss Azm azimuth angle of the tool Inc The inclination of the tool mTFA The magnetic tool face angle gTFA The gravitational tool face High Side angle DipA The dip angle with respect to the magnetic field of the earth Removing Bad Data When you observe a set of bad data place a checkmark in the Bad field of the data set The data set remains marked as bad until the user unmarks it MWDRoll32 does not delete data sets marked as bad but does omit them from all calculations Data sets marked as bad remain part of the acquired data and appear on printed reports marked as bad 82 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Roll Test Options Data acquisition can be initiated in only two ways Automatically if starting a new test MWDRoll32 guides the user through a sequence that opens the Roll Test Options dialog pictured below and starts data acquisition Manually if a roll test is already open the user may choose to start acquiring data by selecting the Start Data Acquisition item from the File menu T
329. ough they have many properties in common If the modulating signal s amplitude varies continuously with time it is said to be an analog signal and the modulation is referred to as analog In the case where the modulating signal may vary its amplitude only between a finite number of values and the change may occur only at discrete moments in time the modulating signal is said to be a digital signal and the modulation is referred to as digital In most applications of modulation the carrier signal is a sine wave which is completely characterized by its amplitude its frequency and its phase relative to some point in time Modulating the carrier then amounts to varying one or more of these parameters in direct proportion to the amplitude of the modulating signal In analog modulation systems varying the amplitude frequency or phase of the carrier signal results in amplitude modulation AM frequency modulation FM or phase modulation PM respectively Since the frequency of a sine wave expressed in radians per second equals the derivative of its phase frequency modulation and phase modulation are sometimes subsumed under the general term angle modulation or exponential modulation 7 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation If the modulating signal is digital the modulation is termed amplitude shift keying ASK frequency shift keying FSK or phase shift keying PSK since in this case the discrete amplitudes of the digital signal can be
330. ow redirection creates the mud pulse by inserting and retracting the signal poppet in the main orifice of the muleshoe DRIVER SECTION The Driver contains the controller boards and EFS electronic flow switch and a capacitor bank The controller boards contain the timing switching circuitry and the EFS The capacitor bank stores the power necessary to activate the solenoids to create the pulse activation sequence The power to the capacitor bank is supplied by the battery packs and is controlled by the microprocessor in the directional module 4 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation GAMMA MODULE The GE Power Systems Gamma Sensor employed by Compass is a high efficiency natural gamma radiation detector The sensor uses a Scintillator TI crystal with a ruggedized photomultiplier with a signal conditioner and power controller the mounting It can be placed in any position in the tool string above the pulser and run with one or tandem battery packs The choice of power supply is dependent upon the predicted duration of the drilling run downhole This module is also used in the Gamma Steering package with the incorporation of the Gamma Steering directional module and the focused gamma sub MULESHOE MULESHOE SUB The Tensor MWD system uses a muleshoe sleeve unique to the MWD industry The muleshoe serves a double role in the proper function of the Tensor MWD system First the muleshoe employs a helica
331. p Time Conf 22 43 48 07 01 08 gTFA 226 4 100 173 22 27 11 07 01 08 22 43 34 07 01 08 gTFA 226 4 100 173 22 23 33 07 01 08 22 43 20 07 01 08 gTFA 226 4 100 173 22 27 35 07 01 08 22 43 05 07 01 08 gTFA 2264 100 173 22 27 54 07 01 08 22 42 51 07 01 08 gTFA 2264 100 173 22 28 18 07 01 08 22 42 36 07 01 08 80 6 100 173 22 28 39 07 01 08 22 42 22 07 01 08 226 4 100 173 22 28 56 07 01 08 22 42 04 07 01 08 gTFA 226 4 100 173 22 29 09 07 01 08 22 41 50 07 01 08 gTFA 226 4 100 173 22 29 31 07 01 08 22 41 36 07 01 08 gTFA 226 4 100 173 22 41 21 07 01 08 gTFA 226 4 100 173 22 29 39 07 01 08 22 41 07 07 01 08 gTFA 226 4 100 173 22 43 48 07 01 08 22 40 52 07 01 08 0 997 100 173 22 42 36 07 01 08 22 40 33 07 01 08 Batv 21 4 100 173 22 40 33 07 01 08 22 40 19 07 01 08 gTFA 226 4 100 173 22 40 52 07 01 08 22 40 04 07 01 08 226 4 100 173 22 39 50 07 01 08 gTFA 226 4 100 173 22 39 36 07 01 08 gTFA 226 4 100 173 22 39 21 07 01 08 gTFA 226 4 100 173 22 39 07 07 01 08 gTFA 226 4 100 173 22 38 52 07 01 08 80 6 100 173 22 38 38 07 01 08 gTFA 2264 100 173 22 38 20 07 01 08 gTFA 226 4 100 173 22 38 06 07 01 08 gTFA 2264 100 173 22 37 52 07 01 08 gTFA 226 44 100 173 22 37 37 aTFA 2264 1nn 173 lt gt amp is a combo box that has 3 selections Recent Data History Data and Survey Data Recent Data displays all data since last Pump is ON
332. period to elapse When the processors in the DRT and the Survey Electronics are operating they will accept some data Please note some data will be transferred to the processor but the complete storing process cannot be completed and this will result in a partial store and the warning This can be hazardous to the operation of the system and the operator should be cautious in this procedure When using the simulator at times if the Invert Flow Sense is reversed for the DOWNhole operation mode then it must be reversed To overcome this problem store the configuration to the DRT first and then to the DOWNhole tool separately This will allow you to fix the flow simulation switch to the OFF position for each unit separately to put in the non flow position Inactive Screens f an operator enters into a screen and it is not updating or is displaying only a file or no data then check the position the monitoring toggle switch and check to see if the highlight on the drag down menu is highlighted Both positions will lock up the screen and not allow viewing of current data or exit out of the system the System Setup under the drag down Menu there is an option allowing you to activate switch that will remind the operator when a screen was previously exited with the monitoring mode deactivated the Basic Software Package it is possible to convert the system to 4800 Baud and overcome the increased capacitance problem For clients using the De
333. perly seated Pull the tool string back up and install the contact springs and o ring run back down and make sure tool seats to the same spot Do not put a pipe wrench on the J Latch and apply torque to the tool The tool gap is an insulated connection and failure may occur if torque is applied SHALLOW SURFACE TEST Make sure that the isolation subs are completely out of the casing before doing a shallow test Adjust gain to get a proper signal Monitor the Oscilloscope to see if there is any noise over 1Volt Anything over 1V may be registering as a pulse Use the gain to adjust this and filter out the noise Increase the gain to increase the signal You will notice the pulse Amplitude increase with the gain increase Pay attention to the formation being drilled through Certain formations may give you more noise until it is drilled through 38 Chapter 5 Operations Manual SURVEYS The survey procedure is similar to standard mud pulse procedure The operator must note that the Receiver will not sense flow off on It can only sense if the transmitter is turned on off transmitting When pumps are off with no vibration the tool will shut off You will notice pumps down for 8 seconds and then the pumps clock will start up again The Driller will watch the pumps time on the rig floor display for one minute and then should turn the flow on The pumps time will continue counting and the survey data should sta
334. pet Orifice Size B In Order of TFA Size Increase Increase Pulse Tool aab ZEN ID OD TFA Flow Range ID OD TFA Flow Range Inches Inches Inches GPM i Inches Inches Inches GPM 1 167 lt 200 384 683 1 1 167 200225 37 464 2 25 200225 367 464 1 090 250 375 383 862 3 1 28 1 090 250 375 383 862 1 040 300 475 345 865 5 1 35 1 167 250 400 300 949 1 167 ry 250 400 300 99 6 1 040 300 475 345 865 125 300 500 354 982 7 1 35 300 500 354 99 1 090 350 550 359 809 9 1 40 1 167 325 525 360 939 1 040 475 600 461 736 10 1 35 1 090 350 550 359 809 1 40 1 167 325 525 360 939 1f 140 350 575 200 806 1 40 1 125 1522 350 575 290 806 12 1 040 475 600 461 7 1 40 1 090 450 650 386 805 13 1 40 1 090 450 650 386 805 E 0 690 Bae Ue eee 500 700 348 682_ 50 1 167 224 475 710 324 725 13 1 1770 475 710 34 75 EEN 525 750 309 631 14 1 50 525 750 309 631_ 1 50 1 090 74 575 800 306 593 15 1 AA 1 50 1 040 625 825 281 489 16 1 50 1 040 2 625 825 281 489 1167 650 1000 309 525 17 1 60 1 167 650 1000 309 525 1 60 1 125 725 1050 34 658 18 1 60 725 1050 31
335. pright position again and use small Ball Driver in the hole in the Solenoid Shaft to break the connection between the Solenoid Shaft and the Spring Shaft Step 12 Once the above connection has been broken a small bladed screwdriver can be inserted into the center hole in the top of the Solenoid and the Solenoid Shaft unscrewed from the Spring Shaft Step 13 With the Pulser in the upright position remove the 3 screws in the legs of the Solenoid that screw into the Solenoid Cap Remove the Solenoid and set is aside Inspect the solder joints on the wires in the top of the solenoid that attach to the Male Bebro and the wire for any flattened or abraded areas Step 14 Remove the 5 screws holding the Solenoid Cap in place The Cap should be held in place when the last screw is removed as there are springs that will push it off Set aside 59 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Remove the 2 springs and 3 spacers the Spring Housing and Wire Tube 15 Remove the Bottom Oil Fill Housing and set aside 60 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 16 Remove the Compensator Housing Invert the Compensator Housing and using the brass punch remove the Compensator Carrier with the Membrane attached Inspect the Membrane for any marks or cracks Personally usually only replace the Membrane every second time the tool is serviced unless the tool has been flooded or the wires are broke
336. proper decoding This file can be viewed in the Bench Tree File Grapher program 12 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Viewing Log Files If you wish to view any of the logged data files click on the Data Logs menu This will give you the option to open the History folder or directly open up one of the current logs The history folder will contain all of the previous data log files as well as the current data files If you choose the View Current Log menu option you will be presented with the type of data log to open The log types are listed below with descriptions Processed This log contains all of the data received by the surface receiver and also some user controlled events Survey This log only contains data sent from the tool during the survey transmission sequence Events This log contains MWD operator events from multiple programs Changes to the receiver and the down hole tool are stored into this file Viewing Database Survey Reports The data logged into the database can be viewed using the data reports window To access this window click on the Data Logs menu and then select View Reports You will now be displayed the data from the currently open database You can select the particular data you wish to view using the tree on the left There are three levels of data to choose from and they are shown below The most upper level is the run summary overview The next level is the full run
337. pter 5 Operations Manual TROUBLESHOOTING Always start by isolating the GE Benchtree equipment from the EM equipment by unplugging the Transducer Pigtail cable You should still be able to see the tool transmitting with the Oscilloscope If this doesn t cure the problem change out the complete surface system Always keep in mind that EM is formation dependent so when an incident occurs see if you have drilled through a different formation that may have caused the problem Pull back into a formation where you know the signal was working NOISE OR LOST SIGNAL Adjust gains on the FI Receiver to amplify the signal Use the Oscilloscope to monitor the signal Adjust the High Low window to eliminate the noise out of the window area If you are experiencing a lot of noise try running off UPS battery power to eliminate the rig power When experiencing noise or loss of signal place the antenna rod as far away from the rig as possible Pour water around the antenna rod to dampen the ground for better contact Find a moist conductive material to plant the antenna rod in Pound the antenna rod deeper If there is a well nearby try tying the cable to the wellhead Check to ensure all cables and ground clamps are clean and secure Run new cables Notice if there are any changes between on bottom signal versus off bottom signal This may indicate Isolation Sub failure Make sure the pump house and light plant are properly grounded Isolate Surfa
338. pth Tracking Software Package the Baud Rate MUST REMAIN at 9600 The problems with the cable length must be addressed some other way by shorting the cables to a usable length or switching to QSI manufactured cables Sc Chapter 5 Operations Manual Pre Run Tool Assembly Check List For Compass MWD Hot Hole Directional Only Select a level place on the ground and set out the jack stands or V blocks It is important that the assembly area be level to insure that the threads on the tool connections are not placed in a bind when they are assembled Standard Directional Only Configuration Pulser 1 Intermodule Battery 27 Intermodule Directional Module 3 Intermodule Spear Point Job No MWD Run No MWD Operator Date PLACE A INFRONT OF EACH STEP TO INSURE THAT THE PROPER PROCEDURE IS FOLLOWED PRIOR TO EACH RUN INTO THE HOLE Record the Serial Number of the Pulser selected 5 Record the Serial Number of the Battery Module and Battery selected SN Attach the Intermodule Connector to the DOWNhole end of the Battery Module Insure that the threaded ring connection is snug and NOT over torqued Note 6 PINS point UPhole and 4 PINS point DOWNhole Attach the Intermodule Connector and Battery assembly to the Uphole end of the Pulser module Insure that the threaded ring connection is snug and NOT over torqued Record the serial number of the Directional Module selected SN Attach the second In
339. r Multiple Line setups divide line pull a E reading on by the number of lines Pull the 52 Chapter 5 Operations Manual Equivalent ID Inches FH amp XH 27 16 2 11 16 2 9 16 2 13 16 4 157 FH 211 16 3 5 32 4 _ 166 IF 34 382 qu 3984 245122 iom sl 5 219 REG 24 440 3 13 16 4 13 16 ELE L3 m _4 6 282 m 15 58 529 32 596 53 Chapter 5 Operations Manual Tool Joint Specifications 1 TOOL JOINTS THAT ARE EQUIVALENTS AND INTERCHANGEABLE CONNECTIONS 3 4SH NC 31 EE M EE 3 IF 4 5 45 3 SIF 4 054 API 240 4 4751 41F 5 sse IF INTERNAL FLUSH SH SLIM HOLE XH EXTRA HOLE EH FULL HOLE DSL DOUBLE STREAMLINE SIF SLIM INTERNAL FLUSH API AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUE NC NUMBERED CONNECTION EF EXTERNAL FLUSH 54 Chapter 5 Operations Manual Approximate Weight Ibs of Non Magnetic Drill Collars Collar OD ID Length ft Weight Ibs 20 410 4 Vs 10 372 4 30 981 4 2 14 10 427 4 34 2 V4 30 1280 5 10 544 5 30 1632 5 10 615 5 30 1845 534 10 688 5 3 4 30 2065 6 10 797 6 30 2390 6174 10 860 614 30 2580 6 v 10 945 6 v 30 2835 6 3 4 1
340. r bank is a battery that can charge and discharge quickly The 28 volt battery in the tool string supplies the electrical energy required to charge the capacitor bank The capacitor bank in turn discharges the electrical energy required to energize the stepper motor The second component of the Pulser driver is the control circuit It is responsible for the encoding of the data from the directional module and the power from the capacitor bank and transferring it to the stepper motor As a result the control circuit can be considered to have a series of logic however it is not a computer A picture of the Pulser motor driver is shown below It is a combination of a Pulser control board and a capacitor bank which are placed inside a chassis carrier and encapsulated with sylgard One end has a 15 socket MDM which attaches to the motor section the other has a 6 pin Kintech style connector OIL FILL SECTION The oil fill section contains a stepper motor The motor is attached to a shaft that in turn is connected to the servo poppet Fixed to the shaft is the compensation membrane Initially the directional module creates an electrical signal that is transmitted to the control circuit The control circuit sends a message to the stepper motor The capacitor bank then energizes the motor The motor pulls the shaft attached to the servo poppet The servo poppet is now in an open position The pull force requires a large energizing charge supplied
341. r printing the viewed data or exporting the viewed data to a PDF file lare amp JAIDOOG EHE I 46 41 13 Survey Report repay L Wet 224 c 114 Cang fuck Tew 27777 i 1EDO 0 13x om um on a ET aD 3 nz 11 ao 1272 ma 277 ma 11 WD 1202 au 130 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 2 4 4 Survey Plots The survey plot screen will initially display a Vertical Plot that the user can zoom in scroll and print from Pressing the Horizontal Plot button will present a horizontal plot that can be altered in the same method as the Vertical Plot lai amp QQ RR STA Pit 300 1000 14m 1 T T T 1 1 7 T T T T 250 300 40 450 500 550 Vertical Section amp QQ n Vatic Prat North South The display has a toolbar in the upper left corner of the screen that provides the user with the following functions 131 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Zoom Scroll This function will provide selecting this a print preview before tool will allow printing each axis of the plot to be scrolled Zoom Axis up down or selecting this tool left right using will allow each the mouse axis to be zo
342. ractice with this program using the manuals provided by GE Power Systems to gain familiarity and master the troubleshooting process This manual contains a list of mnemonics with definitions to help select the proper labels to query the nodes Multipoint Mode qTalk Multipoint mode allows the PC to function like a standard qMIX device on the bus as either the master node or a slave node A background host process handles communications interrupts parsing and formatting of messages It uses its own link label LnkL and link address LnkA for communicating with other Multipoint nodes The PC keyboard and screen act either as a passive bus monitor or as an interactive point to point port with a unique link label for communicating with the host process Normal Operation and Colors During normal Multipoint operation the qTalk display monitors all bus activity with incoming characters in yellow and outgoing characters in light blue The operating mode for qTalk is displayed near the top right corner of the screen as a light blue character indicating one of four states M Master Mode S Slave Mode Idle Mode C Chat Mode Note qTalk displays the operating mode letters in upper or lower case according to the presence or absence of communication Upper Case Currently in communication with other devices Lower Case Not currently in communication with other devices 45 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Observe that
343. ram Select a resistor value on the test box and turn the flow to the on position on the fluid simulator test box Now observe the data coming up on the telemetry interface If you sent up GV2 you must divide the value by 13 4 to get the resistor value If you sent up GV3 then the value should match within plus or minus 1 5 ohms You can now turn the dial on the resistivity test box to different values and observe them on the telemetry screen The test box has five different settings on it They are 1 2 ohms 3 3 ohms 5 1 ohms 10 0 ohms and 22 0 ohms These different values can be selected by turning the dial on the top of the test box The actual value will be sent up as GV3 and should read within 1 5 ohms It is very important to have the different colored clamps of the test box attached in the correct spot on the tool The black hadled clamp must be connected on the top of the reciever insulator The Blue handled clamp must be connected anywhere between the reciever and transmitter insulator The red insulator must be connected on the down hole side of the transmitter insulator This setup is illustrated in the Test Setup Diagram Chapter 6 Resistivity GRT Tap Testing tool Without fluid simulator test box Once the tool is completely assembled and programmed a tap test can be performed When tap testing the tool you must not have the programming cable plugged into the tool or use inverse flow invf to turn on the flow sw
344. ram terminal mode only for extensive troubleshooting or for loading the GE Power Systems software to the system Only trained personnel should use terminal mode or the procedures for loading the GE Power Systems software 48 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software The operator can easily distinguish the qTalk terminal mode display from the Multipoint mode display The qTalk terminal mode display is monochrome not color and has unique menu options QTalk Terminal Mode Menus Press the F10 key to toggle between the two available qTalk Terminal mode menus The two menus read as follows Terminal Menu 1 Terminal Menu 2 F1 Exit F1 Exit F2 Remote F2 Remote F3 Auto LF Off F3 Display All Echo Off F4 EOL Chr Cr F5 Print Off F5 Idle F6 Baud 9600 F6 gMIX F7 Data Bits 8 F7 Chat F8 Stop Bits 1 F8 Errors F9 Parity None F9 Go to Multipoint F10 Next Menu F10 Next Menu QTalk Startup Menus Following are the soft key toggle options as displayed at startup The options are in parentheses Default options are in bold type Startup Menu 1 F1 Exit qTalk F2 Remote Local F3 Auto LF Off On F4 Echo Off On F5 Print Off On F6 Baud 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 115 2 F7 Data Bits 8 7 6 5 F8 Stop Bits 1 2 F9 Parity None Even Mark Spce F10 Toggles the Next Menu Startup Menu 2 F1 Exit qTalk F2 Remote Local Display I amp
345. ration Example The computer already has a COM1 and a The driver will add COM4 5 COM6 and If the depth tracking box is replaced then the driver may automatically assign 4 different ports to the list For instance if the box in the example above is replaced then the driver will remove 5 COM6 and then assign the replacement box COM ports to COM8 9 10 and COM 1 11 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Whatever the case always remember that THE LAST 4 PORTS ARE ASSIGNED TO THE USB TO SERIAL PORT ADAPTER The last COM port assigned will ALWAYS be for the depth encoder The second to last COM port assigned will ALWAYS be for the hookload sensor The other 2 COM ports are located on the back of the depth tracing box and can be used for external equipment communications such as WITS or for plugging into the steering tool or MWD receiver In the example above will be used for the depth encoder and COM6 will be used for the hookload sensor COM5 and will be located on the back of the depth tracking box 2 1 2 Geolograph Line Encoder The Geolograph encoder has a resolution of 25 counts per foot of block travel and is Atex certified for hazardous area usage The Geolograph encoder is scaled using the Data Logger 2 step calibration procedure 2 1 3 Drum Shaft Encoder The drum shaft encoder is Atex certified and is adaptable to either 1 14
346. re deploying the system into the field 1 Hardware Parameters a Drill Collar Size The well design will determine the BHA and the collars used in it However the MWD operators must be extremely aware of the parameters of the well sections that will use the MWD system Extreme flow around the body of the MWD probe can cause severe damage to the pressure barrels and other parts exposed to severe turbulent flow Therefore it is extremely important for the MWD operators to determine the maximum possible flow rates planned for the well in each of the different well sections Refer to Figure 1 to assist in determining which 1 0 would be best suited for the flow rates selected for each hole section involved Flow velocities of over 40 feet second can begin rapid erosion of the BeCu pressure barrels and other metal parts on the probe 171 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual FLUID Velocities in NMDC Fluid velocities in and around the MWD tool are extremely important The MWD operator is required to KNOW the ID of the NMDC and what the maximum flow for that particular size collar is allowed The chart is calculated on the use of water with very low solids Across the top of the chart is the list of collar ID sizes from 2 25 minimum ID to 4 00 maximum ID The list of collar ID sizes coordinate with colors to match the curve drawn on the chart On the left side of the chart is the scale for fluid velocities from O ft second to 50 ft second
347. re position and make note of the Uphole 6 pin connector end and the DOWNhole 4 pin connector end Insure that all of the switches on the Breakout Box PN 203140 are in the Break position Insert the leads of the Breakout Box into the appropriate ends of the Survey Electronics module With the leads of the test meter in the proper sockets black in COM red in O insert the black lead into the black sockets and the red lead into the red sockets of the Breakout Box and check the module for continuity 1 1 2 2 10 10 as instructed by the chart below and record the results on a copy of the blank form supplied 16 Chapter 5 Operations Manual For the subsequent test place the black meter lead into the Bus 1 red socket of the Breakout Box and the red meter lead into the Bus 2 red socket and continue to check the module 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 10 and then 2 3 2 4 2 10 so on according to the chart and record the results It is best to use a test meter with an auto ranging feature and a digital readout This will make the comparison of the results more accurate Please note that different meters are calibrated differently and may result in variations of the results listed in the example The technician should not be alarmed with slight differences 5 10 range in the readings Only gross differences should be noted and then should the system be returned for further evaluation Refer to Inspection of the Tran
348. reak position 2 Install load resistor in red plugs 1 and 2 3 Set Fluke meter to measure DC Volts and install in black plugs 1 and 2 4 Voltage of 28 29 VDC should be observed on standard batteries A voltage of 21 24 VDC should be observed on EM batteries BREAK 5 Make switches 1 and 2 loading the battery Max 30 seconds 6 A voltage of 25 26 VDC should be observed for a fully charged battery A voltage of 21 23 should be observed fora fully charged EM battery MODULE BREAK OUT UHIT OPHPPHPH HRY BREAK 7 A loaded voltage of less than 18 VDC would indicate the battery is unusable 8 If battery has sufficient voltage proceed to BATTERY CONTINUITY AND INSULATION CHECK NOTE These tests can be performed through the electronics if the tool is assembled Tests can also be performed through the bottomof the battery using plugs 1 and 3 148 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual INTERMODULE CONNECTOR BOW SPRING FIN CENTRALIZER INSULATION AND CONTINUITY CHECK 1 Hook up break out boxto both ends of interconnect with switches in the break position 2 Hook Fluke meter set to Ohms in Red Plugs 1 and 2 3 Move the red lead to plug 3 4 and so on through 10 and finally the housing 4 Readings of OL Open should be observed 5 Move the black lead to plug 2 and move the red lead to 3 through 10 and the housing 6 Continue moving the the black lead to the
349. replace the default 2nd stage bootloader with the file specified The file must be an S19 type file D path filename ext Specifies a diagnostic output file path name All switches allowed with the program may be entered on the command line and will be passed to the program Spaces are not allowed in the option switch portion of the run string When qProg 11 runs the terminal will display the following sequences i The source file is read while displaying the progress number of lines read number of bytes read and number of memory pages to be programmed ii Provided the operator did not enter the Go or No Verify switches the operator may next verify the programming information by viewing the status windows on each memory At this point entering G for Go causes the program to enter the bootloader stage 59 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Provided the operator did not enter the No Boot switch the program will begin transferring the next 2 stages of the bootloading processes Provided the operator did not enter the Go switch the program will instruct the operator to reset the target processor and enter C for Continue when the processor has been reset If the process fails to get the expected response after loading the first stage bootloader it will stop and ask the operator for instructions Abort Ignore or Retry If the second stage fails to load or respond as expected the program will
350. rive Noise Environmental Noise Permeates out from rig Properly ground floor motors pumps amp light plants Move antenna stake further away from rig Formations can cause a noisy signal signal may clean up once drilled through 25 Chapter 5 Operations Manual MAIN CABLE RIG FLOOR DISPLAY COMPUTER UPS SURFACE SYSTEM The EM Directional surface system is relatively simple and easy to set up The major components and their preferred locations are as follows GROUND RODS Typically 2 ground stakes are utilized One is clamped onto the rig s BOP while a second is driven into the ground as a reference The deeper a ground rod the better detection should be Often a noisy rig may require 2 ground rods be used and not the Rig s BOP Some alternative grounding antenna configurations are Rig anchors not connected to rig Metal culverts Old well heads Steel fence posts One cannot say for certain which works the best However operators will develop an innate understanding of what works effectively The main cable is run from the rig floor junction box to the junction box located in the work shack Each kit is supplied with two cables 75 m long and a short jumper that can be used to connect them should the rig be located a significant distance from the working shack The EM MWD utilizes the same cable as the standard Compass mud pulse systems The main cable should be clearly marked with flagging tape which han
351. rs and equipment connected to the WITS system In some cases the WITS system will use non standard Ids for depth and ROP data overcome this press the Configure WITS button and enter the 106 that the WITS technicians provide into the configuration form 122 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software NOTE These 14 will be permanently stored the computer and should be rechecked when changing to another WITS system To revert back to standard WITS 105 press the Default button next to each WITS ID Enter the WITS ID reported by the WITS for asch item below Press he DEF SILT butoe to reset to the staederd WITS assigned D Defeat Hols Depth 01 jon Dess Acquire Telemetry 2 3 Tool Startup and Diagnostics The last screen of the Data Logger startup wizard displays all data acquired from the various COM ports and functions as a diagnostics display This screen also contains all the various functions required for tool control report generation and data editing Dril Floor Dein Dats Block Hes 000 ror 93 M ero Woksge 257 excea 1056 01 Dac ie Facuves 6 29 2006 7515 PM gamma 4 Hole 1055 01 Slips Out Date Tiro Received 6 25 2006 753 18 Enable Logging a2 0 244 nIFA 234 4 Ret Held 0 900 Tod Logging IH Mokage 237
352. rt coming up as per normal Because the Receiver will not sense flow as a transducer you will not notice pumps on off when the flow is turned on off If the software does not cycle pumps off turn the gain down or unplug the transducer pigtail cable from the SAI There is noise that the Receiver is seeing as if the tool is transmitting Switch the pumps to override if the tool is not synced up but you see sync pulses coming up on the QMWDPC Switch back to Auto once you have sync The FI Receiver is seeing some noise as transmitting signal and cycles on off when the noise disappears This will cause the Receiver to miss the timing when the sync pulse is actually transmitting Pumps off survey sequence as above when pumps are off with no vibration the tool will shut off You will notice pumps down for 8 second and then the pumps clock will start up again and the survey will begin transmitting while the pumps are still off When the survey is received the transmitter will idle until the pumps come back on then will go directly to Toolface logging sequence TRIP OUT OF HOLE Turn the gain down or unplug the power to the Fl Receiver when you trip out of the hole Too high of gain can cause damage to the Fl Receiver Ideal voltage on scope is 4 6 Volts maintained Write down Gain vs Depths vs Volts on scope Watch formation being drilled through Adjust gain accordingly Trip out of the hole Turn off or turn down
353. s you will be a believer Good Luck 81 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Compass Stepper Positive Pulser The tool is fully retrievable and replaceable which saves rig time by eliminating pipe trips for directional equipment Compass Positive Pulser generates a sequence of pressure increment pulses in the circulating system enabling the transmission of MWD data recorded downhole to surface Description The Pulser Module consists of 3 main sections Pulser Drive and Oil Fill Section and a helix end The Pulser allows mud flow to be restricted creating a pressure differential by way of a main orifice poppet orifice assembly The movement of the main poppet in and out of the orifice creates an increase in pressure The two factors that greatly affect poppet movement are the operation of the electrical section of the module and the fluid pressure on the compensation membrane 82 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Features Temperature option up to 350 F 1759 Simple to operate under a wide range of flow rates from 35 to 1100 gal min Operable in lost circulation material concentrations of 50 Ibm bbl medium nut plug Servo technology for faster data rates stronger signal and superior ant jamming capabilities for reliable data transmission in difficult drilling Specifications UBHO Sub O D UBHO Sub Length Minimum Flow Rate Maximum Flow Rate Temperature Hydrostatic Pressure Operating Voltage
354. s KeyDrill Technology LLC KDT JobDir then restart Are you ready for a new Job 8 Select a DAQ data acquisition port for example COM2 for Compass Guidance s system and a WITS output port from the following dialog They have to be on different ports The Output Data Format could be a Gamma Output or a Standard WITS DAQ Comport Selection DAQ Communication Serial Port COM3 DMS WITS Serial Port Gamma Output Standard WITS Output Data Format If the same COM ports were selected for DAQ and WITS WITS port would be disabled 9 The following dialog shows the tool configuration file used for KDT receiver The file name and location is saved in the file C Program Files KeyDrill Technology LLC KDT ConfigLoc dat file 98 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software PPM Receiver KeyDrill Technology LLC Configuration is loaded from C Program Files KeyDrill Technology LLC KDT JobDir Config mwd 10 Please fill up the following window The Run must be between 1 and 99 Confirmation Messages Driller s Assembly Offset DAO 1 2 Degree Confirm the RUN 1 4 5 0 5 99 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software If RUN is 0 Zero it may be a new job so please save or rename the data files from the old job in C Program Files KeyDrill Technology LLC KDT JobDir to other locations first Enter the correct DAO number and confirm the RUN
355. s a result of the differences in pressure from inside the plenum to the outside AP the piston cap moves against the Main Spring to fill the volume left by the mud removed This results in the Signal Poppet on the end of the Main Signal shaft being removed from the Main Orifice This results in a full open flow situation in the area of the Main Orifice During this time the Servo poppet is in the closed position As the flow increases the value of AP increases No Flow Condition Mud Flowing Pulser Unactuated Mud Flowing Pulser Actuated 5 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation When the servo poppet is actuated in the data transmission sequence mud is allowed to instantly flow into the screen housing through the servo orifice This results in an almost instantaneous flow of fluid to fill the plenum and flow through the poppet orifice in the piston cap through the main signal shaft The result of this flow is the AP is neutralized and allows the Main spring to exert a downward force on the main signal shaft to close Along with the extreme fluid flow velocity and the main spring the signal shaft forces the carbide poppet tip into the flow passing through the signal orifice and decreases the total flow area TFA of the orifice and creates a flow interference and results in a pulse or increase in pressure This pressure pulse migrates to the surface through the drill pipe and is measured by the tra
356. s on You will know that the tool is down linked because it will take twice your transmit delay time to see pulses on your scope If you set your mud pulse to a different pulse width you will see the difference on the scope Keep the pumps on until the EM pulses disappear which should take about 1 minute At this time the EM receiver transducer cable can be unplugged and the pressure transducer from the standpipe can be plugged into the mud pulse receiver At this time you must change the surface receiver from the EM mode mode 1 3 to mode 4 modn You will also have to change the pressure transducer full scale ptfs to the correct number for your pressure transducer At this time you should see mud pulses on your computer screen You can then resume normal mud pulse drilling operations Be Chapter 8 PEM Tool Down Linking from Mud Pulse to Changing from mud pulse to EM is done by first turning the pumps off for 1 minute Then following the procedure detailed below Flow Flow 12 DLTP 1 2 DLTP flow off 1 minute min Flow OFF 1 2 DLTP DLTP command time period Flow OH Flow OH Flow Flow 1xDLTP 2xXDLTP 3xDLTP 4xDLTP MODE 1 MODE Mode 3 Mode 4 Once Pumps have been turned on leave on for one minute or until it switchs telemtry You will need to plug in your EM surface equipment to see pulses Once the tool has down linked the tool will resume normal EM operation 4 Chapter 8
357. s publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form by any means electronic mechanical by photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of KeyDrill Technology LLC Information furnished by KeyDrill Technology LLC is believed to be accurate and reliable however no responsibility is assumed by Ke yDrill Technology LLC for its use no for any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties that may result from its use No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent rights of KeyDrill Technology LLC 94 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software RECEIVER SPECIALS The KeyDrill Receiver KDT Receiver provides many special features for easy and reliable operation 1 KDT Receiver provides the best synchronization and detection abilities in the market KDT Receiver can run in Plug and Play mode This means that KDT Receiver can run automatically without the operator s help The Receiver wil save the data in the C PROGRAM FILES KEYDRILL TECHNOLOGY LLC KDT JOBDIR YYYY MM DD directory YYYY MM DD represents year month and day KeyDrill Receiver will automatically load all of today s decoded data and display it on the KDT Receiver screen on the History and Survey windows whenever the operator restarts KDT receiver software KDT Receiver software records all Pump On time on both RUN Daily
358. s selected then the wizard will proceed to the next page for configuring the equipment setup information There are 3 groups of information required and will be discussed in the following sub sections Tool Settings Survey Settings help the COM ports Device Manager gt North Relerence TRUE Teal NWD Sin dston Too Pat Kona sexes 142 Totsl 2840 Use Degh Encoder Pori Tocliace Ofiset 1643 T Use Hockoad Hovktoed Fort Servey Ofisei To 0 Enable WITS WITS Port 2 Configure Wits Garma 5654705 Une Calibration Blanket Background Counts Collar Aienusiion Facio 125 Calculate Hot Courts Germa To 3400 API Calibrator Rate 2 2 2 1 Tool Settings Tool Type Select from the list of available tools Port Choose which COM port the selected tool will be using Use Depth Encoder Check this box if you will be using the supplied depth encoder for tracking depth then select the COM port that it will be connected to Check the Drum Encoder box if you will be using the supplied drum encoder Leave this box unchecked if you will be using a Geolograph encoder Use Hookload Check this box if you are using the supplied hookload sensor in conjunction with a depth encoder then choose the COM port that this sensor will be connected to This will enable the Data Logger t
359. s we went with a BeCu that hopefully should eliminate all of the problems seen in the past We did however reduce the body length to open up the area around the orifice 2 On the old shaft mild steel was used A fairly common failure mode was for the shafts to bend at the polypac groove the new shaft we have shortened the shaft and used a high grade steel as a sort of saver sub Typically this is a retrofit item implemented when a shaft comes in bent In the original tools we had a single bearing We found that the bearing being used could not handle the loads and was also a mode of failure The first retrofit was to add a second bearing After an engineering review it was discovered that this did not make the improvement desired The new design goes back to a single bearing but one that is larger and easily able to handle the loads 86 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Look at tool s history checking for earlier problems and the tool s operating hours Also connect the pulser to a test box and ensure that the FLOW indicator light is Tap pulser for flow switch function Check Force Loosen all joints on pulser Remove screen housing Then remove the next housing the compensator housing 87 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Remove the compression spring from the pulser shaft Remove the compression spring from the pulser shaft Remove the loctite from the set screws with a pu
360. s will automatically restart the receiver and it will lose synchronization if they are changed during transmission decodes The newly added advanced variables are explained in detail below Pressure Transducer Offset Units PSI The amount of PSI to subtract out from the measured transducer pressure This is used to remove false pressure being reported by a damaged transducer Low Pass Filter Length Length The length of one of the receiver s noise removal filters A longer filter will remove more noise and produce smoother results A shorter filter will perform better when the pulses are on sloped pressure baseline and possibly in other situations Sync Amplitude Threshold Ratio The minimum ratio that the shortest sync pulse amplitude over the largest pulse amplitude must meet in order to be considered a valid sync Increasing this number will force the sync detection to be very strict and should only be done if the receiver is false synchronizing on incorrect pulses 10 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software MWD File Window This window will show you the contents of the currently loaded configuration file If you wish to view the current configuration in the receiver press the Refresh Configuration Data If you wish to save a configuration file from the receiver as a file on your computer press the Save Configuration To File and it will allow you to choose a filename Shock Window The shock window displ
361. sassemble tool and check resistance across gap Change out if less than 190 ohms Ensure sub is lying on wood etc so that there is no short DETECTION TROUBLESHOOTING Resolution Was tool transmitting on the rig floor See above Inside casing Detection inside Casing is not reliable but we have detected to 600 700m 1000 15008 Signal observed on oscilloscope Antenna on BOP or behind shack OK Check all surface receiving antenna wiring You should be able to see a signal on the fluke meter when checking the antennas Run more antennas Gain set OK Go back to 1x gain and try detection again Drilling by another casing string This can greatly attenuate the signal which will improve as the Downhole transmitter gets further away from the adjacent casing If signal is weak 1mV or noise is high try reducing the bandwidth in detect gt configure If you do this the frequency must be spot set when signal is strong Noise from the rig Try unplugging the UPS to isolate shuttle and top end box from the rig s power Signal looks better May need a generator Is there noise from adjacent pumps on wellheads Get the company man to shut them down 42 Chapter 5 Operations Manual ROTARY FLOW SWITCH BATTERY LIFE CONSUMPTION TABLE Run Battery a l ime Consumption Save TYPE OF WELL Profile Mola i Due on ios 43 Chapter 5 Operations Manual BATTERY LIFE COMPARISON CHART
362. schemes have been used for encoding MWD mud pulse signals A paper by Steve Monroe SPE 20326 1990 discusses the relative advantages and disadvantages of these methods especially with regard to their Data Rate data bits per second Pulse Rate pulses per data byte and Signal Efficiency data bits per pulse The method that QDT uses is not discussed in Steve Monroe s paper but has a name similar to one described in the paper We call our method coding We have chosen this method for its reasonable combination of good data rate and good signal efficiency as well as some desirable characteristics related to having to detect only a single pulse in the presence of noise 40 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation 2 M ary Coding QDT s coding method involves breaking up any data word into combinations of 2 and 3 bit symbols each encoded by locating a single pulse in one of four or one of eight possible time slots For example for the case of an 8 bit data word encoding a value of 221 is shown below Word value 221 maximum value 255 digital value 128 64 32 168 4 2 1 1 1 O 11 101 This encodes in M ary as 3 3 5 where the first 3 comes from the symbol containing 11 the two most significant bits of the digital word then 3 from the next symbol 011 and the final 5 from the 3 bit symbol 101 This is visually shown as 3 PP21076 5423 21 076 5 4 3 2 1 Start Of Data Word End Where the pu
363. sorbed in the surface system or below the tool 7 Is the BHA open ended or does it have bit on the end 9 Chapter 5 Operations Manual 8 Is the tool seated the mule shoe 9 Is the flow adequate and is the Poppet Orifice configuration tight enough to create a pulse at a lower flow 10 Is the Flow Switch INVF switch set to Off for a conventional flow switch Failure to Decode Pulse Start pumps and wait for tool to start pulsing After TxDT time has elapsed 1 Are pulses present on DRT Caution to distinguish between noise and pulses Yes go to step 3 No goto step 2 2 Are pulses present on standpipe gauge and or choke manifold Yes go to step 4 No go to step 3 Is the pump pressure accurately displayed on the DRT pulse wave form screen Yes go to step 4 No goto step 8 4 Is the processor decoding the pulsed data correctly Yes tool is working properly No go to step 5 5 Are the High Pulse Limit and Low Pulse Limit adequate to decode the pulse data correctly Yes Go to step 6 No Adgjust the settings 6 Are the DOWNhole tool and the Surface receiver configured correctly Yes Go to step 7 No Reconfigure 7 Are the Alert Pulse 4 1X Pulse and the proper number of Synch pulses sent and are they decoded by the Surface Receiver Yes Go to step 8 No Pull the tool and check the components refer to Surface Check of DOWNhole Tool 8 Is the transducer connected
364. sorbs Inspection of the Transorbs The transorbs are board mounted devices placed in line with the six Bus lines that are connected to the MPU The board is encapsulated in a resin compound designed to fit snugly in the up hole end of the module at the bulk head assembly The transorbs are voltage limiters designed to act as fuses the case of a long duration high voltage spike caused by static discharge or a short in the bus lines from the battery Should the operator measure an open line or other drastic differences in the continuity check of the module this would be the next location to be checked prior to sending the system back for further investigation MWD Roll Test Refer to the MWD Roll Procedure in the QDT MWD Training Manual for the proper procedure This routine will activate the entire Survey Electronics and display the measured values of each individual sensor in the module The Gamma Module can be attached and powered by the system to display the measured values for a simultaneous test of the Gamma module By using this routine the operator can visually inspect the measured values of each component for potential problems Perform a 25 point roll test according to the procedure and evaluate the measurements The results should fall into the ranges prescribed on the printout Should any of the results fall outside of the ranges go through the following flow chart and check the results This test should be performed before
365. specifications and tolerances required to fabricate a product 3 1 8 NCR A Non Conformance Report used to process defective material 3 1 9 In process Inspection An inspection completed during the manufacturing process often completed by the assembler This inspection requires documentation of the results when identified in the manufacturing procedure 41 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 3 1 10 Quality Control QC Inspection An inspection to be completed by a Quality Control Inspector Results are to be documented when specified on the flow chart or on associated documentation 3 1 11 MSDS Material Safety Data Sheets 3 1 12 PPE Personal Protective Equipment 4 0 RESPONSIBILITIES 4 1 It is the responsibility of the Manufacturing Manager to assign individuals to the specified tasks with the proper level of experience and or training to complete the tasks 412 It is the responsibility of the operator completing each process step to follow the requirements of the flow chart or documentation identified on the flow chart 4 1 3 It is the responsibility of the person completing each process step to identify deficiencies as they occur in the process Each individual is to initiate or insure initiation of a Nonconformance Report NCR when a defect occurs in the product at any point during the manufacturing process in accordance with SOP 290 15 1 4 1 4 It is the responsibility of the Quality Assurance department to ensure the Manu
366. ss paths through the length of the battery This procedure allows for the switching from one battery to another when the tool is using the stacked configuration With the Breakout box and the tool in the same position place the black lead of the volt meter into socket No 01 on the black lower row and place the red lead of the voltmeter into socket No 03 on the red upper row You should read a voltage of 29 DC 5 VDC With only the black row plug Down inserted voltage can be read from the black sockets Nos 1 amp 2 And with only the red row plug Up inserted the voltage can be read from the red sockets Nos 1 amp 3 Do this only if you are going to do a voltage check and not a complete continuity test Loaded Voltage Battery Check 1 3 To perform a loaded battery voltage it is currently advisable to place the Breakout Box in line with the system and configure the tool to pulse on the ground Refer to Dry Pulse Test Monitor the battery voltage as above while the tool is pulsing This will give the operator an indication of the voltage while the tool is operating with the load that the tool will see DOWNhole Note that these voltages are measured at ambient temperature on the surface and that the batteries will possible deliver a slightly higher reading after the system is warmed up 5 Chapter 5 Operations Manual 1 4 importance tracking the operating hours of the batteries and the on time hours cannot be
367. st and Vertical You must choose at least one of these directions to acquire any data It is recommended that you take full data sets for each direction at least once You may use the acquisition buttons Acquire and Skip to either manually acquire data or skip the current data acquisition There will be guidance arrows displayed on the graph directing you to the next desired data acquisition position Once you have aligned the tool to the correct positions the arrows will not be displayed and the data should be acquired when it becomes stable There will be a dark green rectangle in the middle of the tool face ring This is the marking of the user selected high side of the tool The red tool face direction wedge is the actual high side of the internal electronics and this is used for alignment because it provides more accurate roll test results Viewing Test Results After finishing all of the data acquisition sets you will be prompted to view the roll test results The results window will show you all of the acquired data from this roll test and the variance results for several different measurements The data is grouped by the orientation direction in which the data was acquired Each section that has data will have the minimum maximum and variance for each column at the bottom of the table This statistics section has a different color background than the data The roll test summary results are listed at the bottom of the window The data types b
368. stalled next Attach the Housing for the Compass Pulser Motor 96 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Mount the Ball screw housing over the Pulser shaft Replace the springs and spacer by sliding them back on the Pulser shaft Insert the pin and lock screw 97 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Install the Servo poppet tip Picture of compensator housing and screen housing With a compensator and membrane below Here is a picture of a compensator housing with the compensator already installed 98 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Compass Stepper Pulser Upgrade 99 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual The entire compensator assembly is then added to the pulser Followed by the screen housing Here the screens are installed along with the lock screw arf EA on 77 4 4 5 Un UPPER ASSEMBLY 100 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual LOWER ASSEMBLY 101 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Shown to the left is an earlier version of the Ball Screw Pulser Shaft Assembly still inside the Ball Screw Housing On the lower end which is shown protruding below the Ball Screw Housing Assembly above remover the Spacers and springs by simply sliding them off of the shaft On the upper end of the Ball Screw Assembly the set screw in the Lock Nut will need to be loosened using an Allen Wrench The screws on the shaft nut
369. sting and adjustment requires the following 5 3 1 Conductive articles of jewelry and clothing such as watchbands bracelets rings and necklaces shall not be worn while performing electrical work 5 3 2 Non conductive no metal frame safety glasses with side shields shall be worn at all times when working on inspecting or testing electrical equipments components 5 3 3 Only tools specifically designed for electrical work shall be used 5 3 4 Power supplies cords and switches shall be inspected for damage before use 5 4 When using the wire heat stripper care should be taken to prevent burns from the hot tip Inspect cord before use 5 5 Inspect all cords for nicks or frays before use 5 6 Whenever you work with chemicals read the MSDS and follow the PPE guidelines 6 0 TOOLS EQUIPMENT and MATERIAL 6 1 Tools and Equipment and or Equivalent 6 1 1 60 Drill 04 6 1 2 201349 Slave Test Tip 6 1 3 201845 Thread Protector Slaves x2 6 1 4 Air Gun 6 1 5 Brass Slave Shaft 6 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 6 1 6 6 1 7 Caliper 6 8 Chain Vice 6 9 Dental Pick 6 10 Feeler Gauge 6 11 Flat Narrow Blade Screwdriver 6 12 1 10 6 13 Gear Wrench 6 14 Hex Head Driver 1 1 16 6 1 15 Hex Head Driver 5 64 6 16 Hex Head Driver 7 64 6 a 17 Hook Wrench 6
370. stressed enough The easiest way to do this is to record the time that the tool is made up and the time that the tool begins pulsing start of drilling time and then the time the tool stopped end of drilling time and the time that the batteries are disconnected These time spans will give the operator the necessary data to compile a history battery usage By combining this data with the other configurations of the tool pulse width directional only or directional with gamma ray detector the operator will be able to accurately determine and predict the potential life span of his battery packs and determine how to obtain the maximum amount of battery life without jeopardizing the operation Compass MWD Directional Module Troubleshooting Guide The Directional Module contains the Compass electronics package and the DOWNhole processor Node 20 This module acquires all directional data and controls and commands the entire MWD tool and peripheral modules This package is designed to withstand tremendous amounts of DOWNhole shock and vibration but it must be noted that it contains numerous sensitive electronic devices that require care and attention when handled on the surface If any problems are suspected to exist with this system the operator should follow the prescribed procedures to assist in troubleshooting the module to determine the extent of if any damage Directional Module Continuity Check Lay the module in a safe and secu
371. supply lines are full and no bubbles are visible mark the current oil level on the reservoir with a permanent marker 7 1 30 Verify that valve C is closed 7 1 31 Open valve A 7 1 32 Power on the vacuum pump for 3 seconds then power off the vacuum pump 7 1 33 See the oil volume rise 2 inches for 30 minutes 7 1 34 Partially open valve C to 1 8 turn allow oil to move into the tool for 5 minutes 7 1 35 Close valve A 7 1 36 Watch the supply line for air bubbles as you hold the tool above your shoulders in a vertical position 7 1 37 When no more bubbles are visible rotate the tool 180 degrees and return it to above your shoulders 7 1 38 Move the tool to table level and tap it 5 to 10 times with a rubber mallet 7 1 39 Return the tool to its stand and verify that the connections are still in place 7 1 40 Allow the tool to pulse until you no longer see bubbles 7 1 41 Close valve C 7 1 42 Open valve A 7 1 43 Power on the vacuum pump until the gauge shows 28 5 inches of mercury 7 1 44 Close valve A 7 1 45 Power off the vacuum pump 7 1 46 Allow the tool to pulse until you no longer see bubbles 46 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 1 47 Fully open valve and watch the drop to the first and or lower mark 7 1 48 Switch off the knob and power off the pulser test box 7 1 49 Disconnect the slave cable from the MDM connector 7 1 50 Close valve B 7 1 51 Lay the tool in the
372. survey reports and the lowest level is the daily reports Each of the data report types will display the current job information at the top of the window above the other information You can also open up a previously created database from the file menu to view and print any of the database data from the menu 13 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software CHANGING PREFERENCES The preferences window may be accessed by clicking on the Settings menu and then click on the Preferences menu item This will open a new window showing you the current settings and what can be configured by the user This section will go into detail into each section of preferences Compass This section allows you to modify the displayed data on the compass window The displayed options will not be applied until all of the settings are saved with the Save button Colors Changes the colors of the displayed item listed next to the box Show Warning Flags This allows you to display or hide the possible warning values to the right of the compass Dim Older Tool Faces Selecting this will darken each of the older tool faces As they become older they are also displayed darker Tool Face Update Order This allows you to choose the way the new tool faces are updated on the compass Data Format This section allows you to change the displayed formatting for most of the received data Gravity Tool Face Display Allows you to display the number b
373. t 7 7 2 Install 1 O ring type AS 006 VITON 75D onto the oil fill housing plug 13 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 7 3 Apply silicone lubricant to the O ring 7 7 4 Inspect the oil fill housing port for burrs or cross threading 7 7 5 Clean the oil fill housing and port with blasts of air for 15 seconds 7 7 6 Install the plug to the oil fill housing port to finger tight 7 7 7 Install 1 O ring type AS 127 VITON 75D to the inner groove at 1 end of the oil fill housing 7 7 8 Install 1 O ring type AS 125 VITON 75D to the outer groove at the same end of the oil fill housing 7 7 9 Install 1 O ring type AS 127 VITON 75D to the inner groove at the other end of the oil fill housing 7 7 10 Install 1 O ring type AS 125 VITON 75D to the outer groove at the same end of the oil fill housing 7 7 11 Apply silicone lubricant to the inner and outer O rings at 1 end of the membrane support 4 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 7 7 12 Install the lubricated end the membrane support into the down hole end of the oil fill housing 7 8 Install Mud Compensator Housing 7 8 1 Apply silicone lubricant to the entire membrane liberally 7 8 2 Fill the 1 10 gap with silicone lubricant at the top and bottom of the membrane where it extends past the outer ridge of the membrane grooves 7 8 3 Apply silicone lubricant to the O rings at the top and bottom of the membrane support 7 8 4 Cle
374. t the Uphole end of the Battery Pressure Housing install the Uphole Intermodule End then torque tight with two Gearenches 130 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 5 13 Connect the Bulkhead Retainer to the Intermodule End with two screws Tighten the screws with the 1 8 Hex driver 5 14 Install the Interconnect Housing and torque it tight with two Gearenches 131 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 5 15 Install the End Protectors 5 16 Install the Safety Plug into the side of the battery housing near the uphole end with 1 4 Hex driver 132 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 0 2 BILL MATERIALS BOM Battery Module Non Serialized Part Part Product Number Size Line Description 201509 1 7 8 MWD Housing Interconnect 201514 1 7 8 MWD Intermodule End 201650 1 7 8 MWD Housing Battery Vent Plug 201845 1 7 8 MWD Thread Protector Male 601001 1 7 8 EM Battery Barrel Long 201505 Common MWD Bulkhead Retainer Top 90 Degree 201506 Common MWD Split Shell 201521 Common MWD Bulkhead Retainer Bottom 45 Degree 201617 Common MWD Snubber Assembly Battery 201645 Common MWD Battery Vent Plug 201991 Common MWD Pigtail Battery 601142 Common EM Antenna Rod 601145 Common EM Kit Bow Spring EM AS 011 Common MWD AS 011 O Ring Viton AS 016 Common MWD AS 016 O Ring Viton AS 124 Common MWD AS 124 O Ring Viton AS 127 Common MWD AS 127 O Ring Viton AS 217 Common MWD AS
375. t would be difficult to calculate manually Sensor Acquired Data Some of the corrected sensor values of the MWD tool are displayed in this display Header Information Information about the current roll test is displayed in this section Miscellaneous Notes Any notes entered via the header information dialogs are displayed in this section 73 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software User Instructions Feedback This constantly updated section informs the user of MWDRoll32 status and of operations currently allowed Manual acquisition of data is also available via two buttons Guidance Rose Display The Guidance Rose is designed to give the user a more intuitive and easy to read perspective on the MWD tool s orientation in space When MWDRoll32 has established communication with the tool this display will be active When not acquiring data the display will resemble one of these two images r Guidance Hose Guidance Rose 180 North East D South The ghosted image left is displayed when no tool is attached or in communication The colored image right is displayed when a tool is attached and in communication In the display you will find three essential pieces of information Inclination A vertical semicircle on the display s left side contains two colors yellow and green The intersection of the two colors indicates the tool s inclination In the picture above the inclina
376. tches No Go is the default When Go is used the program will proceed automatically without operator prompts The processor should be in the proper mode before executing the command line Go is used often once the programming procedure has been defined O NO The Overlay and No Overlay switches No Overlay is the default The Overlay switch enables overlays That is qProg 11 will not generate errors if the same address is written more than once qProg 1 1 assumes that if the same address is written more than once that the bootloader is controlling paging NP The Paging enable and Paging disable switches The Paging enable is the default and indicates the file filename exe specified on the command line contains code which is to be written to multiple pages at the same bus address The file should also contain the appropriate page control bytes Page control bytes are defined as a single byte with the base address of a device as its destination The value of the byte indicates the new page for the following bytes to be programmed N NV The Verify enable and Verify disable switches The Verify enable switch is the default and causes qProg 11 to display a verification window to allow verification for the programming configuration When neither the V nor the NV switches are used the G switch automatically disables verification an exception to the default Q The Quiet Mode switch The switch indicates that no prompts shou
377. te window only displaying received messages from the tool It will appear below the command response window Auto Send CCod 11 Before All Messages This will automatically set the capability code to all access mode allowing you to change any tool variables without manually changing the capability code 28 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Current Mode Standard l smission 1 Telemetry Transmission Options Sequences Location Specific Data Receive Delay Time Survey Header Size Directional Processing Controls Transmit Delay Time Tool Face Header Size Gamma Battery Pump Settings Number of Sync Pulses Sync Flow Settings 10 Pulse Detection Sync Window Factor Header Check Parity Down Link Control Disable Down Link Down Link Command Time Period Inclination Threshold 3 0 Inclination Evaluation Pulse widths 0 250 0 375 0 500 0 600 0 800 1 000 1 200 1 500 2 000 3 000 2 Transmission Sequences Survey Sequences Survey Sequence 1 Inc 12 Agm 12 12 6 Temp 9 Survey Sequence 2 Inc 12 Azm 12 Dip 12 H 6 Temp 9 Survey Sequence 3 Inc 12 Agm 12 Dip 12 Grav 26 Temp 9 Survey Sequence 4 Inc 12 zm 12 Dip 12 Grav E 6 Temp 9 Tool Face Logging Sequences T L Sequence 1 60 6 BatV 6 Bat2 60 aTFA 6 Temp 6 T L Sequence 2 MWD Configuration File Creator wit
378. ter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Note These screws should be barely snug to allow the Bulkhead Retainer to self align when installing the Interconnect Housing next step AS124 Groove UPHOLE Figure 5 201 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 2 3 Grease O rings and thread Interconnect Housing place as shown Grease O ring and install Thread Protector not shown into open end of Interconnect Housing 222222772225 UPHOLE 7222227227 gt Figure 6 3 Continuity Check Measure resistance Do not use audible alarm Verify continuity between connector pins at opposite barrel ends as listed in Table 1 below MEN ohm d End d Table 1 202 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 1 2 GAMMA BOM Gamma Module G E Tensor Asset Part Number Size Product Line Description 201949 1 7 8 MWD Gamma Module 175 C Serialized Part Part Number Size Product Line Description 2019495 1 7 8 MWD Gamma Module 175 C 201948 Common MWD Gamma Sensor 175 C Non Serialized Part Part Number Size Product Line Description Quantity 201509 1 7 8 MWD Housing Interconnect 2 00 201514 1 7 8 MWD Intermodule End 2 00 201532 1 7 8 MWD Housing Pulser Driver 1 00 201845 1 7 8 MWD Thread Protector Male 2 00 120001 Common MWD Temp Tab B 1 00 120002 Common MWD Temp Tab C 1 00 201505 Common MWD Bulkhead Retainer Top 90 Degree 1 00
379. termodule Connector to the DOWNhole end of the Directional Module Insure that the threaded ring connection is snug and NOT over torqued Note 6 PINS point UPhole and 4 PINS point DOWNhole 4 Chapter 5 Operations Manual Attach the Intermodule Connector and the Directional Module to the uphole end of the Battery Module Insure that the threaded ring connection is snug and NOT over torqued SECURE the VENT PLUGS on the Battery Module Record the serial number of the Spear Point Assembly selected SN Attach the Intermod Conn to the Spear Point Assembly and place this module to the side for attachment later Insure that the threaded ring connection is snug and NOT over torqued Note 6 PINS point UPhole and 4 PINS point DOWNhole Configure Tool for DOWNhole Operation Attach the programming plug and cable to the uphole end of the survey electronics and connect the cable to the SAI Enter the qMWDOnfg Program on the PC and select the previously configured MWD file from the directory and check the flow sense and insure that it is in the ON position STORE the MWD configuration to the DOWNhole Tool only Remove the programming plug from the top of the tool This insures that the tool is operating on its own power INSPECT the tool and insure that the SERVO POPPET is ACTUATING Re attach the programming plug cable to the top of the Directional 5 Chapter 5 Operations Manual Module From the qMWDOnfg Progra
380. that the screens are intact and none are missing Inspect for severe wear and erosion and replace any screens that are damaged Screens with oversized holes should be changed out with new or less worn screens 12 Chapter 5 Operations Manual Level of Silicone Oil There three areas to check the oil level in between runs Look at the bellows and check for any leaking in and around the screen housing area Push the bladder in with a BLUNT instrument 5 16 Hex driver in one of the two middle holes and feel for resistance If the bladder feels like it collapses without any resistance then check the third area The third area to check is the oil fill plug Removing this plug should only be done by a trained and experienced operator Oil Fill Plugs The oil fill plugs should not be removed from the pulser in the field unless an oil fill kit is available on location and the operator is proficient in the oil fill procedure Should the operator decide not to run the pulser prior to returning to the shop the plug can be opened for inspection Keep this area clean from all debris Clean the plug and screwdriver slot area completely prior to removal If the pulser is cold the oil may not appear at the surface If the pulser is warm or hot then oil may well up and spill over the rim of the port Pulser Driver Assembly The pulser driver assembly is an electronic device Field inspection should be kept to the minimum of a visual inspection
381. that you are in the correct directory C qMWD qTCR 16 Load the qMIX 11 Operating Parameters Receiver Operating Parameters and the qMWD Receiver Program by typing ProgAll and pressing the Enter key 17 Turn the system power Off and then On again 70 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software ROLLTEST Tensor MWDRolI32 System Utility Version 3 00 July 2003 This document is an unpublished work Copyright 2003 Revised GE Power Systems All rights reserved This document and all information and expressions contained herein are the property of GE Power Systems and are provided to the recipient in confidence on a need to know basis Your use of this document is strictly limited to a legitimate business purpose requiring the information contained therein Your use of this document constitutes acceptance of these terms Overview MWDRoll32 is a standalone piece of software used to verify correct operation of Measurement While Drilling MWD tools manufactured by GE Power Systems Using MWDRoll32 entails performing various tests both logical and physical prior to the use of MWD tools MWDRoll32 diagnostics reports from a correctly functioning tool will fall within the guidelines for satisfactory operation while a non functioning or mal functioning tool will fail to reach these guidelines MWDRoll32 software places only limited demands on client computer systems and does not require new or powerful machines
382. the battery for record keeping 5 2 Insert Battery into Downhole end of Battery Pressure Housing Note Battery replacement must always start at the Downhole end of the Battery Pressure Housing 5 3 Put Loctite 246 Blue on threads of Downhole Intermodule End Snubber Unit screws Screws have Loctite on threads and are ready to be installed 126 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 5 6 Insert Battery into Battery Pressure Housing 5 7 Screw the Battery with Downhole Intermodule End Snubber Unit into Battery Pressure Housing using the Spanner Wrench 127 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 5 8 Torque the Intermodule End to the Battery Pressure Housing witl two Gearenches 5 9 Place two Split Shells on end of Pig Tail Apply grease to O ring on 4 Pin Connector 201521 201506 201514 ELL NA Groove 128 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual m 5 10 Connect the Downhole Bulkhead Retainer to the Intermodule End with two screws Use the 3 32 Hex driver to tighten the screws Note Tighten the two screws only until barely snug to allow the Bulkhead Retainer to self align when the Interconnect housing is installed 129 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 5 11 Install the Interconnect Housing over the Bulkhead Retainer and screw on to the threaded portion of the Intermodule End Tighten the Interconnect Housing with two Gearenches 5 12 A
383. the drillstring or the mud flow rate to send information from the surface to downhole tools Making changes to the drilling parameters in order to send information to the tools generally interrupts the drilling process causing lost time Compared to mud pulse telemetry electronic pulse telemetry is more effective in certain specialized situation such as underbalanced drilling or when using air as drilling fluid However it generally falls short when drilling exceptionally deep wells and the signal can lose strength rapidly in certain types of formations becoming undetectable at only few thousand feet of depth The transmission of electrical energy by wires the broadcasting of radio signals and the phenomenon of visible light are all examples of the propagation of electromagnetic energy Electromagnetic energy travels in the form of a wave Its speed of travel is approximately 3 x 10 m s 186 000 mi s in a vacuum and is somewhat slower than this in liquid and solid insulators 28 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation An electromagnetic wave does not penetrate far into an electrical conductor and wave that is incident on the surface of a good conductor is largely reflected Electromagnetic waves originate from accelerated electric charges For example a radio wave originates from the oscillatory acceleration of electrons in the transmitting antenna The light that is produced within a laser originates when electrons fall from a hi
384. the valve opened to maintain a good vacuum The pump should not have to be run on a continuous basis if you don t have any leaks Do however maintain a good vacuum 78 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual This is the loop that needs to be maintained when the pulser 15 raised 9 If not mentioned earlier the Pulser should be pulsing almost continuously while trying to get the air out of the system This together with the air being expanded and contracted via the raising and lower of the tool helps to get the air to move by some of the tight tolerances and out of the Pulser 10 Normally it will get more difficult to get the air out after a few hours There are a number of things that can be done to encourage the air to move by the tight tolerances Included would be the following a Stand the Pulser up in a corner while pulsing In the picture below the Pulser is setting onthe Tapping Block After letting it sit for a while hopefully to let air migrate toward the top the Pulser can be tapped and then raised b The next time needed a break may set it up the other way bottom up Do not tap the tool on the up hole end as you may damage the snubber shock 79 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Communications Cable The pulser in the upright position with the communications cable attached to the top and the oil fill plug in the lower port The Tapping Block is used on a regular basis Note the damage to the block
385. they should be neatly arranged to preclude shorting Y Individual cells should be transported in plastic trays set on pushcarts This will reduce the chances of the batteries being dropped on the floor causing physical damage v All inspection tools callipers rulers etc should be made from non conductive materials or covered with a non conductive tape Y Batteries should be inspected for physical damage Batteries with dented cases or terminal caps should be inspected for electrolyte leakage If any is noted the battery should be disposed of in the proper manner 144 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual STORAGE Batteries should be stored in their original containers Store batteries in a well ventilated cool dry area Store batteries in an isolated area away from combustible materials Never stack heavy objects on top of boxes containing lithium batteries to preclude crushing or puncturing the case HANDLING DURING PRODUCT ASSEMBLY v Y lt All personnel handling batteries should wear appropriate protective equipment such as safety glasses Do not solder wires or tabs directly to the battery Only solder to the leads welded to the battery by the manufacturer Never touch a battery case directly with a hot soldering iron Heat sinks should be used when soldering to the tabs and contact with the solder tabs should be limited to a few seconds Batteries should not be forced into or out of battery holders
386. thing in place There is a Split Spring that fits below the Bebro and which holds the Bebro tight against the Retaining Ring 67 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Be cautious when pulling the wires out of the holes in the side the Solenoid to avoid pulling them out of the Solenoid or damaging the solder connections Once the Bebro is in place and held there by the Retaining Ring the wires can be pushed back inside of the Solenoid Again check the connections to the Bebro to ensure that no damage to the solder connections has occurred while stuffing the wires back into the Solenoid Step 17 The Oil Fill Housing can now be attached Normally this will screw on without a problem Once in a while it will seem tight which is the result of the solenoid being a little miss aligned By simply knocking the side of the Oil Fill Housing the Housing should be able to screw into the Lower Fill Plug without a problem Step 18 Install the Top Oil Fill Housing on the Assembly and tighten all of the connections Again check the connections in the assembly at the MDM the EFS should also be checked at this point The instructions for doing this are in the next section You are now ready to do an oil fill on the assembly 68 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual PULSER WIRING FLOW SWITCH CHECKS 1 Solder clean with alcohol then shrink wrap wires between the Male Bebro and the Solenoid using the following as a guide
387. tion 2 1 Inspect all accessible fasteners and check for tightness 2 2 Inspect the UpHole end of the Snubber Shock Assembly and the DownHole end of the OM where the two ends are joined to make sure that the ends DO NOT rotate with respect to each other and DO NOT move lengthwise with respect to each other 2 3 Inspect the rubber like compound on the snubber shock for any visible signs of deterioration or separation from the structure Check for any traces of black powder residue or other foreign matter that may indicate excessive abrasion and wear in the area of the Snubber Shock 2 4 Check all screw connections along the assembly as it is carefully removed from the Pressure Housing It is very important to provide support to the Snubber Shock as the tool is removed Reassembly of Directional Module 3 1 Clean and inspect all O rings Replace all damaged or old O rings Lubricate O rings thoroughly with DC4 400041 Clean and inspect all mating threads and O ring surfaces 3 2 Carefully slide the assembly back into the lower end of the pressure Housing and screw together hand tight 3 3 Carefully thread the pigtail through the UpHole Intermodule End and screw itin place hand tight 154 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Note The castellated end with the two screw holes should be left exposed 3 4 Match the Split Shell pair around the UpHole 6 pin connector and hold with one hand Line up the slot in the UpHole e
388. tion is at roughly 90 If the tool is oriented upwards the yellow arc will span 180 to the top If the tool is orientated downwards the green arc will span 180 to the bottom Azimuth The blue arc in the outermost complete circle indicates the azimuth It always starts from the top 0 and wraps clockwise around to the current azimuth angle In the above picture the azimuth is approximately 97 High Side The red line in the inner circle indicates the High Side When the tool is rotated this line will move and constantly display the roll angle of the MWD tool In the above picture the High Side is approximately 253 When acquiring data the display will resemble one of these two images 74 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Guidance Rose Horizontal 90 Horizontal 90 Stable E Stable E Feimuth Bl Feimuth E High Side Bl High Side Inclination E 09 South Inclination E When acquiring data the rose displays five additional indicators The most prominent indicator is the green pie section which indicates the recommended High Side for the current data shot During a roll test the pie section rotates through 8 ordinal positions evenly spaced at 45 intervals The user must align the High Side red line indicator within the green pie section The other four indicators are colored boxes located in the lower right corner of the rose display These four boxes give the user feed
389. tion is selected a popup window will be displayed every time a pressure transducer error is detected Show missed synchronization window If this option is selected a warning window will be displayed if the pumps are on for 3 minutes without synchronization Saved Files This section will allow you to modify what data is saved to your computer s hard drive and also how to separate the data files Save Pressure Files to Disk Selecting this will record the raw and filtered pressure data to the hard drive Compress Data This will compress the raw pressure data to about 1096 of the original size The compressed data is good for storing on the hard drive but is not as good for deeper analysis of possible transmission or detection problems Sounds This section allows you to turn on and off the program sounds You are also allowed to choose your own custom wav files to play for a particular event You can enable or disable all sounds by checking the top box You can also disable a particular sound by using the check box next to the sound 15 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Pumps On This sound will play when the pumps go from off to on Sync Pulse This sound is played when the sync pulse is received Pumps Off This sound is played when the pumps go from on to off Error This sound is played when an error window is displayed TF Update This sound is played every time a new tool fa
390. to look for physical damage caused by excess vibration or fluid invasion If there is any doubt to the integrity of the assembly it should be returned to Compass for inspection and possible repair Servo poppet Actuation with Pulser Test Box Actuation of the pulser with the Pulser Test Box will give a complete test of the pulser s electronic and mechanical parts However it is not capable of testing the flow switch Should the pulser not actuate then all of the connections from the box to the pulser and the power source should be checked 13 Chapter 5 Operations Manual Battery Troubleshooting Guide Batteries can be checked for proper operation by using the Breakout Box 203140 to check the unloaded voltage and continuity By assembling a complete tool with the breakout box in line between any of the modules and placing the tool into the dry pulse mode the loaded voltage can be monitored Note all unloaded batteries will read maximum after they have had time to recharge However after a load is placed on the system the batteries will display the true operating voltage The following instructions will guide the operator in the proper procedures to connect the system Battery Continuity and Unloaded Voltage Check 1 Lay the battery module flat and note the uphole and DOWNhole positions 1 1 WARNING Insure that all of the switches on the breakout box are in the Break position This will prevent you from completing a circ
391. to the Bus 2 red socket and continue to check the module B1 R2 B1 R3 B1 R4 B1 R10 B1 Barrel and then B2 R3 B2 R4 B2 R10 B2 Barrel and so on according to the chart and record the results All of these readings should measure OL Should any reading other than OL be measured then the possibility of a short exist and the check should be rerun and the procedure be checked before breaking down the unit If the test is consistent then the unit has a short connection and requires rebuild by a qualified technician 9 Chapter 5 Operations Manual SECTION B EM B 1 MECHANICAL PRE JOB CHECKS Well Information Evaluate the job to select the best operating parameters Formations to be drilled Resistivity logs Depth of hole Casing depth Drilling fluids Select Power setting Select Pulse width KIT REQUIREMENTS The Compass EM requires these additional components along with the standard Compass MWD System Compass Transmitter Module Isolation Sub Extended Battery Module 20 Chapter 5 Operations Manual Power Supply Cable ground prong removed Antenna Cable BOP Cable BNC Cable Transducer Pigtail Cable TEST EQUIPMENT Frequency Interface Receiver Transmitter Test Box Oscilloscope Line Conditioner optional Power Bar with the ground removed on the plug RUNNING GEAR Antenna Rods Clamps 21 Chapter 5 Operations Manual COMPASS TOOL The Directional Module accumu
392. to three functional components Data Logger which is responsible for acquiring data from the various tools and other sources and logging this data into the database GeoLogPlot is used to retrieve logged data from the database to generate plots LASBuilder will also retrieve data from the database to generate LAS compatible file for exporting to other applications 2 Data Logger Operations The Data Logger application is used to create a database for storage then acquire data and log this data into the database The Data Logger is designed as a startup wizard type application that will walk the user through each step in the creation of the database and the configuration of the tool and equipment used 2 1 Equipment The equipment supplied is used for depth tracking in conjunction with the Data Logger application Equipment used for depth tracking operations are 2 1 1 Depth Tracking Box The depth tracking box contains the following Depth encoder tracking and display module Hookload sensor measurement and display module Built in USB to serial port adapter with 2 ports used for the above devices and 2 serial ports on the back of the box for connecting to external equipment Intrinsically safe barriers for the encoder and hookload sensors The internal USB to serial port adapter is supplied with drivers that automatically assign the 4 ports to be the last 4 ports listed when selecting a port to use in the Data Logger configu
393. tom Refer to Figure 2 Be acutely aware of possible pinch points and keep hands and fingers clear Stay in communication with the hoist line operator Then lower the tool to allow bale to rest on top of NMDC Be aware not to damage the shoulder of the NMDC c Remove J latch and transfer pick up line to bale sling d Make contact with the hoist operator and slowly pick up tool while spraying with water wipe down tool with rags and inspect all parts of the tool for wear If the tool failed do not wash down tool only wipe with rag Make note of any irregularities or excessive wash on the tool string Make a report of the condition of the tool on the run report e Stop at the screen housing inlet screens Wash out the servo poppet area behind the screen thoroughly Continue to pick up tool slowly f Ease the tool over the edge of the collar and instruct the hoist operator to hold the tool steady and securely Then manually push the signal poppet up and down Movement should be firm but smooth Spray water up through the opening at the bottom of the signal poppet Manually push the poppet shaft up and down to force out all mud and water Do this until fluid is clean g Attach the poppet protector to the bottom of the tool h Carefully guide the tool over to the railing next to the V door and carefully lower the tool down Guide the tool down and do not allow the tool to drag or bump the sidewall Grab the lower end of the pulser
394. tool above the box end of the non Mag collar and have the hoist operator slowly lower the tool down until the lifting bale rests gently on the top of the NMDC Give the tool one last visual inspection as it is lowered into the collar Carefully inspect the latching device to insure that it is secure L Slowly rest the lifting bale arms on the top of the collar and slack off on the hoist line Take extreme care not to damage the shoulder of the NMDC 46 Chapter 5 Operations Manual m Release the hoist line from the sling of the lifting bale assembly and attach the hoist line to the top shackle of J latch assembly If the shackle is damaged or missing the rope Socket may be used attached to the rigs slickline Insure the proper amount of spacer bars between the J latch and the shackle assembly to lower the tool to the Mule Shoe n Attach the J latch onto the pins of the spear point of the MWD tool and secure the pins in the J latch by pushing down and turning the J latch counter clockwise Direct the hoist operators to slowly lift the tool assembly connected to the J latch and lift the tool about one foot and remove the lifting bale assembly Be acutely aware of possible pinch points and keep hands and fingers clear p Contact the Directional Supervisor to witness the next operation This is a requirement Instruct the hoist operator to gently lower the tool down into the collar until the tool contacts the Muleshoe sleeve DO NOT run
395. tres is the magnetic latitude 90 0 where magnetic colatitude measured in radians or degrees from the dipole axis Magnetic colatitude is O along the dipole s axis and 90 in the plane perpendicular to its axis m is the dipole moment VADM virtual axial dipole moment measured in ampere square metres A m which equals joules per tesla Ho is the permeability of free space measured in henries per metre Conversion to cylindrical coordinates is achieved using 22 arcsin 2 where is the perpendicular distance from the z axis Then 322 Baie s 23 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Vector form The field itself is a vector quantity 2 xu dc B m r 5 3 m m AKT 3 where B is the field r is the vector from the position of the dipole to the position where the field is being measured ris the absolute value of r the distance from the dipole r rir is the unit vector parallel to r m is the vector dipole moment Ho is the permeability of free space 3 53 is the three dimensional delta function 0 except at 0 0 0 so this term is ignored in multipole expansion This is exactly the field of a point dipole exactly the dipole term in the multipole expansion of an arbitrary field and approximately the field of any dipole like configuration at large distances Magnetic
396. ty LEE Track Comment Ten Survey Meaaured Depth 9600 00 21 NS 61 99 f 25980 Azimuth 3317 4400 Proposed Azimuth 2705 Lem _ oat Once all of the information is entered press the BROWSE button to choose a database name The Data Logger will prompt the user for a file name to use and will suggest a database name using the Job Number Track Comment and the current date and time as illustrated in the figure below If the database has already been created then the input of the job information is not necessary Press the BROWSE button and select an existing database to open and the information fields will be updated 113 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Look in ex E3 E job 1234 Track 1 November 13 2005 mdb 2 Test mdb s Documents My Computer My Network E File name 1234 Track 1 November 13 2005 mdb Files of type Log Databases mdb Cancel 2 In this example the Job Number was entered as job 1234 The Track Comment is Track 1 The date and time this database was created is November 13 2005 As a suggested file name the Data Logger concatenates this data together to provide a unique name The user may simply enter another name if the suggested file name is not what they wish to use 114 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software 2 2 2 Tool and Equipment Setup Once the master database i
397. uit through the breakout box Insert the plug marked Down indicates DOWNhole orientation of the breakout box on the box into the uphole end of the battery module end nearest the vent plug Insert the plug marked Up indicates uphole orientation of the breakout box on the box into the DOWNhole end of the battery module end opposite the vent plug With the voltmeter in the Ohms resistance position place the black lead into the No 1 position and the red lead into the opposite No 1 position you should observe a closed circuit activate the audio alarm if available With either of the leads not both insert one of the leads into the No 2 socket and then into the No 3 and so on to No 10 Each time you should observe an open circuit no sound If a closed circuit is observed heard then a short is present between those two lines Next place the lead that remained in socket No 1 into socket No 2 of the same color Place the other lead into socket No 2 of the opposite color At this point you should observe an opened circuit no audio alarm This is O K Continue to socket No 3 with the second lead and you should observe a closed circuit audio alarm 4 Chapter 5 Operations Manual This is Continue to check the circuits by following the same routine to determine if any of the Bus lines are shorted to another Bus and the housing components Refer to the battery pack wiring diagram and note that Bus 2 and Bus 3 cro
398. ulser Oil Fill Test 2 5 SOP 2060 Pulser Lever Performance Test Dry and Wet Procedure 2 6 SOP 2024 Pulser Force Test Procedure 2 7 SOP 2087 Wire Prep for Solder Procedure 2 8 201002 QDT MWD Maintenance Manual 2 9 Serial Number Log 4 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual 2 10 Assembly Work Package 3 0 DEFINITIONS 3 1 Assembly Drawing An engineering drawing with product specifications and tolerances required to fabricate a product 3 2 EFS Electronic Flow Switch 3 3 MSDS Material Safety Data Sheets 3 4 NCR A Non Conformance Report used to process defective materials 3 5 PPE Personal Protective Equipment 3 6 Quality Control QC Inspection An inspection to be completed by a Quality Control Inspector Results are to be documented when specified on the flow chart or in associated documentation 3 7 Traveler A document contained in the Work Package that identifies the manufacturing and inspection steps required for the fabrication assembly and testing of a product 3 8 Work Package A package that may contain the Traveler Pick List or Bill of Materials relevant Assembly Drawings and other related documents needed to fabricate a product 4 0 RESPONSIBILITIES 4 1 It is the responsibility of the Manufacturing Manager to assign individuals to the specified tasks with the proper level of experience and or training to complete the tasks 4 1 1 It is the responsibility of the operator completing each proc
399. um of 110 16 inches and a minimum length of 98 66 inches Any lengths outside of this will miss align the bow spring contact points on the BHA Good practice is to leave the two resistivity subs torqued together to prevent thread damage and re cuts of the threads This will keep the length between the insulators constant If the length between the bottom insulator of the bottom resistivity sub and the top insulator of the top resistivity changes this will affect the resistivity readings and cause interconnect contact spacing problems EXAMPLE This is an example of how to determine if a BHA is the correct length UBHO sub setscrew to box 22 0 Pony Collar 70 00 RES SUB 1 15 00 from pin thread face to bottom insulator Total Length 107 00 This value falls in between the 110 16 inches and the 98 66 This would be a good BHA to run Resistivity Length Diagram Drill Bit Set Screw UBHO Sub Pony Collar RES SUB1 RES SUB2 Drill Collar Mud Motor t N _ 22 0 70 0 15 0 11 5 44 15 0 11 6 14 22 05 64 69 14 17 9 25 13 5 14 47 13 5 30 5 110 16 Helix to TX insulator Helix Plenum PULSER TRANSMITTER RECIEVER DIRECTIONAL UNIT 6 Chapter 6 Resistivity GRT Testing the Tool before Putting in the Ground There are four variables that are transmitted to the directional module They are resistivity resistance voltage and current Resistivity It is a unit i
400. ut to an electromagnetic current receiver located remote from the downhole assembly and typically at the surface of the earth Alternately voltage resulting from the induced signal current can be measured with a rig voltage receiver and combined with the direct current measurements to enhance signal to noise ratio EM MWD surveys are measured in a matter of seconds immediately before the next connection and then transmitted during connection Thus the directional driller can decide which drilling parameters such as weight on bit and rotary speed to use as soon as the bit tags bottom Conversely mud pulse MWD systems transmit surveys after connections which increase drilling time when the driller waits to receive the directional survey before deciding which parameters to use before drilling ahead Dipole Any object or system that is oppositely charged at two points or poles such as a magnet a polar molecule or an antenna element The properties of a dipole are determined by its dipole moment that is the product of one of the charges by their separation directed along an axis through the centers of charge 16 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation An electric dipole consists of two electric charges of equal magnitude but opposite polarity separated by a short distance see illustration or more generally a localized distribution of positive and negative electricity without net charge whose mean positions of positive and negative charge do
401. vector potential The vector potential A of a magnetic dipole is Ho 42 m x r with the same definitions as above 24 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Field from an electric dipole The electrostatic potential at position to an electric dipole at the origin is given by 1 p 4 r P r where a unit vector in the direction of p is the vector dipole moment o is the permittivity of free space This term appears as the second term in the multipole expansion of an arbitrary electrostatic potential If the source of is a dipole as it is assumed here this term is the only non vanishing term in the multipole expansion of The electric field from a dipole can be found from the gradient of this potential 3 p r r 1 3 E V rem 2 p r ACQ 3 g 3 where E is the electric field and 6 is the 3 dimensional delta function 0 0 at r 0 0 0 so this term is ignored multipole expansion Notice that this is formally identical to the magnetic field of a point magnetic dipole only a few names have changed Torque on a dipole Since the direction of an electric field is defined as the direction of the force on a positive charge electric field lines point away from a positive charge and toward a negative charge When placed in an electric or magnetic field equal but opposite forces
402. w in the BTR Interface These values may be edited in BTR Interface and are currently not stored in the configuration file so they must be entered locally on each machine 27 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Miscellaneous This section will contain any options which do not fit within the other listed preferences categories Auto InvF Off Before Programming Tool This option will try to turn off the inverse flow switch on the tool before it is programmed with a configuration file If the inverse flow switch is left on the tool will not be fully programmed Verify Each Tool Programming Response This option forces all of the programmed values verified to be correct before any other values may be stored to the tool Show Comparison Window After Programming This option automatically begins the tool and receiver configuration comparison process after the tool has been programmed Show Transmission Sequence Information When this option is enabled the transmission timings for each transmission sequence are shown beneath each sequence Tool Communications This section will allow you to change the settings that are used when you are using the tool communications window Display Transmission Overhead This will show you all of the characters used to communicate with the tool including the header and handshaking characters Display All Heceived Messages Window This will allow you to view a separa
403. w off Surveys While in modes 1 3 EM mode surveys are acquired and transmitted on the flow off state A typical survey will go as follows Top Drive 1 Stand is drilled down and pipe is put in slips and pumps are turned off 2 Tool will stop pulsing and the transmit delay time later the tool will begin transmitting the survey It will transmit for 2 minutes pump up time on software if the flow is not turned on 3 If the flow is turned on within the two minutes it will continue to pulse and drilling can resume 4 If the tool turns off after the two minutes it enters a downlink mode It will act like a normal pulse tool only transmit on flow on until the flow has been on for more than 1 minute 10 seconds At this time it resumes normal survey while pumps off 5 Re surveying while flow is off is done by turning the flow back on for 15 seconds then off The tool will then turn back off and back on after the transmit delay time and transmit up the new survey At this time flow can be turned back on and drilling can resume Kelly Bar Style Rig 1 Make connection and wash to bottom and continue with flow on for 1 minute 2 Turn flow off and wait the transmit delay time for survey to transmit 3 If the survey is good flow can be turned on and drilling can continue 4 If survey is bad flow must be turned on for 15 seconds and then off to make it survey and transmit again mud pulse mode mode 4 tool acts like normal Trans
404. we are sliding the Ball Screw Shaft into the Ball Screw Housing Align the hole in the Ball Screw Housing with the hole in the Ball Screw Shaft Tap in the pin that aligns the Pulser shaft You may want to use an aligning dowel from the opposite side to keep the two pieces aligned Place the thinner half of the bearing retainer on the Ball Screw Housing and align and insert the key into the slot in the ball screw housing 106 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Next the Bearing is placed in the thin half of the Bearing Mount that was previously put on the shaft The thicker bearing mount is now placed to secure the bearing in place The lugs will fit into the appropriate recess on the thin bearing mount Now the four screws 4 40 x 5 8 are screwed in and tightened to hold all three pieces together 107 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Next a spacer is placed on the shaft prior to installing the shaft nut L7 7 emen L7 mj 77727 Prior to installing the shaft nut use little bit of Loctite and then screw the 4 new shaft nut onto the new Pulser shaft Tighten the shaft nut with some pliers while holding the shaft with an adjustable wrench that will fit onto the flat on the shaft Do not over tighten Snug is good enough 108 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Apply Loctite to the screw in the shaft nut and tighten it down Install the new coupling on shaft while
405. wever some of the keys need not be used for normal operation Note difference of display in qTalk2 and qBus Monitor For normal operation the operator needs to use only 47 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software F4 Host This key stops the scrolling of the display to allow the operator to perform the desired commands Toggling the switch will alternate the command F7 Filter This key eliminates the unanswered link addresses that are polled Only the nodes that are active in qMIX will be displayed F8 Pause This key stops the scrolling of the data to allow the operator to view data Shift F1 Exit This allows the operator to exit the program Shift F4 VChk This command performs a system check on all of the nodes attached to the system Shift F5 qDFR This command performs a system check on all of the nodes attached to the system Note SF4 and SF5 commands are the same routines performed on the system in the Node Status screen in the qMWD_PC program Shift F9 Term This command places the system into the Terminal Mode Only operators with extensive training in the operation of qTalk should enter this routine Lists of qTalk variables and mnemonics are available in the QDT Training Manual and the qMWD Engineer s Reference Manual Vol 2 Appendices B2 and V Use these labels in the inquiry mode to gain familiarity and confidence in operating qTalk qTalk Terminal Mode Use the qTalk prog
406. x Assembly 6mm x 6mm Coupling Bearing Plain Flanged Spring Compression 302 SST Bearing Clamp Nut Retaining Ring 481 Spiral Pin Anti Rotation 113 Chapter 4 MWD Maintenance Manual Quantity 1 00 1 00 2 00 1 00 1 00 3 00 4 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 2 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 3 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 2 00 Non Serialized Part Part Number Size Product Line Description Quantity 406178 Common MWD Compression Spacer 1 00 406179 Common MWD Bearing Mount Downhole Pulser 1 00 AS 006 Common MWD AS 006 O Ring Viton 4 00 AS 015 Common MWD AS 015 O Ring Viton 4 00 AS 015BR Common MWD AS 015 Back up Ring Viton 4 00 AS 017 Common MWD AS 017 O Ring Viton 2 00 AS 020 Common MWD AS 020 O Ring Viton 4 00 AS 124 Common MWD AS 124 O Ring Viton 1 00 AS 125 Common MWD AS 125 O Ring Viton 6 00 AS 127 Common MWD AS 127 O Ring Viton 6 00 AS 217 Common MWD AS 217 O Ring Viton 2 00 AS 218 Common MWD AS 218 O Ring Viton 1 00 AS 220 Common MWD AS 220 O Ring Viton 3 00 SC 011 Common MWD Screw 8 32 x 5 16 Phil Flat SS 6 00 013 MWD Screw 6 32 x 1 2 SHCS SS 8 00 SC 015 Common MWD Screw 4 40 x 1 4 SHCS SS 1 00 SC 036 Common MWD Screw 6 32 X 5 16 SHCS SS 1 00 SC 071 Common MWD Screw M3 x 6 FHCS 3 00 SC 073 Common MWD Screw 4 40 x 1 SHCS 4 00 SC 078 Common MWD Screw 6 32 x 3 4 SHC SST 4 00 SC 082 Common MWD Screw 8 32 x
407. y contains a Single Port MPU Triple Power Supply and a Digital Orientation Module The Single Port MPU is a modular micro controller assembly based on the Motorola MC68HC1 1 microprocessor implementing GE Power Systems qMIX communications protocol qMIX 117V The Triple Power Supply provides regulated power for the complete assembly Designed for the demands of the oil and gas drilling environments the Digital orientation Module contains three axes of accelerometers and three axes of magnetometers Calibration data is provided with each unit Configurations are available with a downhole Recorder board and maximum operating temperatures to 150 or 175 The electrical input voltage is 18 32 VDC with an input power of 3 Watts peak and a serial peripheral interface SPI with a 12 bit A D resolution The mechanical dimensions are 1 40 diameter by 55 61 in length The module is designed to fit inside a 1 50 O D pressure housing designed to withstand 20 Klbs The system uses 21 pin and 15 pin MDM connectors and connects with the patented Snubber Shock assembly and Sensor End assembly The system is designed to withstand 1000g 0 5 msec sine shock on all axes It can withstand vibrations of 5 20 Hz 1 double amplitude and 20 200 Hz 30 grms on all axes The system is designed with two available operating temperature ranges 55 to 150 C 559 to 175 The calibrated pointing accuracy is 0 10
408. y Capcity 100 Transmitting Hours __ Total Hours from EM Chart 2 AHused AHLeft 3 AH Left MID Pulse Hours Left 1 1333 Amps Below is an example of a typical calculation Tool Settings 8 Amp 0 6 second pulse width EM transmitting for 5 Hrs Using two 22V 50 AH batteries for a total of 100 AH 1 80 Transmit Hours _ Capcity 100 _ MA 112 Hrs 2 100AH 714 Alused 286 AHLeft 3 28 6 AHLeft 2445 MUD Pulse Hours Left 0 1333 Amps 9 Chapter 8 PEM Tool 10 Chapter 8 Tool 11 Chapter 8 Tool
409. yed in the User Instructions Feedback window The Roll Test is designed to gather data at prescribed positions MWDRoll82 analyzes the data with respect to the tool being in those positions Data gathered out of position will skew the results and give a false indication that the tool is out of calibration Please follow the Roll Test instructions explicitly so that an accurate test can be performed 78 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software North M 7 Orientation P Orientation Take shots in the eight 8 ordinal positions for each of the three horizontal orientations Follow the instructions for performing a Roll Test Take two 2 shots in the vertical position Note the position of the sensors relative to the position changes during the roll test The results of the roll test are based on the tool being rotated through the prescribed positions South Orientation Vertical Orientation 79 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Opening Completed Roll Test Even after a roll test has been completed MWDRoll32 allows the user to re open it and perform all tasks just like in a new test For example if a user performs a roll test prints it and later determines that some of the data is bad he is able to re open the test and take more data shots The user can also change the header and re print the report To open a previous test 1 Click the Open Previous Roll Test item
410. you when using this bootloader method 69 Chapter 3 Surface Hardware amp Software Loading Software The Turbine Assembly Node 27 1 Switch to the C qMWD qTCR directory The data in this file will load into the processor used for the various routines in the qMWD Turbine Module 2 Run qTalk by typing qTalk2 c qTalk should b in your path 3 Press F4 to invoke the Host Mode 4 Press Shift F5 to interrogate all nodes on the network Be sure that nodes MPRx05 MPTx20 DRT 09 and qTCR2 7 all respond if they are connected Should one of the nodes not respond check all of the connections and repeat this step 5 Invoke the Boot Mode for the qMWD Turbine Module qTCR27 6 Run qTalk by typing qTalk2 C qTalk should be in the path If it is not go to the qTalk directory C qTalk and type qtalk2 7 Switch to Terminal Mode by pressing Shift F9 8 Set the Baud Rate to 9600 by pressing F6 Baud softkey 9 Switch to Second Menu by pressing F10 Next Menu 10 Idle the qBus by pressing F5 Idle Depress rapidly 3 4 times 11 Invoke the Chat Mode by pressing F7 Chat 12 At the prompt type the Link address 27 and press the Enter key The node selected will return a command prompt 13 Invoke Boot Mode by typing CCod 11 Boot and pressing the Enter key If successful then the target processor will NOT return a prompt 14 Exit qTalk by pressing F1 Do NOT press any other keys 15 Verify

EM-MWD Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents